0% found this document useful (0 votes)

146 views476 pages

LUM0107AA Z9 P2 PE2 User Reference Manual v1122 Jul 2019

Uploaded by

im.erm

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

146 views476 pages

LUM0107AA Z9 P2 PE2 User Reference Manual v1122 Jul 2019

Uploaded by

im.erm

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 476

Covers Model: Z9-P2 and Z9-PE2

Firmware v1.1.2.2

User-Reference Manual

Part Number: LUM0107AA

Revision: Jul-2019
Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2
User-Reference Manual

Safety Information
The products described in this manual can fail in a variety of modes due to misuse, age, or malfunction and is not
designed or intended for used in systems requiring fail-safe performance, including life safety systems. Systems
with the products must be designed to prevent personal injury and property damage during product operation
and in the event of product failure.

Warning! Do not remove or insert any of the cables while the unit is powered on unless the area is
known to be free of ignition concentrations of flammable gasses or vapors.

Warranty Information
FreeWave Technologies, Inc. warrants the FreeWave® ZumLink Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 (Product) that you have
purchased against defects in materials and manufacturing for a period of two years from the date of shipment,
depending on model number. In the event of a Product failure due to materials or workmanship, FreeWave will,
at its discretion, repair or replace the Product. For evaluation of Warranty coverage, return the Product to
FreeWave upon receiving a Return Material Authorization (RMA). The replacement product will remain under
warranty for 90 days or the remainder of the original product warranty period, whichever is longer.
IN NO EVENT WILL FREEWAVE TECHNOLOGIES, INC., ITS SUPPLIERS, OR ITS LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES ARISING
FROM THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT. THIS INCLUDES BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS
INFORMATION, INABILITY TO ACCESS OR SEND COMMUNICATION OR DATA, PERSONAL INJURY OR DAMAGE, OR OTHER LOSS
WHICH MAY ARISE FROM THE USE OF THIS PRODUCT. THE WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR USE
ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED.
FreeWave’s Warranty does not apply in the following circumstances:
1. If Product repair, adjustments, or parts replacements are required due to accident, neglect, or undue
physical, electrical, or electromagnetic stress.
2. If Product is used outside of FreeWave specifications as stated in the Product's data sheet.
3. If Product has been modified, repaired, or altered by Customer unless FreeWave specifically authorized
such alterations in each instance in writing. Where applicable, this includes the addition of conformal
coating.

Warning! The Z9-P2 is sold as a multi-board solution, assembled at the FreeWave factory. Any
alteration, including the separation of the individual boards, voids the FreeWave warranty.

Warning! The Z9-PE2 is sold as a fully enclosed device, assembled at the FreeWave factory.
Opening the device voids the FreeWave warranty.

FreeWave Technologies, Inc.

5395 Pearl Parkway, Boulder, CO 80301
303.381.9200
Toll Free: 1.866.923.6168
Fax: 303.786.9948
Copyright © 2019 by FreeWave Technologies, Inc.
www.freewave.com
All rights reserved.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 2 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

This document is subject to change without notice. This document is the property of FreeWave Technologies, Inc.
and contains proprietary information owned by FreeWave. This document cannot be reproduced in whole or in
part by any means without written permission from FreeWave Technologies, Inc.
Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2
User-Reference Manual

Table of Contents
Preface 14
1. Overview 16
1.1. Communication Method 17
1.2. ZumBoost Technology 17
1.2.1. Adaptive Spectrum Learning 17
1.2.2. Forward Error Correction 17
1.3. Packet Aggregation 17
1.3.1. Packet Compression 18
1.4. IQ Application Environment 18
2. Included & User-supplied Equipment 19
2.1. Included Equipment 19
2.2. User-supplied Equipment 19
3. Port Connections and Pinout Assignments 20
3.1. Z9-P2 Port Connections 21
3.2. Z9-PE2 Port Connections 21
3.3. Serial and Ethernet Port Details 22
3.4. Serial Pinout Assignments 23
4. Installation 24
5. Configuration 27
5.1. Drag and Drop Configuration 28
5.2. CLI Configuration 34
5.2.1. Connect the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 to the Computer 34
5.2.2. Access the CLI and Change the IP Address and nodeId 35
5.3. Web Interface Configuration 39
5.3.1. Setup the Computer IP Address Configuration 40
5.3.2. Web Interface Configuration - Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 44
6. Creating a Basic ZumLink Gateway and Endpoint Network 46
7. IQ Application Environment 48
7.1. Download the IQ Application Environment 49
7.2. Drag and Drop - Installation of the IQ Application Environment 52
7.3. Web Interface - Installation of IQ Application Environment 56
7.4. CLI Activation of the IQ Application Environment 60
7.4.1. Get the License File from FreeWave 60
7.4.2. Drag and Drop the License File onto the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 61
7.4.3. Activate the IQ Application Environment 64
7.4.4. Verify Successful Licensing and Activation 67
7.5. Web Interface Activation of the IQ Application Environment 69

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 3 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

7.5.1. Get the License File from FreeWave 69

7.5.2. Setup the Computer IP Address Configuration 70
7.5.3. Download the License File 74
7.5.4. Activate the IQ Application Environment 77
7.5.5. Verify Successful Licensing and Activation 81
7.6. Access the IQ Linux Environment 83
8. Web Interface - Administration 85
8.1. Setup the Computer IP Address Configuration 86
8.2. Change the COM Parameters 91
8.3. Change the Data Path Parameters 94
8.4. Change the Encryption Parameters 96
8.5. Change the Io Ex Com Parameters 98
8.6. Change the Local Diagnostics - Monitored Node 99
8.7. Change the Modbus Parameters 101
8.8. Change the Network Parameters 103
8.9. Change the NTP Parameters 105
8.10. Change the Radio Settings Parameters - Endpoint 107
8.11. Change the Radio Settings Parameters - Endpoint-Repeater 109
8.12. Change the Radio Settings Parameters - Gateway 111
8.13. Change the Radio Settings Parameters - Gateway-Repeater 114
8.14. Change the Security Parameters 117
8.15. Change the Services Parameters 119
8.16. Change the SNMP Parameters 121
8.17. Change the System Info Parameters 123
8.18. Change the Terminal Server Relay Parameters 125
9. Web Interface - Network Diagnostics 127
9.1. Add a Gateway Device IP Address 128
9.2. Download a Support Bundle 131
9.3. Save Network Diagnostics 134
9.4. Save a Network Diagram Image 137
9.5. Show Table in the Network Diagnostics Window 141
9.6. View the Network Diagnostics - Breadthfirst 143
9.7. View the Network Diagnostics - Cose-bilkent 145
9.8. View the Network Diagnostics - Grid 147
9.9. View the Network Diagnostics - Margin 149
9.10. View the Network Diagnostics - Margin with Neighbors 151
9.11. View the Network Diagnostics - RSSI 154
9.12. View the Network Diagnostics - RSSI with Neighbors 156
9.13. View the Network Diagnostics - Rx Rate 159

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 4 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

9.14. View the Network Diagnostics - Tx Rate 161

10. Change the Passwords 163
10.1. Change the ADMIN Password 164
10.2. Change the DEVUSER Password 164
11. IP Filtering 166
11.0.1. Example: Network Topology with Traffic at the Gateway 170
12. Repeaters 171
12.1. Repeater - Setup Table 173
12.1.1. Hopping OFF Repeater Setup 173
12.1.2. Hopping ON Repeater Setup 174
12.2. Basic Gateway and Endpoint-Repeater Setup 176
12.2.1. Open a Terminal Emulator Application 177
12.2.2. Hopping On: Gateway and Endpoint-Repeater Setup 180
12.2.3. Hopping Off: Gateway and Endpoint-Repeater Setup 182
12.3. Repeater - Examples 184
12.3.1. Gateway-Repeater 185
12.3.2. Endpoint-Repeater 186
12.3.3. Multiple Repeaters: Gateway-Repeater and Endpoint-Repeater 187
12.3.4. Multiple Repeaters: Four Endpoint-Repeaters 188
12.3.5. Back-to-Back Repeaters 190
13. Mounting the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 191
13.1. Z9-P2 Mounting 192
Mounting Kit - Included Equipment 192
13.2. Z9-PE2 Mounting 194
Mounting Kit - Included Equipment 194
13.3. Remove the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 from the DIN Rail 195
14. Approved Antennas 196
14.0.1. Yagi Directional Antennas 196
14.0.2. Omni-directional Antennas 196
14.0.3. Alternative Antennas 197
15. COM Parameters 198
15.1. baudrate 199
15.2. breakBeforeSendUs 199
15.3. connectionDrops 200
15.4. databits 201
15.5. delayBeforeSendMs 202
15.6. duplex 202
15.7. flowControl 203
15.8. handler 204

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 5 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

15.9. mode 206

15.10. parity 207
15.11. RxBytes 208
15.12. stopbits 209
15.13. TerminalServerPort 209
15.14. TerminalServerTimeOut 210
15.15. TxBytes 211
16. config Parameters 212
16.1. factoryDefaults 213
16.2. licenseState 213
16.3. reset 214
16.4. restore 214
16.5. save 215
17. dataPath Parameters 216
17.1. aggregateEnabled 217
17.2. compressionEnabled 218
17.3. fecRate 219
17.4. MacTableEntryAgeTimeout 221
17.5. otaMaxFragmentSize 223
17.6. routeMinSignalMarginThresh 223
18. date Parameters 225
18.1. dcAppStartTime 226
18.2. dcAppUptime 226
18.3. time 227
18.4. timeString 227
18.5. upTime 228
18.6. upTimeString 229
19. encryption Parameters 230
19.1. activeKey 231
19.2. encryptionMode 232
19.3. Key1 to Key 16 233
20. ioexcom Parameters 234
21. localDiagnostics Parameters 235
21.1. signalLevel 236
21.2. signalMargin 236
21.3. cntBadBCC 237
21.4. cntBadSync 237
21.5. cntETX 237
21.6. cntSTX 237

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 6 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

21.7. getStats 237

21.8. interfaceBytesRx 238
21.9. interfaceBytesTx 238
21.10. interfaceDataRx 238
21.11. interfaceDataTx 238
21.12. MacTableClear 238
21.13. MacTableShow 239
21.14. monitoredNode 239
21.15. noiseLevel 240
21.16. RadioAckTx 241
21.17. RadioBadAckRx 241
21.18. RadioBadCRC 241
21.19. RadioBadSync 242
21.20. RadioContentionDrop 243
21.21. RadioLLRx 243
21.22. RadioLLTx 244
21.23. RadioNoAckTx 244
21.24. RadioReliableRx 244
21.25. RadioReliableTx 244
21.26. RadioRexmit 245
21.27. RadioRx 245
21.28. RadioSendingDrop 245
21.29. RadioTimedOut 245
21.30. RadioTooLong 245
21.31. RadioTooShort 246
21.32. RadioTx 246
21.33. resetsDetected 246
21.34. resetsSent 246
21.35. resetStats 246
21.36. RxSuccess 247
21.37. showChannelDiags 248
21.38. showNodeDiags 248
21.39. SupplyVoltage 248
21.40. timestamp 249
21.41. TxAvailability 250
21.42. TxSuccess 250
21.43. VSWR 251
22. modbus Parameters 252
22.1. modbusDeviceId 253

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 7 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

22.2. modbusLayout 253

22.3. modbusRtuOverTcp 254
22.4. modbusTcp 255
22.5. read 255
22.6. readCoils 256
22.7. write 257
22.8. writeCoils 258
22.9. Modbus Use Cases 259
22.9.1. Connecting to a Device via Modbus 259
Modbus TCP 259
Modbus RTU over TCP 259
Modbus RTU using COM1 260
Modbus RTU using COM2 260
22.10. Reading Local Diagnostics and Radio Settings using Modbus 261
22.10.1. Reading from an External Modbus RTU Serial Device using COM1 261
22.10.2. Reading from the External Modbus RTU Serial Device using COM2 261
23. network Parameters 262
23.1. arpFilterEnabled 263
23.2. gateway 263
23.3. ip_address 264
23.4. mac_address 264
23.5. MTU 265
23.6. nameserver_address1 266
23.7. nameserver_address2 267
23.8. netmask 267
23.9. netmaskFilterEnabled 268
23.10. stpEnabled 269
23.11. txqueuelen 270
23.12. vlanMgmt 271
23.13. vlanTagPort1 271
23.14. vlanTagPort2 273
24. networkStats Parameters 274
24.1. rx_bytes 275
24.2. rx_dropped 275
24.3. rx_errors 276
24.4. rx_packets 276
24.5. tx_bytes 277
24.6. tx_dropped 277
24.7. tx_errors 278

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 8 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

24.8. tx_packets 278

25. NTP Parameters 280
25.1. ntp_address 281
25.2. ntpDate 282
25.3. ntpReference 283
25.4. ntpRestart 284
26. radioSettings Parameters 285
26.1. beaconBurstCount 286
26.2. beaconInterval 287
26.3. frequencyKey 288
26.4. frequencyMasks 290
26.5. lnaBypass 294
26.6. maxLinkDistanceinMiles 295
26.7. networkId 296
26.8. nodeId 296
26.9. radioFrequency 297
26.10. radioHoppingMode 299
26.11. radioMaxRepeaters 302
26.12. radioMode 304
26.13. radioRepeaterSlot 305
26.14. rfDataRate 307
26.15. txPower 309
27. radioSettingsHelpers Parameters 311
27.1. frequencyMasksErrors 312
28. runtimeEnvironment Parameters 313
28.1. rteInstalledByAppsVersion 314
28.2. rteReset 314
28.3. rteTemplateVersion 315
28.4. rteVersion 316
29. security Parameters 317
29.1. enableEthernetLogin 318
29.2. enablePtpInterface 318
30. services Parameters 320
30.1. timeOutCli 321
31. SNMP Parameters 322
31.1. roCommunityName 323
31.2. rwCommunityName 323
31.3. snmpUser 324
31.4. v1Enabled 325

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 9 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

31.5. v2cEnabled 326

31.6. v3Enabled 327
32. system Parameters 328
32.1. dump 329
32.2. dumpFormat 329
32.3. dumpPage 330
32.4. dumpTag 331
32.5. filter 331
32.6. help 331
32.7. login 332
32.8. logout 332
32.9. pages 333
32.10. password 333
32.11. passwordRestoreDefaults 334
32.12. showLayout 334
32.13. tags 335
32.14. whoami 335
33. systemInfo Parameters 336
33.1. deviceConfiguration 337
33.2. deviceFirmwareVersion 337
33.3. deviceId 338
33.4. deviceModel 338
33.5. deviceName 339
33.6. hopTableVersion 339
33.7. layoutHash 340
33.8. licenses 340
33.9. modelCode 341
33.10. radioFirmwareVersion 341
33.11. radioModel 342
33.12. radioModelCode 342
33.13. radioSerialNumber 343
33.14. resetInfo 343
33.15. rteTemplateVersion 344
33.16. rteVersion 344
33.17. serialNumber 345
33.18. themeVersion 345
34. TerminalServerRelay Parameters 347
34.1. remote_termserv_ip_address 348
34.2. termserv_relay_mapping 348

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 10 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

35. Terminal Server Relay Examples 352

35.1. Connected Terminal Servers and Terminal Server Relay 353
35.2. LOCAL_BOTH_COM_TO_REMOTE_BOTH_COM 355
35.3. LOCAL_COM1_TO_REMOTE_COM1 356
35.4. LOCAL_COM2_TO_REMOTE_COM2 357
35.5. LOCAL_BOTH_COM_TO_REMOTE_COM1 358
35.6. LOCAL_BOTH_COM_TO_REMOTE_COM2 359
35.7. LOCAL_COM1_TO_REMOTE_BOTH_COM 360
35.8. LOCAL_COM2_TO_REMOTE_BOTH_COM 361
35.9. Example: Multicast 362
36. Web Interface 363
36.1. COM window 364
36.2. Config window 366
36.3. Data Path window 368
36.4. Date window 370
36.5. Encryption window 372
36.6. File Upload window 374
36.7. Help window 376
36.8. Home window 378
36.9. ioExCom window 379
36.10. Local Diagnostics window 381
36.11. Modbus window 383
36.12. Network window 385
36.13. Network Diagnostics window 387
36.14. Network Stats window 392
36.15. NTP window 394
36.16. Radio Settings window - Endpoint 396
36.16.1. Radio Settings window - Endpoint-Repeater 398
36.16.2. Radio Settings window - Gateway 400
36.16.3. Radio Settings window - Gateway-Repeater 402
36.17. Radio Settings Helpers window 404
36.18. Runtime Environment window 406
36.19. Security window 408
36.20. Services window 410
36.21. SNMP window 412
36.22. System Info window 414
36.23. Terminal Server Relay window 416
36.24. User Data - Drag and Drop window 418
37. Release Notes 420

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 11 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

37.1. Version 1.1.2.2 (Initial Release) 420

38. Available Accessories 424
38.1. Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 Accessories 424
38.2. Z9-P2 Only Accessories 425
38.3. Z9-PE2 Only Accessories 425
39. Mechanical Drawing - Z9-P2 426
39.1. Z9-P2 - Top and Sides 426
39.2. Z9-P2 - Dimensions 427
40. Mechanical Drawing - Z9-PE2 428
40.1. Z9-PE2 - Top and Sides 428
40.2. Z9-PE2 - Back 429
41. Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 Hop Tables 430
41.1. Standard Hop Set - 900 MHz Channels 431
41.1.1. RF Data Rate: 115.2 kbps 431
41.1.2. RF Data Rate: 250 kbps 432
41.1.3. RF Data Rate: 500 kbps 432
41.1.4. RF Data Rate: 1 Mbps 432
41.1.5. RF Data Rate: 1.5 Mbps (Beta) 433
41.1.6. RF Data Rate: 4 Mbps 433
42. Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 MIB 434
42.1. CPU Usage 435
42.2. Disk Usage 435
42.3. Memory Usage 437
42.4. FreeWave Technologies - MIB 438
42.5. SNMP Write Access 451
Appendix A: Technical Specifications 453
Computing Resources 454
Data Transmission 454
General Information 455
Interfaces 456
Management 456
Networking 456
Power Requirements and Current Consumption 457
Receiver 457
Transmitter 458
Appendix B: OTA Interoperability 459
Appendix C: Firmware & Feature Interoperability 460
Appendix D: LEDs 462
Normal Operation 462

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 12 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

COM LEDs 464

Ethernet LEDs 464
Appendix E: Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 Files and Descriptions 465
Appendix F: Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 Modbus Register Map 467
Appendix G: FreeWave Legal Information 471

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 13 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Preface

Contact FreeWave Technical Support

For up-to-date troubleshooting information, check the Support page at www.freewave.com.
FreeWave provides technical support Monday through Friday, 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM Mountain
Time (GMT -7).
l Call toll-free at 1.866.923.6168.
l In Colorado, call 303.381.9200.
l Contact us through e-mail at support@freewave.com.

Additional Information
Note: Use the http://support.freewave.com/ website to download the latest documentation for the
Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.
Registration is required to use this website.

Document Styles
This document uses these styles:
l Parameter setting text appears as: [Page=radioSettings]
l File names appear as: configuration.cfg.
l File paths appear as: C:\Program Files (x86)\FreeWave Technologies.
l User-entered text appears as: xxxxxxxxx.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 14 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Caution: Indicates a situation that MAY cause damage to personnel, the radio, data, or
network.

Example: Provides example information of the related text.

FREEWAVE Recommends: Identifies FreeWave recommendation information.

Important!: Provides crucial information relevant to the text or procedure.

Note: Emphasis of specific information relevant to the text or procedure.

Provides time saving or informative suggestions about using the product.

Warning! Indicates a situation that WILL cause damage to personnel, the radio, data, or
network.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 15 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

1. Overview

Thank you for purchasing the FreeWave ZumLink Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

ZumLink is the latest generation of radios offered by FreeWave and consists of enclosed and
board level radios.
l Z9-P2 is a Board-level 900 MHz Ethernet radio with two Ethernet and two Serial ports.
l Z9-PE2 is an enclosed 900 MHz Ethernet radio with with two Ethernet and two Serial ports.
The Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 900 MHz Series:
l Operates in the unlicensed 900 MHz ISM band (902-928 MHz).
l Provides a maximum of 30dBm transmit output power.
l Is FCC compliant as both a Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum (FHSS) and a Digital
Modulating (DM) radio.
l Provides IQ, a Linux-based application environment for the deployment of applications at
the edge
l Has two Ethernet ports, two serial ports, one micro USB port, and one Type A USB port.

Note: The frequency hopping capability is available at all bandwidths and the single channel (DM)
operation is available for bandwidths of at least 500 kHz.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 16 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

1.1. Communication Method

The Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 use Listen Before Talk (LBT) and Carrier Sense Multiple Access (CSMA).
There are no assigned slots. The radios transmit when the channel is clear.
l The Gateway broadcasts packets to all Endpoints and Endpoint-Repeaters within range.
l Endpoint-Repeaters broadcast packets to all Endpoints and Endpoint-Repeaters within
range.
l The Endpoints unicast packets back to the Gateway or downstream Endpoint-Repeaters.
l The Gateway acknowledges the Endpoint or Endpoint-Repeater packets.
FreeWave’s traditional protocol has a Gateway Time Slot and an Endpoint Time Slot within a
frame.
l The Gateway transmits in its slot and listens in the Endpoint slot.
l The Endpoint transmits its slot and listens in the Gateway slot.

1.2. ZumBoost Technology

ZumLink incorporates ZumBoost technology using four performance-enhancing algorithms used
together or independently to improve throughput or link reliability in the most demanding RF
environments:

1.2.1. Adaptive Spectrum Learning

l Learns which RF signals are part of the ZumLink network and which are not, reducing bad
packets and retransmissions.
l Standard on all ZumLink radios, the "Listen Before Talk" algorithm provides spectrum

monitoring, delivering network intelligence and increasing throughputs in noisy

environments.

1.2.2. Forward Error Correction

l The fecRate (on page 219) increases the reliability of the data transferred over the air at the
cost of some transmission throughput.
l Improves sensitivity by 3dB to maximize link range in noisy environments.

l Adds redundant information to a data stream to detect packet errors and corrects them to

avoid retransmission of the packet.

1.3. Packet Aggregation

l The aggregateEnabled (on page 217) setting increases throughput of small packets by
combining multiple packets into a single packet minimizing the number of packets required
for transmission.
l Does NOT affect medium and large packets.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 17 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

1.3.1. Packet Compression

l When the compressionEnabled (on page 218) setting is enabled, the outgoing packets are
analyzed and, if the data packet can be compressed, sent compressed to transmit fewer
bits over the air.

1.4. IQ Application Environment

ZumLink provides the IQ Application Environment that allows for the development and
deployment of Linux-based applications onto the radio. The application has access to the same
computing resources as the radio but is in a segregated section of the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

Note: Any application using a Linux-compatible language can be housed in IQ.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 18 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

2. Included & User-supplied Equipment

2.1. Included Equipment

Included Equipment
Qty Description
1 Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 wireless device
1 Power Cable with flying leads and 2-pin connector (FreeWave Part Number: ASC2402PT)

Note: See the Available Accessories (on page 424).

2.2. User-supplied Equipment

l DC power source
l Power cable
l USB to micro-USB cable
l CAT5e / CAT6 Ethernet cable
l FCC approved antenna **
l Computer

Note: **See Approved Antennas (on page 196) for detailed information.
Approved antennas can be purchased directly from FreeWave.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 19 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

3. Port Connections and Pinout Assignments

Port Connections
l Z9-P2 Port Connections (on page 21)
l Z9-PE2 Port Connections (on page 21)
l Serial and Ethernet Port Details (on page 22)

Pinout Assignments
l Serial Pinout Assignments (on page 23)

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 20 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

3.1. Z9-P2 Port Connections

Figure 1: Z9-P2 Port Connections

3.2. Z9-PE2 Port Connections

Figure 2: Z9-PE2 Port Connections

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 21 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

3.3. Serial and Ethernet Port Details

Note: The RJ-45 Ethernet and the micro USB connectors are standard connectors with industry
standard pinout and signals.
See the LEDs (on page 462) for additional information.

Figure 3: Serial and Ethernet Ports - Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 22 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

3.4. Serial Pinout Assignments

Figure 4: Serial Pinout Assignments

(I) - Input (O) - Output (B) - Bidirectional

Serial Pinout Assignments

Pin Number RS232 RS485 RS422
1 -- -- --
2 CD --- (O) -- --
3 DTR --- (I) -- --
4 GND GND GND
5 RXD --- (I) -- TX+ (A+) --- (O)
6 TXD --- (O) TX+/RX+ (Y+) --- (B) RX+ (Y+) --- (I)
7 CTS --- (O) TX-/RX- (Z-) --- (B) RX- (Z-) --- (I)
8 RTS --- (I) -- TX- (B-) --- (O)
***Com1.mode= RS232 RS485 RS485
Com2.mode=
***Com1.duplex= Half or Full Half Full
Com2.duplex=

Note: ***See the COM Parameters (on page 198) for detailed information.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 23 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

4. Installation

l The Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 is approved to operate with an input voltage range of +6 to +30 VDC
that can supply at least 0.9 Amps at 6 VDC.
l See the Technical Specifications (on page 453) for additional information.

FREEWAVE Recommends: All input power supply wires should be at least 20 AWG (0.52 mm2)
wires.
A dedicated and stable power supply line is preferred.
The power supply used MUST provide more current than the amount of current drain listed in the
specifications for the product and voltage (at least 0.49 Amps at 12V).

Warning! Use electrostatic discharge (ESD) protectors to protect the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 from
electric shock and provide filtered conditioned power with over-voltage protection.

Note: The images in this procedure are for Windows® 7 and/or Windows® 10 and Firefox®.

Procedure
1. Install an FCC-approved antenna.
2. Connect the antenna feed line to the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 24 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Warning! Only FCC approved antennas may be used. See Approved Antennas (on
page 196).
The antenna must be professionally installed on a fixed, mounted, and permanent
outdoor structure to satisfy RF exposure requirements.
Any antenna placed outdoors must be properly grounded.
Use extreme caution when installing antennas and follow all instructions included with
the antenna.

If installing a directional antenna, preset the antenna’s direction appropriately.

3. Connect the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 to a power supply.

Important!: Torque to lock the conductors: 0.5-0.6 N-m. Torque for the mating jack: 0.3 N-m.

The LEDs (on page 462) blink to show startup.

4. Connect the USB cable to the computer and the Micro USB end to the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

Important!: The USB does NOT power the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2. It only provides a configuration
interface.

The FreeWave Drivers and ZumLink windows may open.

Figure 5: FreeWave Drivers window

Important!: The drivers install automatically.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 25 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 6: ZumLink window

5. Optional: Use the Ethernet port for data communications.

6. Continue with:
l Drag and Drop Configuration (on page 28)

l CLI Configuration (on page 34)

l Web Interface Configuration (on page 39)

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 26 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

5. Configuration

l Drag and Drop Configuration (on page 28)

l CLI Configuration (on page 34)
l Web Interface Configuration (on page 39)

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 27 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

5.1. Drag and Drop Configuration

Caution: This procedure requires the Windows® File Explorer file extension to be visible.
See the Microsoft® topic Windows File Name Extensions to view the extensions.

Important!: Windows® 7 or later is required to use the USB Drag and Drop.

Note: The images in this procedure are for Windows® 7 and/or Windows® 10 and Firefox®.

Procedure
1. Connect the USB cable to the computer and the Micro USB end to the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.
The FreeWave Drivers and ZumLink windows may open. (Figure 7 and Figure 8)

Figure 7: FreeWave Drivers window

Figure 8: ZumLink window

2. In the ZumLink window, double-click the connected Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

The files of the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 appear in the window.
3. Select the config.txt file and copy it to the clipboard (press <Ctrl+C>). Figure 9

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 28 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 9: Opened ZumLink window Showing the Default Files

4. Leave the ZumLink window open - it is used later in the procedures.

5. Open a Windows® File Explorer window and create a designated folder for changed
configuration files.

Example: C:\ZumLink Config File.

6. Paste (press <Ctrl+V>) the copied config.txt file into the designated folder.

Important!: The txt file must be copied to a separate location on the computer to edit.
The file CANNOT be changed directly in the ZumLink folder.

Figure 10: Copied config.txt File in the Designated Configuration Folder

7. Double-click the config.txt to open it in the default text editor.

Note: This example uses Notepad®.

8. Click the Notepad® File menu and click Save As. Figure 11

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 29 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 11: Notepad® window - File > Save As Menu

The Save As dialog box opens.

11. In the File Name text box, enter a file name with either the .cfg or .cfg.txt extension.

Note: The file name used in this example is for illustration purposes only.
Any name can be used. NO SPACES are allowed in the file name.

Important!: A .cfg file extension is required for Windows® 7.

A .cfg.txt file extension may be required for some versions of Windows® 8 and Windows®
10.
Failure to save the file with the correct extension type results in the file NOT being able to
integrate with the ZumLink config.txt file when copied to the ZumLink window.

12. Click the Save as type list box arrow and select All Files.

Figure 12: Save As dialog box with All Files (*.*) selected.

13. Click Save.

The dialog box closes and the text editor returns with the new .cfg or .cfg.txt file open.
14. As applicable, change these general settings:
l [Page=systemInfo]

l systemInfo.deviceName

l systemInfo.deviceId

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 30 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Note: See the systemInfo Parameters (on page 336) for detailed information about the
parameters.

l [Page=radioSettings]
l radioSettings.txPower

l radioSettings.rfDataRate***

l radioSettings.radioMode

l radioSettings.networkId***

l radioSettings.nodeId**

l radioSettings.radioFrequency***

l radioSettings.radioHoppingMode***

l radioSettings.beaconInterval

Note: See radioSettings Parameters (on page 285) for detailed information about these
settings.

**Each radio with the same networkId must have a UNIQUE nodeId.
A unique nodeId is required so that only one node will unicast an acknowledgment.
Otherwise, two or more nodes will unicast an acknowledgment that may collide.
***These are the Golden Settings and they MUST match between all radios with the
same networkId.

Important!: With radioHoppingMode enabled, only one radio can be designated as a

Gateway or Gateway-Repeater. All other radios MUST be designated as Endpoints or
Endpoint-Repeaters. For detailed information, see the radioSettings Parameters (on page
285).

15. For illustration, the radioSettings.radioMode was changed from Endpoint to Gateway.
Figure 13

Figure 13: radioSettings.radioMode Changed from Endpoint to Gateway

16. After changes are completed, press <Ctrl+S> or, on the File menu, click Save to save the
updated file.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 31 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

17. Close the text editor.

18. Locate and open the ZumLink window so it is side-by-side with the changed configuration
file window.
19. Open the Windows® File Explorer designated folder for changed configuration files.
20. Select the changed .cfg or .cfg.txt file. Figure 14

Figure 14: Select the Changed .cfg File

21. Drag and drop the .cfg or .cfg.txt file to the ZumLink window. Figure 15

Figure 15: Drag and Drop the .cfg File to the ZumLink Window

22. Wait for the .cfg or .cfg.txt file to integrate with the ZumLink config.txt file.

Note: The more changes made in the .cfg or .cfg.txt file, the longer the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2
takes to process the file and update the config.txt file.
If very few changes are made, the .cfg or .cfg.txt file does not appear in the window.

When the config.txt is updated, the changed .cfg or .cfg.txt file is removed from the list of
files in the ZumLink window.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 32 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

23. Double-click the result.txt file to verify there are No errors Detected with the identified
changes in the file. Figure 16

Figure 16: Opened result.txt File

Note: If an error is detected, the result.txt file will indicate that errors are present.

24. As appropriate, repeat the Drag and Drop procedure to correct any errors.
25. Optional: Double-click the config.txt file to view and verify the new Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2
configuration.
26. Optional: Change the Passwords (on page 163).

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 33 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

5.2. CLI Configuration

This procedure provides a Tera Term terminal connection to the FreeWave CLI. Other terminal
emulators (e.g., HyperTerminal, PuTTY) may be used.
The basic steps are:
A. Connect the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 to the Computer (on page 34)
B. Access the CLI and Change the IP Address and nodeId (on page 35)

Note: The images in this procedure are for Windows® 7 and/or Windows® 10 and Firefox®.

5.2.1. Connect the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 to the Computer

1. Connect the USB cable to the computer and the Micro USB end to the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.
The FreeWave Drivers and ZumLink windows may open.

Figure 17: FreeWave Drivers window

Figure 18: ZumLink window

2. Continue with Access the CLI and Change the IP Address and nodeId (on page 35).

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 34 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

5.2.2. Access the CLI and Change the IP Address and nodeId
Note: This procedure provides a Tera Term terminal connection to the FreeWave CLI. Other
terminal emulators (e.g., HyperTerminal, PuTTY) may be used.
The images in this procedure are for Windows® 7 and/or Windows® 10 and Firefox®.

1. On the computer connected to the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2, open a terminal program (e.g., Tera
Term http://ttssh2.osdn.jp/).
2. In Tera Term, click the File menu and select New Connection. Figure 19

Figure 19: File menu > New Connection

The Tera Term New Connection dialog box opens.

3. Click the Port list box arrow and select the COM port the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 is connected to.
Figure 20

Figure 20: Select the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 COM Port

Important!: The Port assignment varies from computer to computer.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 35 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

4. Click OK to save the changes and close the dialog box.

The Tera Term window shows the connected COM port and Baud rate in the title bar of the
window.
5. In the Tera Term window, click the Setup menu and select Serial Port. Figure 21

Figure 21: Setup menu > Serial Port

The Tera Term: Serial Port Setup dialog box opens. Figure 22

Figure 22: Tera Term: Serial Port Setup dialog box with Default Settings

6. Using Figure 22 as the example, verify the COM port settings are:
Speed (Baud Rate): 115200
Data (Databits): 8 bit
Parity: none
Stop bits: 1 bit
7. Click OK to save the changes and close the dialog box.
8. In the Tera Term window, press <Enter>.
The FreeWave CLI Login returns.
9. Enter admin for the Username and press <Enter>.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 36 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

10. Enter admin for the Password and press <Enter>.

Note: The default username and password is admin.

If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.
The password does not appear when typing - it looks blank.

The FreeWave Shell opens. Figure 23

Figure 23: FreeWave Shell

11. At the > prompt, type network and press <Enter>.

The Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 network settings appear. Figure 24

Figure 24: network Page window

Note: Steps 12 to 15 make the IP Address and nodeId unique.

12. At the > prompt, type ip_address=nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn and press <Enter>.

Note: Where nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is the IP Address assigned to each Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

13. Optional: Change the gateway (on page 263) and the netmask (on page 267) addresses, if
required.
14. At the > prompt, type nodeId=nnn and press <Enter>.

Note: Where nnn = a 1 to 5 digit number, unique to the connected radio.

The nodeId MUST be unique on each radio within the same networkId.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 37 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

15. At the > prompt, type save and press <Enter>.

16. Continue with: Change the Passwords (on page 163).

Note: Go to http://support.freewave.com/ to login and download the latest firmware for the
Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.
Registration is required to use this website.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 38 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

5.3. Web Interface Configuration

This procedure provides a Web Interface connection to the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.
The basic steps are:
A. Setup the Computer IP Address Configuration (on page 40)
B. Web Interface Configuration - Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 (on page 44)

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 39 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

5.3.1. Setup the Computer IP Address Configuration

Note: This procedure is required to access the Web Interface of the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.
The images in this procedure are for Windows® 10 and/or Firefox®.

1. Connect the CAT5e / CAT6 Ethernet cable to the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 Ethernet port and the
Ethernet port on the computer.
2. On the computer, open the Windows® Control Panel.
3. View the Control Panel window by Category and click Network and Sharing Center.
Figure 25

Figure 25: Control Panel > Network and Sharing Center

The Network and Sharing Center window opens.

4. Click the Change Adapter Settings link. Figure 26

Figure 26: Change Adapter Settings Link

The Network Connections window opens. Figure 27

5. Double-click the Local Area Connection link or the connected Network Connection.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 40 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 27: Network Connections window

The Ethernet Status dialog box opens. Figure 28

6. Click the Properties button.

Figure 28: Ethernet Status dialog box

The Ethernet Properties dialog box opens.

7. Select the Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) option. Figure 29
8. Click the Properties button.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 41 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 29: Ethernet Properties dialog box

The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties dialog box opens. Figure 30
9. IMPORTANT: Make a note of the current settings (to reverse this procedure later).

Figure 30: Default Example of Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)

Properties dialog box

10. Select the Use the following IP address option button.

11. In the IP Address text box, enter an IP Address that is in the same subnet range but a
DIFFERENT IP Address than the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 or all other units in the
network. Figure 31

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 42 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Example: Enter an IP Address from 192.168.111.1 to 192.168.111.254 (but NOT

192.168.111.100) and the Subnet Mask to 255.255.255.0.

Note: The default Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 IP Address is 192.168.111.100.

The default subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.

Figure 31: Changed Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties

dialog box

Note: An IP Address is NOT required in the Default Gateway text box.

12. Click OK to save the changes and close the dialog box.
13. Click Close twice to close the Local Area Connection Properties and Local Area
Connection Status dialog boxes.
14. Continue with Web Interface Configuration - Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 (on page 44).

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 43 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

5.3.2. Web Interface Configuration - Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2

Note: The images in this procedure are for Windows® 10 and/or Firefox®.

1. Verify the Setup the Computer IP Address Configuration (on page 40) procedure is
completed.
2. Open a web browser.
3. In the URL address bar, enter the IP address of the connected Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 and press
<Enter>.
The Home window (on page 378) opens.

Note: If this is the first time the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 is accessed, enter its default IP address of
192.168.111.100.
If the IP address was changed, enter that IP Address.
See the systemInfo Parameters (on page 336) for detailed information about the parameters.

4. On the Menu list, click the Configuration link. Figure 32

Figure 32: Configuration link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

6. In the Configuration window, click the Network tab.

The Network parameters are shown in Figure 33:

Figure 33: Network window

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 44 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Note: Steps 7 to 9 make the IP Address and nodeId unique.

Other values may be defined as long as they are unique to each Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

7. In the IP Address text box, enter the new IP Address for the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

Note: Where nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is the IP Address assigned to each Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

8. Optional: Change the gateway (on page 263) and the netmask (on page 267) addresses, if
required.
9. Click the Update button to save the changed information.

Warning! At this point, for Ethernet connections, the connection to the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2
is disabled.

10. Re-connect to the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 using the new IP Address entered in Step 7.
11. In the Configuration window, click the Radio Settings tab.
The Radio Settings parameters are shown in Figure 34:

Figure 34: Radio Settings window

Important!: Only radioSettings that apply to the current radioMode, rfDataRate, and
radioHoppingMode, and are visible in the CLI and the Web Interface and can be changed.

12. In the Node ID text box, enter the same unique 3-digit number used in the last octet of
the IP Address entered in Step 7.
13. Click the Update button to save the changed information.
14. Continue with: Change the Passwords (on page 163).

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 45 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

6. Creating a Basic ZumLink

Gateway and Endpoint Network

Note: The basic network described in this procedure is created by using either the Drag and Drop
Configuration (on page 28), the CLI Configuration (on page 34), or the Web Interface Configuration
(on page 39) procedure.

Figure 35 shows a basic network setup for the ZumLink device.

Figure 35: A Basic ZumLink Network

Procedure
Note: This example procedure is specific for CLI configuration.

1. Connect and apply power to the ZumLink devices in the network.

2. Complete the CLI Configuration (on page 34) procedure.
3. Select one radio and, at the > prompt, type radioSettings.radioMode=Gateway
and press <Enter>.
4. At the > prompt, type a setting between 10 and 30 for the radioSettings.txPower and
press <Enter>.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 46 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Example: txPower=30 or radioSettings.txPower=30.

Entering txpower=0 or radiosettings.txpower=0 changes the output power to the

minimum or 10 dB.

Note: See radioSettings Parameters (on page 285) for detailed information.

5. For the other radio in the network, at the > prompt, type
radioSettings.radioMode=Endpoint and press <Enter>.
6. Verify the radioSettings.networkId= setting is the same on ALL radios in the
network.

Note: For Endpoints, the radioSettings.nodeID is set automatically.

Important!: The Gateway radioSettings.nodeId defaults to 1 and CANNOT be changed.

7. At the > prompt, type save and press <Enter>.

A solid green CD LED indicates that the radios are linked.

Note: See LEDs (on page 462) for additional information.

8. Type logout and press <Enter> to exit the FreeWave Shell.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 47 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

7. IQ Application Environment

The Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 employs the IQ Application Environment to provide application deployment.

Download and Install

l Download the IQ Application Environment (on page 49)
l Drag and Drop - Installation of the IQ Application Environment (on page 52)
l Web Interface - Installation of IQ Application Environment (on page 56)

Activation and Usage

l CLI Activation of the IQ Application Environment (on page 60)
l Web Interface Activation of the IQ Application Environment (on page 69)
l Access the IQ Linux Environment (on page 83)

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 48 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

7.1. Download the IQ Application Environment

Complete this procedure if installing the IQ Application Environment.
Notes
l Zum products shipped from FreeWave with version v1.1.2.2 firmware have the IQ
Application Environment pre-installed but it is not licensed or activated.
l If currently using an IQ Application Environment, an update to 3_Optional_IQ_
Developer_Edition_v1_1_2_2.pkg is NOT required.
l The images in this procedure are for Windows® 7 and/or Windows® 10 and Firefox®.

Procedure
1. On the http://support.freewave.com/ web page, open the Firmware window for the Z9-P2
or Z9-PE2.

Important!: If continuing from the v1122-Download the Update File procedure for the
Firmware_v1_1_2_2.zip file, return to the Firmware window. Figure 36

Figure 36: Firmware window

2. Click the ZIQ-P or ZIQ-PE link.

The released Firmware v1.1.2.2 files appear in the window. Figure 37

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 49 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 37: Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 Firmware Upgrade window

3. Select and click the 3_Optional_IQ_Developer_Edition_v1_1_2_2.zip attachment. 7.1

The Opening dialog box opens. Figure 38

Figure 38: Opening 3_Optional_IQ_Developer_Edition_v1_1_2_2.zip

dialog box

4. Click OK.
The Enter name of file to save to dialog box opens. Figure 39

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 50 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 39: Enter name of file to save to dialog box

5. Search for and select a location to save the .zip file to and click Save.
The Enter name of file to save to dialog box closes.
6. Open a Windows® Explorer window and find the location where the .zip file was saved.
7. Double-click the .zip file.
8. Extract the files from the .zip file into the parent location.

Note: The file includes the .pkg file used for the IQ Application Environment installation.

9. Continue with:
l Drag and Drop - Installation of the IQ Application Environment (on page 52)

l Web Interface - Installation of IQ Application Environment (on page 56)

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 51 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

7.2. Drag and Drop - Installation of the IQ Application

Environment
FREEWAVE Recommends: If currently using an IQ Application Environment, an update is not
required. All existing IQ environments will work with v1.1.2.2 device firmware.

1. Verify the Download the IQ Application Environment (on page 49) procedure is completed.
2. IMPORTANT: Install the 1_Device_Firmware_v1_1_2_2.pkg file first.
See v1122-Firmware Update - Drag and Drop.
3. Locate and select the downloaded 3_Optional_IQ_Developer_Edition_v1_1_2_2.pkg
upgrade file. Figure 40

Figure 40: Selected 3_Optional_IQ_Developer_Edition_v1_1_2_2.pkg File

4. Drag and drop the .pkg file on to the ZumLink window. Figure 41
The .pkg file will disappear after a few minutes.

Figure 41: Drag and Drop the 3_Optional_IQ_Developer_Edition_v1_1_2_

2.pkg File to the ZumLink window

Important!: If the .pkg file is NOT accepted, a Windows® error message appears
immediately. Figure 42

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 52 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 42: Failed PKG Message dialog box

Important!: A .pkg or .fcf file extension is required for Windows® 7.

A .pkg.txt or .fcf.txt file extension may be required for some versions of Windows® 8, 8.1,
and 10.

a. If the .pkg file was rejected, change the extension of the .pkg file to .pkg.txt and select
that file.
b. Drag and drop the .pkg.txt file to the ZumLink window.
The .pkg.txt file will disappear after a few minutes.
The Copying message appears. Figure 43

Figure 43: Copying .pkg message

Caution: DO NOT click the Cancel button to stop the drag-n-drop process.
If the drag-n-drop process is canceled during the file copy process, the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2
cannot be accessed in Windows® File Explorer.
If this happens, reboot the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 and re-start the drag-n-drop process.

When the file is copied, the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 window is similar to Figure 44:

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 53 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 44: 3_Optional_IQ_Developer_Edition_v1_1_2_2.pkg File Dropped

in the ZumLink window

Note: If, after 6-10 minutes, the .pkg file has NOT disappeared, refresh the ZumLink
window.

Warning! DO NOT remove power from the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 during or immediately after
the firmware update process!
Wait until the Home window (on page 378) Web Interface is accessible before removing
power from the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 device.

If power is removed prematurely during the update process, the Web Interface pages
may not be accessible.
To recover from a failed Web Interface update, use the v1122-Firmware Update - Drag
and Drop procedure to reinstall the .pkg file and WAIT for the file update process to
complete.

DO NOT start another update or configuration change while an update is in progress.

5. Optional: View the updated rteTemplateVersion (on page 315) in the sys.info.txt file to
verify the update information. Figure 45

Important!: The image provides example information only.

Each Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 provides its own unique information.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 54 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 45: sys.info.txt file with Updated Firmware

Important!: For the v1.1.2.2 update, these settings should have this information:
systemInfo.deviceFirmwareVersion=FWT1122TB.66
Web Interface - Device Firmware Version is FWT1122TB.66
systemInfo.rteTemplateVersion=FWT1122TP.16
Web Interface - Rte Template Version is FWT1122TP.16
If neither of these are listed in their respective settings, repeat the upgrade procedure.

6. Contact FreeWave Technical Support (on page 14) for the license key file.
7. Continue with:
l CLI Activation of the IQ Application Environment (on page 60)

l Web Interface Activation of the IQ Application Environment (on page 69)

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 55 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

7.3. Web Interface - Installation of IQ Application

Environment
FREEWAVE Recommends: If currently using an IQ Application Environment, an update is not
required. All existing IQ environments will work with v1.1.2.2 device firmware.

Important!: If continuing from the v1122-Firmware Update - Web Interface-ZL procedure for
the Firmware_v1_1_1_2.zip file, go to Step 6.

3. Using a CAT5e / CAT6 Ethernet cable, connect the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 Ethernet port to the
computer's Ethernet port.
4. Open a web browser.
5. In the URL address bar, enter the IP address of the connected Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 and press
<Enter>.

Note: If this is the first time the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 is accessed, enter its default IP address of
192.168.111.100.
If the IP address was changed, enter that IP Address.

The Home window (on page 378) opens.

6. On the Menu list, click the File Upload link. Figure 46

Figure 46: File Upload link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

7. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and theFile Upload window opens. Figure 47

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 56 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 47: File Upload window

8. Click the Browse button.

The File Upload dialog box opens.
9. Locate and select the downloaded 3_Optional_IQ_Developer_Edition_v1_1_2_2.pkg
upgrade file. Figure 48

Figure 48: File Upload dialog box with Selected

3_Optional_IQ_Developer_Edition_v1_1_2_2.pkg File

10. Click Open.

The dialog box closes and the File Upload window returns showing the selected
file. Figure 49

Figure 49: File Upload window with Selected .pkg File

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 57 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

11. Click Send.

The File Upload window changes to show the upload percentage to the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

Note: When using the Web Interface on a computer with Windows® 8 or Windows® 10,
clicking Cancel does not halt the upload process.

The File Upload window refreshes and shows the uploaded file.

DO NOT start another update or configuration change while an update is in progress.

12. Refresh the browser window (press <F5>).

13. On the Menu list, click the System Info link. Figure 50

Figure 50: System Info link

The System Info window opens showing the updated firmware on the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.
Figure 51

Important!: The image provides example information only.

Each Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 provides its own unique information.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 58 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 51: System Info window

14. Contact FreeWave Technical Support (on page 14) for the license key file.
15. Continue with:
l CLI Activation of the IQ Application Environment (on page 60)

l Web Interface Activation of the IQ Application Environment (on page 69)

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 59 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

7.4. CLI Activation of the IQ Application Environment

This procedure uses the CLI to activate the IQ Application Environment for all ZumLink and ZIQ
products.

Note: See the Web Interface Activation of the IQ Application Environment (on page 69) to use the
Web Interface to activate the IQ Application Environment

Warning! The process of activating IQ Application Environment activates a fresh copy of the
IQ environment.

If IQ has already been activated, this procedure will erase any user-generated content and
settings in the existing Linux development environment.

These are the basic steps to license and activate the IQ Application Environment:
A. Get the License File from FreeWave (on page 60)
B. Drag and Drop the License File onto the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 (on page 61)
C. Activate the IQ Application Environment (on page 64)
D. Verify Successful Licensing and Activation (on page 67)

7.4.1. Get the License File from FreeWave

The Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 must be licensed to activate the IQ Application Environment. Licensing can
be added in the factory or after purchase.
1. Locate the Serial number on the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 product label.
2. Contact FreeWave Technical Support (on page 14) for the license key file.
3. Tech Support will ask for the Serial number and an email address to send the license
information to.
4. An email is sent to the provided address with a License_nnnnnnnnnn.LIC file attached.

Note: Where nnnnnnnnnn is the 10-digit Serial number of the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

5. Search for and select a location to save the .LIC file to.
6. Continue with Drag and Drop the License File onto the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 (on page 61).

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 60 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

7.4.2. Drag and Drop the License File onto the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2
Note: The images in this procedure are for Windows® 7 and/or Windows® 10 and Firefox®.

1. Connect the USB cable to the computer and the Micro USB end to the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.
The FreeWave Drivers and Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 windows open. Figure 52 and Figure 53

Figure 52: FreeWave Drivers window

Figure 53: ZumLink window

2. In the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 window, double-click the connected device.

The files of the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 appear in the window. Figure 54

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 61 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 54: Opened ZumLink window showing the Default Files

3. Locate and select the saved License_nnnnnnnnnn.LIC file. Figure 55

Figure 55: Selected License_nnnnnnnnnn.LIC File

4. Drag and drop the License_nnnnnnnnnn.LIC file on to the ZumLink window. Figure 56

Figure 56: Drag and Drop the License_nnnnnnnnnn.LIC file to the ZumLink
window

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 62 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Important!: If the License_nnnnnnnnnn.LIC file is NOT accepted, a Windows® error

message appears immediately. Figure 57

5.
Figure 57: Failed .LIC Message dialog box

Important!: A .LIC file extension is required for Windows® 7.

A .LIC.txt file extension may be required for some versions of Windows® 8, 8.1, and 10.

a. If the .LIC file was rejected, change the extension of the .LIC file to .LIC.txt and select
that file.
b. Drag and drop the .LIC.txt file to the ZumLink window.

Note: The Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 loads the License_nnnnnnnnnn.LIC file immediately.

Caution: Do NOT unplug the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 to reboot.

The rteReset=Hard and reset=now commands are required to reboot of the Z9-P2
or Z9-PE2.

6. Continue with Activate the IQ Application Environment (on page 64).

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 63 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

7.4.3. Activate the IQ Application Environment

Note: This procedure provides a Tera Term terminal connection to the FreeWave CLI. Other
terminal emulators (e.g., HyperTerminal, PuTTY) may be used.

1. Open a terminal emulator application (e.g., Tera Term http://ttssh2.osdn.jp/).

2. Select the Serial option buttion.
3. Click the Port list box arrow and select the COM port the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 is connected
to. Figure 58

Figure 58: Tera Term: New Connection window

4. Click OK.
The Tera Term New Connection dialog box closes.
The Tera Term window opens.
5. In the Tera Term window, press <Enter>.
The FreeWave CLI Login returns.
6. Enter admin for the Username and press <Enter>.
7. Enter admin for the Password and press <Enter>.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.
The password does not appear when typing - it looks blank.

The FreeWave Shell returns. Figure 59

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 64 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 59: FreeWave Shell window

8. At the > prompt, type, systemInfo and press <Enter>.

9. Verify the licenses (on page 340) parameter is licenses=Custom Apps. Figure 60

Figure 60: licenses=Custom Apps

10. Type rteReset=Hard and press <Enter>. Figure 61

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 65 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 61: rteReset=Hard window

11. Type reset=now and press <Enter>. Figure 62

The Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 reboots.

Figure 62: reset=Now window

The FreeWave Drivers and Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 windows open.

12. Continue with Verify Successful Licensing and Activation (on page 67).

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 66 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

7.4.4. Verify Successful Licensing and Activation

1. Re-open the terminal emulator application.

Figure 63: FreeWave Shell window

2. At the > prompt, type systeminfo and press <Enter>. Figure 64

Figure 64: The rteVersion is FWT1122TP.16

Important!: The image provides example information only.

Each Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 provides its own unique information.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 67 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

3. Verify these parameters have these values:

Verification Settings
Parameter Value
radioFirmwareVersion (on page 341) FWT1071TR.42
deviceFirmwareVersion (on page 337) FWT1122TB.66
rteVersion (on page 344) FWT1122TP.16
rteTemplateVersion (on page 344) FWT1122TP.16
licenses (on page 340) Custom Apps

4. Continue with Access the IQ Linux Environment (on page 83).

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 68 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

7.5. Web Interface Activation of the IQ Application

Environment
This procedure uses the Web Interface and the CLI to activate the IQ Application Environment.

Note: See the CLI Activation of the IQ Application Environment (on page 60) to use the CLI to
activate the IQ Application Environment.

Warning! The process of activating IQ Application Environment activates a fresh copy of the
IQ environment.

If IQ has already been activated, this procedure will erase any user-generated content and
settings in the existing Linux development environment.

These are the basic steps to license and activate the IQ Application Environment:
A. Get the License File from FreeWave (on page 69)
B. Setup the Computer IP Address Configuration (on page 70)
C. Download the License File (on page 74)
D. Activate the IQ Application Environment (on page 77)
E. Verify Successful Licensing and Activation (on page 81)

7.5.1. Get the License File from FreeWave

Note: Where nnnnnnnnnn is the 10-digit Serial number of the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

5. Search for and select a location to save the .LIC file to.
6. Continue with Setup the Computer IP Address Configuration (on page 70).

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 69 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

7.5.2. Setup the Computer IP Address Configuration

Note: This procedure is required to access the Web Interface of the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.
The images in this procedure are for Windows® 10 and/or Firefox®.

Figure 65: Control Panel > Network and Sharing Center

The Network and Sharing Center window opens.

4. Click the Change Adapter Settings link. Figure 66

Figure 66: Change Adapter Settings Link

The Network Connections window opens. Figure 67

5. Double-click the Local Area Connection link or the connected Network Connection.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 70 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 67: Network Connections window

The Ethernet Status dialog box opens. Figure 68

6. Click the Properties button.

Figure 68: Ethernet Status dialog box

The Ethernet Properties dialog box opens.

7. Select the Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) option. Figure 69
8. Click the Properties button.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 71 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 69: Ethernet Properties dialog box

The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties dialog box opens. Figure 70
9. IMPORTANT: Make a note of the current settings (to reverse this procedure later).

Figure 70: Default Example of Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)

Properties dialog box

10. Select the Use the following IP address option button.

11. In the IP Address text box, enter an IP Address that is in the same subnet range but a
DIFFERENT IP Address than the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 or all other units in the
network. Figure 71

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 72 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Example: Enter an IP Address from 192.168.111.1 to 192.168.111.254 (but NOT

192.168.111.100) and the Subnet Mask to 255.255.255.0.

Note: The default Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 IP Address is 192.168.111.100.

The default subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.

Figure 71: Changed Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties

dialog box

Note: An IP Address is NOT required in the Default Gateway text box.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 73 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

7.5.3. Download the License File

Note: The images in this procedure are for Windows® 7 and/or Windows® 10 and Firefox®.

1. Verify these procedures are completed:

a. Get the License File from FreeWave (on page 69)
b. Setup the Computer IP Address Configuration (on page 70)
2. Using a CAT5e / CAT6 Ethernet cable, connect the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 Ethernet port to the
computer's Ethernet port.
3. Open a web browser.
4. In the URL address bar, enter the IP address of the connected Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 and press
<Enter>.
The Home window (on page 378) opens.

Note: If this is the first time the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 is accessed, enter its default IP address of
192.168.111.100.
If the IP address was changed, enter that IP Address.

4. On the Menu list, click the File Upload link. Figure 72

Figure 72: File Upload link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

Figure 73: Authentication Required (Login) dialog box

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

The File Upload window opens. Figure 74

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 74 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 74: File Upload window

6. Click the Browse button.

The File Upload dialog box opens.
7. Locate and select the saved License_nnnnnnnnnn.LIC file. Figure 75

Figure 75: Selected License_nnnnnnnnnn.LIC File

8. Click Open.
The dialog box closes and the File Upload window returns showing the selected
file. Figure 76

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 75 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 76: File Upload window with Selected

License_nnnnnnnnnn.LIC File

9. Click Send.
The File Upload window refreshes and shows the uploaded file.
10. Continue with Activate the IQ Application Environment (on page 77).

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 76 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

7.5.4. Activate the IQ Application Environment

Note: This procedure provides a Tera Term terminal connection to the FreeWave CLI. Other
terminal emulators (e.g., HyperTerminal, PuTTY) may be used.

1. Open a terminal emulator application (e.g., Tera Term http://ttssh2.osdn.jp/).

The Security Warning dialog box opens. Figure 77

Figure 77: Security Warning dialog box

2. Click Continue.
The Tera Term: New Connection window opens. Figure 78

Figure 78: Tera Term: New Connection window

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 77 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

3. Click OK.
The Tera Term New Connection dialog box closes.
The SSH Authentication window opens. Figure 79

4.
Figure 79: SSH Authentication window

5. Enter admin for the User name and Passphrase.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.
The password does not appear when typing - it looks blank.

The FreeWave Shell returns.

6. Type rteReset=Hard and press <Enter>. Figure 80

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 78 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 80: FreeWave Shell window

The rteReset message appears. Figure 81

Figure 81: rteReset message

7. Type reset=now and press <Enter>. Figure 82

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 79 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 82: reset=Now window

The Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 reboots.

The FreeWave Drivers and Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 windows open.
12. Enter admin for the Username and press <Enter>.
13. Enter admin for the Password and press <Enter>.
The FreeWave Shell returns.

Figure 83: FreeWave Shell window

14. Continue with Verify Successful Licensing and Activation (on page 81).

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 80 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

7.5.5. Verify Successful Licensing and Activation

1. Re-open the terminal emulator application.

Figure 84: FreeWave Shell window

2. At the > prompt, type systeminfo and press <Enter>. Figure 85

Figure 85: The rteVersion is FWT1122TP.16

Important!: The image provides example information only.

Each Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 provides its own unique information.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 81 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

3. Verify these parameters have these values:

4. Continue with Access the IQ Linux Environment (on page 83).

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 82 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

7.6. Access the IQ Linux Environment

Note: The Developer Edition IQ Application Environment is the standard installation on all Zum
products.

There are different Editions of IQ available that incorporate developer tools and/or 3rd-party
software. All IQ Editions allow access to the Linux environment through the devuser login.
Once a developer is ready to integrate an application into IQ or build an application within IQ, they
should first visit FreeWave’s GitHub wiki environment that provides guidance on a wide range of
topics. (https://github.com/FreeWaveTechnologies/ZumIQ)

Procedure
1. Verify Successful Licensing and Activation (on page 81) is completed.
2. Log in to the FreeWave CLI as devuser.
The default password is devuser.
A Linux Bash prompt appears. Figure 86

Note: A unique password can be added at the time of purchase.

Contact FreeWave Technical Support (on page 14) for this password.

Figure 86: Linux Bash Prompt for the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 DEVUSER

3. Open a web browser.

4. Go to: https://github.com/FreeWaveTechnologies/ZumIQ.
The FreeWave Github IQ Main Page opens. Figure 87

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 83 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 87: FreeWave GitHub IQ Main Page

Note: The IQ GitHub site contains many valuable tools including demonstrations, sample
applications, troubleshooting guides and other information that can be very useful.

5. Scroll to the bottom of the Main page and click the Wiki link for IQ app development
information. Figure 88

Figure 88: Wiki link on the FreeWave GitHub ZumIQ Main Page

6. In the Wiki, go to Contents sidebar > Reference to locate the Installed Packages for the
version on the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 84 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

8. Web Interface - Administration

This section provides procedure information about administration of the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2
parameters.
l Change the COM Parameters (on page 91)
l Change the Data Path Parameters (on page 94)
l Change the Encryption Parameters (on page 96)
l Change the Io Ex Com Parameters (on page 98)
l Change the Local Diagnostics - Monitored Node (on page 99)
l Change the Modbus Parameters (on page 101)
l Change the Network Parameters (on page 103)
l Change the NTP Parameters (on page 105)
l Change the Radio Settings Parameters - Endpoint (on page 107)
l Change the Radio Settings Parameters - Endpoint-Repeater (on page 109)
l Change the Radio Settings Parameters - Gateway (on page 111)
l Change the Radio Settings Parameters - Gateway-Repeater (on page 114)
l Change the Security Parameters (on page 117)
l Change the Services Parameters (on page 119)
l Change the SNMP Parameters (on page 121)
l Change the System Info Parameters (on page 123)
l Change the Terminal Server Relay Parameters (on page 125)

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 85 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

8.1. Setup the Computer IP Address Configuration

Note: This procedure is required to access the Web Interface of the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.
The images in this procedure are for Windows® 10 and/or Firefox®.

Figure 89: Control Panel > Network and Sharing Center

The Network and Sharing Center window opens.

4. Click the Change Adapter Settings link. Figure 90

Figure 90: Change Adapter Settings Link

The Network Connections window opens. Figure 91

5. Double-click the Local Area Connection link or the connected Network Connection.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 86 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 91: Network Connections window

The Ethernet Status dialog box opens. Figure 92

6. Click the Properties button.

Figure 92: Ethernet Status dialog box

The Ethernet Properties dialog box opens.

7. Select the Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) option. Figure 93
8. Click the Properties button.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 87 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 93: Ethernet Properties dialog box

The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties dialog box opens. Figure 94
9. IMPORTANT: Make a note of the current settings (to reverse this procedure later).

Figure 94: Default Example of Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)

Properties dialog box

10. Select the Use the following IP address option button.

11. In the IP Address text box, enter an IP Address that is in the same subnet range but a
DIFFERENT IP Address than the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 or all other units in the
network. Figure 95

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 88 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Example: Enter an IP Address from 192.168.111.1 to 192.168.111.254 (but NOT

192.168.111.100) and the Subnet Mask to 255.255.255.0.

Note: The default Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 IP Address is 192.168.111.100.

The default subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.

Figure 95: Changed Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties

dialog box

Note: An IP Address is NOT required in the Default Gateway text box.

12. Click OK to save the changes and close the dialog box.
13. Click Close twice to close the Local Area Connection Properties and Local Area
Connection Status dialog boxes.
14. Optional: Continue with these Web Interface administration procedures:
l Change the COM Parameters (on page 91)

l Change the Data Path Parameters (on page 94)

l Change the Encryption Parameters (on page 96)

l Change the Io Ex Com Parameters (on page 98)

l Change the Local Diagnostics - Monitored Node (on page 99)

l Change the Modbus Parameters (on page 101)

l Change the Network Parameters (on page 103)

l Change the NTP Parameters (on page 105)

l Change the Radio Settings Parameters - Endpoint (on page 107)

l Change the Radio Settings Parameters - Endpoint-Repeater (on page 109)

l Change the Radio Settings Parameters - Gateway (on page 111)

l Change the Radio Settings Parameters - Gateway-Repeater (on page 114)

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 89 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

lChange the Security Parameters (on page 117)

l Change the Services Parameters (on page 119)

l Change the SNMP Parameters (on page 121)

l Change the System Info Parameters (on page 123)

l Change the Terminal Server Relay Parameters (on page 125)

15. Optional: Continue with the Web Interface - Network Diagnostics (on page 127).

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 90 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

8.2. Change the COM Parameters

Note: See the COM Parameters (on page 198) for detailed information about the parameters.

1. Verify the Setup the Computer IP Address Configuration (on page 86) procedure is
completed.
2. Open a web browser.
3. In the URL address bar, enter the IP address of the connected Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 and press
<Enter>.
The Home window (on page 378) opens.

4. On the Menu list, click the Configuration link. Figure 96

Figure 96: Configuration link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

6. Click either the COM1 or COM2 tab to access their respective COM parameters. Figure 97
or Figure 98

Note: See the COM Parameters (on page 198) for detailed information about the parameters.
The parameters for COM1 and COM2 are the same except for the TerminalServerPort (on
page 209) parameter setting.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 91 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 97: COM1 window

Figure 98: COM2 window

7. As applicable, change these parameters:

a. Click the Mode list box arrow and select the COM port mode.
b. Click the Handler list box arrow and select the designated protocol handler.
c. Click the Baudrate list box arrow and select a COM port baud rate.
d. Click the Databits list box arrow and select the number of data bits in the frame for
COM1 or COM2.
e. Click the Parity list box arrow and select the COM port parity bits for the system.
f. Click the Stopbits list box arrow and select the COM port number of stop bits.
g. Click the Duplex list box arrow and select the duplex designation.
h. If applicable for COM2, click the Flow Control list box arrow and select Hardware to
activate flowControl.

Important!: The RTS and CTS signals are ONLY available for COM2.
The RTS and CTS signals are NOT supported for COM1.

i. In the Delay Before Send MS text box, enter the milliseconds of time delay.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 92 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

j. In the Break Before Send Us text box, enter the number of milliseconds the COM port
will send a break signal.
k. In the Terminal Server Port text box, enter the designated TCP port number.

FREEWAVE Recommends: If using the TerminalServerPort parameter, keep the TCP

port numbers as their defaults.

l. In the Terminal Server Time Out text box, enter the number of seconds the Terminal
Server remains open without transmitting or receiving data from the network.

Note: TxBytes (on page 211), RxBytes (on page 208), and connectionDrops (on page 200)
are Read-only parameters.

8. Click the Update button to save the changed information.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 93 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

8.3. Change the Data Path Parameters

Note: See the dataPath Parameters (on page 216) for detailed information about the parameters.

4. On the Menu list, click the Configuration link. Figure 99

Figure 99: Configuration link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

6. Click the Data Path tab to access the Data Path parameters. Figure 100

Note: See the dataPath Parameters (on page 216) for detailed information about the
parameters.

Figure 100: Data Path window

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 94 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

7. As applicable, change these parameters:

a. Click the Compression Enabled list box arrow and select False to disable
compression of outgoing packets.

Note: By default, the Compression Enabled is enabled (set to True).

b. In the OTA Max Fragment Size text box, enter the maximum fragment size, in bytes,
sent over the air.
c. Click the FEC Rate list box arrow and select the Forward Error Correction (FEC) rate.
d. Click the Aggregate Enabled list box arrow and select True to enable this parameter
and increase throughput of small packets.

Note: By default, the Aggregate Enabled is NOT enabled (set to False).

e. In the Route Min Signal Margin Thresh text box, enter the minimum threshold signal
margin in dB.
f. In the MAC Table Entry Age Timeout text box, enter the number of seconds before
an inactive entry in the MAC Table ages out and expires.
8. Click the Update button to save the changed information.

FREEWAVE Recommends: When viewing local diagnostics, if the RadioBadCRC (on page 241)
count is more than 15-20% of the total transmitted packets (the RadioLLTx (on page 244) count),
enabling the fecRate (on page 219) setting is beneficial.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 95 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

8.4. Change the Encryption Parameters

Note: See the encryption Parameters (on page 230) for detailed information about the parameters.

4. On the Menu list, click the Configuration link. Figure 101

Figure 101: Configuration link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

6. Click the Encryption tab to access the Encryption parameters. Figure 102

Note: See the encryption Parameters (on page 230) for detailed information about the
parameters.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 96 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 102: Encryption window

7. Click the Encryption Mode list box arrow and select the designated encryption mode.
8. In the KeyX text box, enter either the 128- or 256-bit key in 16 or 32 hexadecimal format
respectively.

Note: Enter Clear to erase a previously enter key.

See the Key1 to Key 16 (on page 233) parameter for additional information.

9. Click the Active Key list box arrow and select the designated active key.

Note: See the activeKey (on page 231) parameter for additional information.

10. Click the Update button to save the changed information.

The encryption changes take effect immediately.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 97 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

8.5. Change the Io Ex Com Parameters

Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 98 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

8.6. Change the Local Diagnostics - Monitored Node

Note: See the localDiagnostics Parameters (on page 235) for detailed information about the
parameters.

4. On the Menu list, click the Configuration link. Figure 103

Figure 103: Configuration link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

6. Click the Local Diagnostics tab to access the Local Diagnostics parameters.

Note: See the localDiagnostics Parameters (on page 235) for detailed information about the
parameters.

7. Scroll to the Monitored Node text box. Figure 104

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 99 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 104: Local Diagnostics window

8. In the Monitored Node text box, enter the nodeId (on page 296) to monitor.
9. Click the Update button to save the changed information.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 100 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

8.7. Change the Modbus Parameters

Note: See the modbus Parameters (on page 252) for detailed information about the parameters.

4. On the Menu list, click the Configuration link. Figure 105

Figure 105: Configuration link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

6. Click the Modbus tab to access the Modbus parameters. Figure 106

Note: See the modbus Parameters (on page 252) for detailed information about the
parameters.

Figure 106: Modbus window

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 101 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

7. As applicable, change these parameters:

a. In the Modbus Device ID text box, enter a user-defined Modbus device ID.
b. In the Modbus TCP text box, enter the TCP port used for the Modbus TCP requests.
c. In the Modbus Rtu Over TCP text box, enter the TCP port used for the Modbus RTU
over TCP requests.
8. Click the Update button to save the changed information.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 102 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

8.8. Change the Network Parameters

Note: See the network Parameters (on page 262) for detailed information about the parameters.

4. On the Menu list, click the Configuration link. Figure 107

Figure 107: Configuration link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

6. Click the Network tab to access the Network parameters. Figure 108

Note: See the network Parameters (on page 262) for detailed information about the
parameters.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 103 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 108: Network window

Note: The mac_address (on page 264) parameter is Read-only.

7. As applicable, change these parameters:

a. In the IP Address text box, enter the IP address of the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 assigned by
the IT department for the network.
b. In the Netmask text box, enter the Netmask of the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.
c. In the Gateway text box, enter the Gateway IP address for the network.
d. Click the STP Enabled list box arrow and select True to enable the Spanning Tree
Protocol.

Note: By default, the STP Enabled is NOT enabled (set to False).

e. In the Txqueuelen text box, enter the maximum number of packets to hold in the
transmit queue.
f. In the MTU text box, enter the maximum transmission unit.
g. Click the Netmask Filter Enabled list box arrow and select True to enable the bridge
firewall and restrict network communication to current IPv4 subnet.

Note: By default, the Netmask Filter Enabled is enabled (set to False).

h.In the Nameserver Address 1 text box, enter a user-defined DNS IP address.
i.
In the Nameserver Address 2 text box, enter a user-defined DNS IP address..
j.
Click the Arp Filter Enabled list box arrow and select True to enable the parameter.
k.In the Vlan MGMT text box, enter the Management VLAN ID.
l.
In the Vlan Tag Port 1 and/or Vlan Tag Port 2 text boxes, enter the VLAN ID for the
designated port.
8. Click the Update button to save the changed information.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 104 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

8.9. Change the NTP Parameters

Note: See the NTP Parameters (on page 280) for detailed information about the parameters.

4. On the Menu list, click the Configuration link. Figure 109

Figure 109: Configuration link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

6. Click the NTP tab to access the NTP parameters. Figure 110

Note: See the NTP Parameters (on page 280) for detailed information about the parameters.

Figure 110: NTP window

7. As applicable, change these parameters:

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 105 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

a. Click the NTP Reference list box arrow and select either NETWORK_TIME_
SERVER or REFCLK_LOCALCLOCK.
b. In the NTP Restart text box, enter Now to restart the the NTP system.
c. In the NTP Date text box, enter Now to synchronize the local clock with the time from
the NTP servers specified in the ntp_address (on page 281) settings.
d. In the NTP Address 2 to 5 text boxes, enter the IP address of the servers used for
synchronizing time.

Note: By default, the NTP Address 1 is time.nist.gov.

8. Click the Update button to save the changed information.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 106 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

8.10. Change the Radio Settings Parameters - Endpoint

Note: See the radioSettings Parameters (on page 285) for detailed information about the parameters.

4. On the Menu list, click the Configuration link. Figure 111

Figure 111: Configuration link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

6. Click the Radio Settings tab to access the Radio Settings parameters.
7. Click the Radio Mode list box arrow and select the device type to designate the Z9-P2 or
Z9-PE2 as an Endpoint. Figure 112

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 107 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Note: See the radioSettings Parameters (on page 285) for detailed information about the
parameters.

Figure 112: Radio Settings window - Endpoint

8. As applicable, change these parameters:

a. Click the RF Data Rate list box arrow and select the RF link data rate in bits per
second.
b. Click the Tx Power list box arrow and select the dB RF output transmit power level for
the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.
c. In the Network ID text box, enter the network identifier that subdivides traffic on radio
units.
d. In the Node ID text box, enter a user-designated nodeId instead of the auto-generated
nodeId.
e. Optional: Click the Radio Hopping Mode list box arrow and select Off to disable
frequency hopping.

Note: By default, the Radio Hopping Mode is enabled (set to Hopping_On).

f. Optional: In the LNA Bypass text box, enter 1 to bypass the Low Noise Amplifier
(LNA) and reduce the radio module receive signal by 10dB.

Note: By default, the LNA Bypass is enabled (set to 0 (zero)).

g. In the Max Link Distance in Miles text box, enter the maximum one-way distance (in
miles) used to set the maximum expected propagation delay between any Endpoints in
the network.
h. In the Frequency Masks text box, enter the exact specified format of the frequency
range to mask.

Caution: The exact syntax is required in the Frequency Masks text box.
See frequencyMasks (on page 290) for detailed information.

9. Click the Update button to save the changed information.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 108 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

8.11. Change the Radio Settings Parameters - Endpoint-

Repeater
Note: See the radioSettings Parameters (on page 285) for detailed information about the parameters.

4. On the Menu list, click the Configuration link. Figure 113

Figure 113: Configuration link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

6. Click the Radio Settings tab to access the Radio Settings parameters.
7. Click the Radio Mode list box arrow and select the device type to designate the Z9-P2 or
Z9-PE2 as an Endpoint_Repeater. Figure 114

Note: See the radioSettings Parameters (on page 285) for detailed information about the
parameters.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 109 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 114: Radio Settings window - Endpoint_Repeater

8. As applicable, change these parameters:

a. Click the RF Data Rate list box arrow and select the RF link data rate in bits per
second.
b. In the Radio Repeater Slot text box, enter which repeater slot the Endpoint-Repeater
uses.
c. Click the Tx Power list box arrow and select the dB RF output transmit power level for
the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.
d. In the Network ID text box, enter the network identifier that subdivides traffic on radio
units.
e. In the Node ID text box, enter a user-designated nodeId instead of the auto-generated
nodeId.
f. Optional: Click the Radio Hopping Mode list box arrow and select Off to disable
frequency hopping.

Note: By default, the Radio Hopping Mode is enabled (set to Hopping_On).

g. Optional: In the LNA Bypass text box, enter 1 to bypass the Low Noise Amplifier
(LNA) and reduce the radio module receive signal by 10dB.

Note: By default, the LNA Bypass is enabled (set to 0 (zero)).

h. In the Max Link Distance in Miles text box, enter the maximum one-way distance (in
miles) used to set the maximum expected propagation delay between any Endpoints in
the network.
i. In the Frequency Masks text box, enter the exact specified format of the frequency
range to mask.

Caution: The exact syntax is required in the Frequency Masks text box.
See frequencyMasks (on page 290) for detailed information.

9. Click the Update button to save the changed information.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 110 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

8.12. Change the Radio Settings Parameters - Gateway

Note: See the radioSettings Parameters (on page 285) for detailed information about the parameters.

4. On the Menu list, click the Configuration link. Figure 115

Figure 115: Configuration link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

6. Click the Radio Settings tab to access the Radio Settings parameters.
7. Accept the Radio Mode default of Gateway. Figure 116

Note: See the radioSettings Parameters (on page 285) for detailed information about the
parameters.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 111 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 116: Radio Settings window - Gateway

8. As applicable, change these parameters:

a. Click the RF Data Rate list box arrow and select the RF link data rate in bits per
second.
b. In the Radio Max Repeaters text box, enter the number of Repeater slots in the
network.
c. Click the Tx Power list box arrow and select the dB RF output transmit power level for
the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.
d. In the Network ID text box, enter the network identifier that subdivides traffic on radio
units.
e. Click the Frequency Key list box arrow and select the Key number used as an index to
select a hopping table.
f. Optional: Click the Radio Hopping Mode list box arrow and select Off to disable
frequency hopping.

Note: By default, the Radio Hopping Mode is enabled (set to Hopping_On).

g. Click the Beacon Interval list box arrow and select how often a Gateway radio sends
out a beacon packet and changes to the next radio frequency in the hopping pattern.
h. In the Beacon Burst Count text box, enter the number of consecutive beacons to
send per beaconInterval time.
i. Optional: In the LNA Bypass text box, enter 1 to bypass the Low Noise Amplifier
(LNA) and reduce the radio module receive signal by 10dB.

Note: By default, the LNA Bypass is enabled (set to 0 (zero)).

j. In the Max Link Distance in Miles text box, enter the maximum one-way distance (in
miles) used to set the maximum expected propagation delay between any Endpoints in
the network.
k. In the Frequency Masks text box, enter the exact specified format of the frequency
range to mask.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 112 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Caution: The exact syntax is required in the Frequency Masks text box.
See frequencyMasks (on page 290) for detailed information.

9. Click the Update button to save the changed information.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 113 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

8.13. Change the Radio Settings Parameters - Gateway-

Repeater
Note: See the radioSettings Parameters (on page 285) for detailed information about the parameters.

4. On the Menu list, click the Configuration link. Figure 117

Figure 117: Configuration link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

6. Click the Radio Settings tab to access the Radio Settings parameters.
7. Click the Radio Mode list box arrow and select the device type to designate the Z9-P2 or
Z9-PE2 as a Gateway_Repeater. Figure 118

Note: See the radioSettings Parameters (on page 285) for detailed information about the
parameters.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 114 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 118: Radio Settings window - Gateway_Repeater

8. As applicable, change these parameters:

Note: By default, the Radio Hopping Mode is enabled (set to Hopping_On).

Note: By default, the LNA Bypass is enabled (set to 0 (zero)).

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 115 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Caution: The exact syntax is required in the Frequency Masks text box.
See frequencyMasks (on page 290) for detailed information.

9. Click the Update button to save the changed information.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 116 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

8.14. Change the Security Parameters

Note: See the security Parameters (on page 317) for detailed information about the parameters.

4. On the Menu list, click the Configuration link. Figure 119

Figure 119: Configuration link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

6. Click the Security tab to access the Security parameters. Figure 120

Note: See the security Parameters (on page 317) for detailed information about the
parameters.

Figure 120: Security window

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 117 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

7. As applicable, change these parameters:

a. Optional: Click the Ethernet PTP Interface list box arrow and select False to disable
the PTP (drag-and-drop) interface.

Note: By default, the Enable Ethernet Login is enabled (set to True).

See the enableEthernetLogin (on page 318) parameter for additional information.

b. Optional: Click the Enable Ethernet Login list box arrow and select False to disable
SSH logins.

Note: By default, the Ethernet PTP Interface is enabled (set to True).

See the enablePtpInterface (on page 318) parameter for additional information.

8. Click the Update button to save the changed information.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 118 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

8.15. Change the Services Parameters

Note: See the services Parameters (on page 320) for detailed information about the parameters.

4. On the Menu list, click the Configuration link. Figure 121

Figure 121: Configuration link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

6. Click the Services tab to access the Services parameters. Figure 122

Note: See the services Parameters (on page 320) for detailed information about the
parameters.

Figure 122: Services window

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 119 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

7. In the Time Out CLI text box, enter the number of seconds of idle time before the CLI
connection is closed.
8. Click the Update button to save the changed information.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 120 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

8.16. Change the SNMP Parameters

Note: See the SNMP Parameters (on page 322) for detailed information about the parameters.

4. On the Menu list, click the Configuration link. Figure 123

Figure 123: Configuration link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

6. Click the SNMP tab to access the SNMP parameters.

Note: See the SNMP Parameters (on page 322) for detailed information about the
parameters.

Figure 124: SNMP window

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 121 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

7. As applicable, change these parameters:

a. Click the V1 Enabled list box arrow and select True to enable SNMP V1.

Note: For security, the protocol SNMP v1 is read-only.

See the v1Enabled (on page 325) parameter for additional information.

b. Click the V2C Enabled list box arrow and select True to enable SNMP V2C.

Note: By default, the v2c Enabled is NOT enabled (set to False).

See the v2cEnabled (on page 326) parameter for additional information.

c. Click the V3 Enabled list box arrow and select True to enable SNMP V3.

Note: By default, the v3 Enabled is NOT enabled (set to False).

See the v3Enabled (on page 327) parameter for additional information.

d. In the RO Community Name text box, enter the user-designated name for SNMP
V1/V2C Read-only access.
e. In the RW Community Name text box, enter the user-designated name for SNMP
V1/V2C Read-Write access.

Note: The SNMP User text box is Read-only in the Web Interface.
Use the CLI to change this parameter.

8. Click the Update button to save the changed information.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 122 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

8.17. Change the System Info Parameters

Note: See the systemInfo Parameters (on page 336) for detailed information about the parameters.

4. On the Menu list, click the Configuration link. Figure 125

Figure 125: Configuration link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

6. Click the System Info tab to access the System Info parameters. Figure 126

Note: See the systemInfo Parameters (on page 336) for detailed information about the
parameters.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 123 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 126: System Info window

7. As applicable, change these parameters:

a. In the Device Name text box, enter the user-defined name for the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.
b. In the Device ID text box, enter the user-defined Device ID identifier for the Z9-P2 or
Z9-PE2.

Note: All other parameters in the System Info window are Read-only.

8. Click the Update button to save the changed information.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 124 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

8.18. Change the Terminal Server Relay Parameters

Note: See the TerminalServerRelay Parameters (on page 347) for detailed information about the
parameters.

4. On the Menu list, click the Configuration link. Figure 127

Figure 127: Configuration link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

6. Click the Terminal Server Relay tab to access the Terminal Server Relay
parameters. Figure 128

Note: See the TerminalServerRelay Parameters (on page 347) for detailed information about
the parameters.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 125 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 128: Terminal Server Relay window

7. As applicable, change these parameters:

a. Click the Termserv Relay Mapping list box arrow and select a setting used for the
transfer of a bi-directional byte stream between two serial device servers.
b. In the Remote Termserv IP Address text box, enter the IP address for the remote
terminal server.
8. Click the Update button to save the changed information.
9. Restart the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 for the changes to be implemented.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 126 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

9. Web Interface - Network Diagnostics

This section provides procedure information about adding, saving, and viewing the Z9-P2 or Z9-
PE2 Network Diagnostic diagrams.
l Add a Gateway Device IP Address (on page 128)
l Download a Support Bundle (on page 131)
l Save Network Diagnostics (on page 134)
l Save a Network Diagram Image (on page 137)
l Show Table in the Network Diagnostics Window (on page 141)
l View the Network Diagnostics - Breadthfirst (on page 143)
l View the Network Diagnostics - Cose-bilkent (on page 145)
l View the Network Diagnostics - Grid (on page 147)
l View the Network Diagnostics - Margin (on page 149)
l View the Network Diagnostics - Margin with Neighbors (on page 151)
l View the Network Diagnostics - RSSI (on page 154)
l View the Network Diagnostics - RSSI with Neighbors (on page 156)
l View the Network Diagnostics - Rx Rate (on page 159)
l View the Network Diagnostics - Tx Rate (on page 161)

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 127 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

9.1. Add a Gateway Device IP Address

Usually the Gateway is auto-detected but sometimes this might not happen. This procedure
allows the user to designate a specific Gateway IP address.

Note: The images in this procedure are for Windows® 10 and/or Firefox®.

Procedure
1. Verify the Setup the Computer IP Address Configuration (on page 86) procedure is
completed.
2. Open a web browser.
3. In the URL address bar, enter the IP address of the connected Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 and press
<Enter>.
The Home window (on page 378) opens.

4. On the Menu list, click the Network Diagnostics link.

Figure 129: Network Diagnostics link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

The Network Diagnostics window opens, scanning the network. Figure 130
The diagram takes a few moments to render.
The Options list box default selection is Margin.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 128 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 130: Network Diagnostics window - Scanning Network

To update the Network Diagnostics window (on page 387), refresh the browser to clear
the browser cache.

6. Click the Options list box arrow and select the Gateway IP option. Figure 131

Figure 131: Options list box - Gateway IP option Selected

The Add Device IP dialog box opens showing the currently designated Gateway IP
address. Figure 132

Note: The image shows the IP address blocked out.

Figure 132: Add Device IP dialog box

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 129 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

7. In the IP text box, enter the IP address of the designated a Gateway device and click
Submit.

Important!: Network settings are NOT changed when the Gateway IP address is specified.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 130 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

9.2. Download a Support Bundle

Save the current network performance reading to send to FreeWave Technical Support for faster
issue resolution.

Note: The images in this procedure are for Windows® 10 and/or Firefox®.

4. On the Menu list, click the Network Diagnostics link.

Figure 133: Network Diagnostics link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

The Network Diagnostics window opens, scanning the network. Figure 134
The diagram takes a few moments to render.
The Options list box default selection is Margin.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 131 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 134: Network Diagnostics window - Scanning Network

To update the Network Diagnostics window (on page 387), refresh the browser to clear
the browser cache.

6. Click the Options list box arrow and select the Download Support Bundle option. Figure
135

Figure 135: Options list box - Download Support Bundle option Selected

The Opening support_bundle_nnn.zip dialog box opens. Figure 136

Figure 136: Opening support_bundle_nnn.zip dialog box

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 132 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Note: Where nnn is the selected device in the Network Diagram.

7. Click OK.
The Enter name of file to save to dialog box opens.
8. Search for and select a location to save the .zip file to and click Save.
The Enter name of file to save to dialog box closes.
9. Contact FreeWave Technical Support (on page 14) for information on where to send the
saved .zip file.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 133 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

9.3. Save Network Diagnostics

Use this procedure to save the current network performance reading for later review and to
monitor network performance over time.

Note: The images in this procedure are for Windows® 10 and/or Firefox®.

4. On the Menu list, click the Network Diagnostics link.

Figure 137: Network Diagnostics link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

The Network Diagnostics window opens, scanning the network. Figure 138
The diagram takes a few moments to render.
The Options list box default selection is Margin.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 134 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 138: Network Diagnostics window - Scanning Network

To update the Network Diagnostics window (on page 387), refresh the browser to clear
the browser cache.

6. Click the Options list box arrow and select the Save Network Diagnostics option. Figure
139

Figure 139: Options list box - Save Network Diagnostics option Selected

The Opening network_diag.json dialog box opens. Figure 140

Figure 140: Opening network_diag.json dialog box

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 135 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

7. Click OK.
The Enter name of file to save to dialog box opens.

Figure 141: Opening network_diag.json dialog box

8. Search for and select a location to save the .json file to and click Save.
The Enter name of file to save to dialog box closes.
9. Open a Windows® File Explorer window and find the location where the .json file was
saved.
10. Open the .json file to review the current network performance reading and monitor network
performance over time.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 136 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

9.4. Save a Network Diagram Image

This procedure is used to track changes in the network using images of the Network Diagram.

Note: The diagram is saved as a .PNG file.

The images in this procedure are for Windows® 10 and/or Firefox®.

4. On the Menu list, click the Network Diagnostics link.

Figure 142: Network Diagnostics link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

The Network Diagnostics window opens, scanning the network. Figure 143
The diagram takes a few moments to render.
The Options list box default selection is Margin.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 137 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 143: Network Diagnostics window - Scanning Network

To update the Network Diagnostics window (on page 387), refresh the browser to clear
the browser cache.

6. Click the Options list box arrow and select the Save Image option. Figure 144

Figure 144: Options list box - Save Image option Selected

The Save Image dialog box opens.

7. In the Save Image text box, enter a descriptive name for the network image and click
Submit. Figure 145

Figure 145: Save Image dialog box

The Opening _____.png dialog box opens. Figure 146

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 138 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Note: Where _____ is the entered name of the image file.

Figure 146: Opening _____.png dialog box

8. Click OK.
The Enter name of file to save to dialog box opens. Figure 147

Figure 147: Enter name of file to save to dialog box

9. Search for and select a location to save the .PNG file to and click Save.
10. Open a Windows® Explorer window and find the location where the .PNG file was saved.
11. Open the .PNG file to review the changes in the network using the Network Diagram.
Figure 148

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 139 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 148: Opened .PNG File

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 140 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

9.5. Show Table in the Network Diagnostics Window

Use this procedure to view the connection table of the device selected in the Network Diagram.

Note: The images in this procedure are for Windows® 10 and/or Firefox®.

4. On the Menu list, click the Network Diagnostics link.

Figure 149: Network Diagnostics link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

The Network Diagnostics window opens, scanning the network. Figure 150
The diagram takes a few moments to render.
The Options list box default selection is Margin.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 141 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 150: Network Diagnostics window - Scanning Network

The Link Margin connections appear in the Network Diagram.

6. In the Options list box, select the Show Table option to view the radio connection table of
the selected device below the Network Diagram. Figure 151

Figure 151: Network Diagnostics window with Show Tables Selected

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 142 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

9.6. View the Network Diagnostics - Breadthfirst

Use the Breadthfirst Network Diagram to view the network in a top-down, organization chart-
like view.
l The Gateway is always on top of the network diagram.
l The next layers in the network diagram show Repeaters and Endpoints.

Important!: A Gateway is required in the network to use this window.

4. On the Menu list, click the Network Diagnostics link.

Figure 152: Network Diagnostics link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

The Network Diagnostics window opens, scanning the network. Figure 153
The diagram takes a few moments to render.
The Options list box default selection is Margin.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 143 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 153: Network Diagnostics window - Scanning Network

6. Click the Options list box arrow and select the Breadthfirst option to show the
Breadthfirst connections in the Network Diagram. Figure 154

Figure 154: Network Diagnostics window - Breadthfirst

To update the Network Diagnostics window (on page 387), refresh the browser to clear
the browser cache.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 144 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

9.7. View the Network Diagnostics - Cose-bilkent

Use the Cose-bilkent Network Diagram to view the Gateway surrounded by the Repeaters and
Endpoints.

Important!: A Gateway is required in the network to use this window.

4. On the Menu list, click the Network Diagnostics link.

Figure 155: Network Diagnostics link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

The Network Diagnostics window opens, scanning the network. Figure 156
The diagram takes a few moments to render.
The Options list box default selection is Margin.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 145 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 156: Network Diagnostics window - Scanning Network

6. Click the Options list box arrow and select the Cose-bilkent option to show the Cose-
bilkent connections in the Network Diagram. Figure 157

Figure 157: Network Diagnostics window - Cose-bilkent

To update the Network Diagnostics window (on page 387), refresh the browser to clear
the browser cache.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 146 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

9.8. View the Network Diagnostics - Grid

View a Grid Network Diagram to show the network in a column - row layout.

Important!: A Gateway is required in the network to use this window.

4. On the Menu list, click the Network Diagnostics link.

Figure 158: Network Diagnostics link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

The Network Diagnostics window opens, scanning the network. Figure 159
The diagram takes a few moments to render.
The Options list box default selection is Margin.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 147 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 159: Network Diagnostics window - Scanning Network

6. Click the Options list box arrow and select the Grid option to show the Grid connections in
the Network Diagram. Figure 160

Figure 160: Network Diagnostics window - Grid

To update the Network Diagnostics window (on page 387), refresh the browser to clear
the browser cache.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 148 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

9.9. View the Network Diagnostics - Margin

The Network Diagnostics window is used to:
l Discover other Endpoints in the network.
l Show hops and their paths from the Gateway.
l Show the link quality (RSSI and Margin).
l Show neighbors.

Important!: A Gateway is required in the network to use this window.

4. On the Menu list, click the Network Diagnostics link.

Figure 161: Network Diagnostics link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

The Network Diagnostics window opens, scanning the network. Figure 162
The diagram takes a few moments to render.
The Options list box default selection is Margin.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 149 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 162: Network Diagnostics window - Scanning Network

The Link Margin connections appear in the Network Diagram Figure 163

Figure 163: Network Diagnostics window - Link Margin

To update the Network Diagnostics window (on page 387), refresh the browser to clear
the browser cache.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 150 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

9.10. View the Network Diagnostics - Margin with Neighbors

The Network Diagnostics window is used to:
l Discover other Endpoints in the network.
l Show hops and their paths from the Gateway.
l Show the link quality (RSSI and Margin).
l Show neighbors.

Important!: A Gateway is required in the network to use this window.

4. On the Menu list, click the Network Diagnostics link.

Figure 164: Network Diagnostics link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

The Network Diagnostics window opens, scanning the network. Figure 165
The diagram takes a few moments to render.
The Options list box default selection is Margin.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 151 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 165: Network Diagnostics window - Scanning Network

6. Click the Options list box arrow and select the Margin with Neighbors option to show the
Margin with Neighbors connections in the Network Diagram. Figure 166

Figure 166: Network Diagnostics window - Margin with Neighbors

To update the Network Diagnostics window (on page 387), refresh the browser to clear
the browser cache.

7. Optional: Use the cursor to hover over the Gateway-Endpoint link to view the dBm
rate. Figure 167

Note: The image provides example information only.

Each Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 provides its own unique information.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 152 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 167: Network Diagnostics window - Margin with Neighbors -

Gateway-Endpoint Link

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 153 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

9.11. View the Network Diagnostics - RSSI

The Network Diagnostics window is used to:
l Discover other Endpoints in the network.
l Show hops and their paths from the Gateway.
l Show the link quality (RSSI and Margin).
l Show neighbors.

Important!: A Gateway is required in the network to use this window.

4. On the Menu list, click the Network Diagnostics link.

Figure 168: Network Diagnostics link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

The Network Diagnostics window opens, scanning the network. Figure 169
The diagram takes a few moments to render.
The Options list box default selection is Margin.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 154 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 169: Network Diagnostics window - Scanning Network

6. Click the Options list box arrow and select the RSSI option to show the RSSI connections
in the Network Diagram. Figure 170

Figure 170: Network Diagnostics window - RSSI

To update the Network Diagnostics window (on page 387), refresh the browser to clear
the browser cache.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 155 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

9.12. View the Network Diagnostics - RSSI with Neighbors

The Network Diagnostics window is used to:
l Discover other Endpoints in the network.
l Show hops and their paths from the Gateway.
l Show the link quality (RSSI and Margin).
l Show neighbors.

Important!: A Gateway is required in the network to use this window.

4. On the Menu list, click the Network Diagnostics link.

Figure 171: Network Diagnostics link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

The Network Diagnostics window opens, scanning the network. Figure 172
The diagram takes a few moments to render.
The Options list box default selection is Margin.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 156 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 172: Network Diagnostics window - Scanning Network

6. Click the Options list box arrow and select the RSSI with Neighbors option to show the
RSSI with Neighbors connections in the Network Diagram. Figure 173

Figure 173: Network Diagnostics window - RSSI with Neighbors

To update the Network Diagnostics window (on page 387), refresh the browser to clear
the browser cache.

7. Optional: Use the cursor to hover over the Gateway-Endpoint link to view the dBm
rate. Figure 174

Note: The image provides example information only.

Each Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 provides its own unique information.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 157 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 174: Network Diagnostics window - RSSI with Neighbors - Gateway-

Endpoint Link

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 158 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

9.13. View the Network Diagnostics - Rx Rate

The Network Diagnostics window is used to:
l Discover other Endpoints in the network.
l Show hops and their paths from the Gateway.
l Show the link quality (RSSI and Margin).
l Show neighbors.

Important!: A Gateway is required in the network to use this window.

4. On the Menu list, click the Network Diagnostics link.

Figure 175: Network Diagnostics link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

The Network Diagnostics window opens, scanning the network. Figure 176
The diagram takes a few moments to render.
The Options list box default selection is Margin.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 159 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 176: Network Diagnostics window - Scanning Network

6. Click the Options list box arrow and select the Rx Rate option to show the Rx Rate
connections in the Network Diagram. Figure 177

Figure 177: Network Diagnostics window - RX Rate

To update the Network Diagnostics window (on page 387), refresh the browser to clear
the browser cache.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 160 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

9.14. View the Network Diagnostics - Tx Rate

The Network Diagnostics window is used to:
l Discover other Endpoints in the network.
l Show hops and their paths from the Gateway.
l Show the link quality (RSSI and Margin).
l Show neighbors.

Important!: A Gateway is required in the network to use this window.

4. On the Menu list, click the Network Diagnostics link.

Figure 178: Network Diagnostics link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

The Network Diagnostics window opens, scanning the network. Figure 179
The diagram takes a few moments to render.
The Options list box default selection is Margin.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 161 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 179: Network Diagnostics window - Scanning Network

6. Click the Options list box arrow and select the Tx Rate option to show the Tx Rate
connections in the Network Diagram. Figure 180

Figure 180: Network Diagnostics window - TX Rate

To update the Network Diagnostics window (on page 387), refresh the browser to clear
the browser cache.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 162 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

10. Change the Passwords

Important!: The Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 password is ONLY changed through the CLI.
See CLI Configuration (on page 34) to connect via CLI.

FREEWAVE Recommends: From a security standpoint, it is best practice to change both the
admin password and the devuser passwords.

l Change the ADMIN Password (on page 164)

l Change the DEVUSER Password (on page 164)

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 163 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

10.1. Change the ADMIN Password

1. Login to the FreeWave CLI using admin and the current password.
2. Use this command format to change the password:
system.password=[oldpassword],[newpassword],[newpassword] and
press <Enter>.

Example: system.password=admin,12345,12345.

Note: An error message appears when there is an error in typing the new password
command.

10.2. Change the DEVUSER Password

Warning! Do NOT use the Linux command passwd to change passwords.
Passwords must be changed using the FreeWave CLI to keep them synchronized between
the FreeWave CLI and the Linux Bash shell.

1. Login to the FreeWave CLI using admin and the current password.
The FreeWave Shell returns. Figure 181

Figure 181: FreeWave Shell

2. At the > prompt, type system.login=devuser,devuser and press <Enter>.

The devuser is now logged in. Figure 182

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 164 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 182: devuser Logged In

3. At the > prompt, type system.password=devuser,nnnnn,nnnnn and press

<Enter>.

Note: Where devuser is the current password and nnnnn is the new devuser password.

The CLI shows the new password was accepted. Figure 183

Figure 183: Accepted devuser New Password

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 165 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

11. IP Filtering

IP Filtering is used to allow only traffic in a designated IP subnet to traverse the radio network.
l Within the radio subnet, the IPv4, TCP, ICMP (ping), ARP, and UDP traffic is permitted to
traverse the radio network, while all other Ethernet traffic is blocked.
l The IP Filtering setting does NOT need to match on all the radios in the network.
Only enable IP Filtering on individual radios with incoming LAN Ethernet traffic to filter from
the network.

IP Filtering can prevent non-radio Ethernet traffic from adversely affecting the performance and
capacity of the radio network.

Procedure
Note: This procedure provides a Tera Term terminal connection to the FreeWave CLI. Other
terminal emulators (e.g., HyperTerminal, PuTTY) may be used.
The images in this procedure are for Windows® 7 and/or Windows® 10 and Firefox®.

1. On the computer connected to the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2, open a terminal program (e.g., Tera
Term http://ttssh2.osdn.jp/).
2. In Tera Term, click the File menu and select New Connection. Figure 184

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 166 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 184: File menu > New Connection

The Tera Term New Connection dialog box opens.

3. Click the Port list box arrow and select the COM port the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 is connected to.
Figure 185

Figure 185: Select the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 COM Port

Important!: The Port assignment varies from computer to computer.

4. Click OK to save the changes and close the dialog box.

The Tera Term window shows the connected COM port and Baud rate in the title bar of the
window.
5. In the Tera Term window, click the Setup menu and select Serial Port. Figure 186

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 167 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 186: Setup menu > Serial Port

The Tera Term: Serial Port Setup dialog box opens. Figure 187

Figure 187: Tera Term: Serial Port Setup dialog box with Default Settings

6. Using Figure 187 as the example, verify the COM port settings are:
Speed (Baud Rate): 115200
Data (Databits): 8 bit
Parity: none
Stop bits: 1 bit
7. Click OK to save the changes and close the dialog box.
8. In the Tera Term window, press <Enter>.
The FreeWave CLI Login returns.
9. Enter admin for the Username and press <Enter>.
10. Enter admin for the Password and press <Enter>.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 168 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Note: The default username and password is admin.

If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.
The password does not appear when typing - it looks blank.

The FreeWave Shell opens. Figure 188

Figure 188: FreeWave Shell

11. At the > prompt, type network and press <Enter>.

The Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 network settings appear.

Figure 189: network Settings Page

12. At the > prompt, type network.netmaskFilterEnabled=true and press <Enter>.

The IP Filtering is now active on the ZumLink device.

The IP Filtering setting does NOT need to match on all the radios in the network.
Only enable IP Filtering on individual radios with incoming LAN Ethernet traffic to filter
from the network.

13. At the > prompt, type save and press <Enter>.

Note: See Example: Network Topology with Traffic at the Gateway (on page 170).

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 169 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

11.0.1. Example: Network Topology with Traffic at the Gateway

In the Figure 190 diagram:
l The yellow communication link arrows are used to denote which of the radio units can
directly communicate.
l Devices in green can communicate with IPv4.
l Devices in red and other traffic is excluded from ZumLink network.

Figure 190: Network Topology with Traffic at the Gateway but

not Desired on the Rest of the Network

Figure 190 is a common network topology where IP filtering on the Gateway radio reduces
unwanted traffic on the radio network.
In this example:
l Only traffic on the 192.168.111.255 netmask passes over the radio network.
l The red laptop and the camera traffic are on the 222.nnn subnet; their traffic is blocked at
the Gateway radio.
l Only IPv4. TCP, UDP, ICMP (ping), and ARP traffic destined to and from the desired
subnet is transmitted over the radio network.
l VLAN tagged packets are filtered out because the radio is not considered on the VLAN and
therefore VLAN packets cannot be on the same subnet.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 170 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

12. Repeaters

ZumLink Repeater allows the extension of the ZumLink network, forwarding packets between
ZumLink devices that could otherwise not communicate directly with each other. The advantage
of using Repeaters is to reach very long distances and "hop" over or around obstacles like
buildings or hills.
The ZumLink Repeater can be configured as either a Gateway-Repeater or Endpoint-Repeater.
l The Gateway-Repeater is a Gateway that also repeats packets.
l The Endpoint-Repeater is an Endpoint able to repeat packets and master beacons.

Note: An Endpoint-Repeater strongly favors its wired device over Endpoints it’s repeating for.

This section has this information:

l Repeater - Setup Table (on page 173)
l Hopping OFF Repeater Setup (on page 173)

l Hopping ON Repeater Setup (on page 174)

l Basic Gateway and Endpoint-Repeater Setup (on page 176)

l Open a Terminal Emulator Application (on page 177)

l Hopping On: Gateway and Endpoint-Repeater Setup (on page 180)

l Hopping Off: Gateway and Endpoint-Repeater Setup (on page 182)

l Repeater - Examples (on page 184)

l Gateway-Repeater (on page 185)

l Endpoint-Repeater (on page 186)

l Multiple Repeaters: Gateway-Repeater and Endpoint-Repeater (on page 187)

l Multiple Repeaters: Four Endpoint-Repeaters (on page 188)

l Back-to-Back Repeaters (on page 190)

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 171 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

ZumLink Repeaters support all 5 data rates; 115.2kbps, 250kbps, 500kbps, 1Mbps, and 4Mbps.
l At 115.2kbps and 250kbps data rates, hopping capability must be enabled for the ZumLink
Repeaters.
l At 500kbps, 1Mbps, and 4Mbps data rates, hopping capability is optional.
When hopping capability is employed, one radio must be configured as the Gateway (or Gateway-
Repeater).
l The beacon from the Gateway radio must be heard by the Repeater.
l The Repeater must also re-send the beacon so that the Endpoints, and downstream
Repeaters, it communicates with can stay synchronized with the frequency hopping
pattern.
l To keep the Gateway and Endpoint-Repeater beacons from colliding, the Endpoint-
Repeaters must have their own time slot (radio Repeater slot).
l The Endpoint-Repeater has a radio Repeater slot range from 1-3.
l A maximum number of 3 Endpoint-Repeaters are supported in an overlapping

communication space or RF coverage area.

l The radio Repeater slot numbers can be reused where there is no RF connectivity or

overlap between the reused radio Repeater slots.

Where multiple communication paths are available, the ZumLink Repeater can be influenced to a
preferred communication path by optimizing the minimum signal level margin. The minimum
signal level margin establishes a minimum signal threshold required for a Repeater hop to be
considered.

FREEWAVE Recommends: Set the beaconBurstCount (on page 286) to 2 or more for optimal
throughput when Repeaters are used and the RF environment is noisy.
This increases the number of beacons sent in a beacon interval.

Caution: The repeating operation occurs on the same frequencies normally used for transmit
and receive.
This causes the throughput of the communication path utilizing the Repeater to be reduced by
approximately 50 percent with each Repeater hop.
Only communication paths via Repeaters are impacted, communication paths that do not
utilize the Repeater remain at full throughput.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 172 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

12.1. Repeater - Setup Table

These tables show the basic setting configurations in a Repeater network with either:
l Hopping OFF Repeater Setup (on page 173) l Hopping ON Repeater Setup (on page 174)

Note: For detailed procedures, see Basic Gateway and Endpoint-Repeater Setup (on page 176).

12.1.1. Hopping OFF Repeater Setup

The settings in this table assumes that radiosettings.radioHoppingMode=Hopping_Off.
l Hopping is required at data rates below 500kbps.
l Hopping is optional at data rate 500kbps or above.
l With hopping disabled, a Gateway or Gateway-Repeater is optional.

Repeater Network Configuration

radioSettings Setting* Gateway Setup Endpoint-Repeater Setup Endpoint Setup
radioMode= Gateway Endpoint_Repeater Endpoint
nodeId= N/A = unique Node ID for each device = unique Node ID for each device
networkId= = same Network ID for all devices = same Network ID for all devices = same Network ID for all devices
rfDataRate= = same Data Rate for all devices = same Data Rate for all devices = same Data Rate for all devices
dataPath Setting* Gateway Setup Endpoint-Repeater Setup Endpoint Setup
routeMinSignalMarginThresh= = desired Link Signal Margin = desired Link Signal Margin = desired Link Signal Margin
minus 4dB minus 4dB minus 4dB
network Setting* Gateway Setup Endpoint-Repeater Setup Endpoint Setup
ip_address= = unique IP address for each = unique IP address for each = unique IP address for each
device. device. device.

Note: *See the dataPath Parameters (on page 216), network Parameters (on page 262), or radioSettings Parameters (on page 285) for
additional information.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 173 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

This document is subject to change without notice. This document is the property of FreeWave Technologies, Inc. and contains proprietary information owned
by FreeWave. This document cannot be reproduced in whole or in part by any means without written permission from FreeWave Technologies, Inc.
12. Repeaters Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 User-Reference Manual

12.1.2. Hopping ON Repeater Setup

The settings in this table assumes that radiosettings.radioHoppingMode=Hopping_On.
l Hopping is required at data rates below 500kbps.
l Hopping is optional at data rate 500kbps or above.
l With hopping enabled, a Gateway or Gateway-Repeater must be configured.

Repeater Network Configuration

radioSettings Setting**** Gateway Setup Endpoint-Repeater Setup Endpoint Setup
radioMode= Gateway Endpoint_Repeater Endpoint
nodeId= N/A = unique Node ID for each device = unique Node ID for each device
networkId= = same Network ID for all devices = same Network ID for all devices = same Network ID for all devices
rfDataRate= = same Data Rate for all devices = same Data Rate for all devices = same Data Rate for all devices
radioMaxRepeaters= 0-3 1 NA NA
radioRepeaterSlot= NA 1-3 2 NA
beaconBurstCount= 1-7 3 NA NA
dataPath Setting**** Gateway Setup Endpoint-Repeater Setup Endpoint Setup
routeMinSignalMarginThresh= = desired Link Signal Margin = desired Link Signal Margin = desired Link Signal Margin
minus 4dB minus 4dB minus 4dB
network Setting**** Gateway Setup Endpoint-Repeater Setup Endpoint Setup
ip_address= = unique IP address for each = unique IP address for each = unique IP address for each
device. device. device.

1. Set the radioMaxRepeaters to match the number of overlapping Repeaters with a maximum of 3.
l Setting this value too high adds unnecessary latency to the network.
l In this example, set this to 1.
2. Set the radioRepeaterSlot to designate which Repeater slot to use, up to the radioMaxRepeaters setting.
l In this example, set this to 1.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 174 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

This document is subject to change without notice. This document is the property of FreeWave Technologies, Inc. and contains proprietary information owned
by FreeWave. This document cannot be reproduced in whole or in part by any means without written permission from FreeWave Technologies, Inc.
12. Repeaters Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 User-Reference Manual

3. Set the beaconBurstCount (on page 286) to 2 or more for optimal throughput when Repeaters are used and the RF environment
is noisy.
This increases the number of beacons sent in a beacon interval.

Note: ****See the dataPath Parameters (on page 216), network Parameters (on page 262), or radioSettings Parameters (on page 285) for
additional information.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 175 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

This document is subject to change without notice. This document is the property of FreeWave Technologies, Inc. and contains proprietary information owned
by FreeWave. This document cannot be reproduced in whole or in part by any means without written permission from FreeWave Technologies, Inc.
Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2
12. Repeaters
User-Reference Manual

12.2. Basic Gateway and Endpoint-Repeater Setup

Important!: This procedure assumes the user has 3 new ZumLink devices.
The number of Endpoint-Repeaters in the network must be known before starting this procedure.

The basic setup procedures are:

A. Open a Terminal Emulator Application (on page 177)
B. Configure using either:
Hopping On: Gateway and Endpoint-Repeater Setup (on page 180)
or
Hopping Off: Gateway and Endpoint-Repeater Setup (on page 182)

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 176 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

12.2.1. Open a Terminal Emulator Application

Note: This procedure provides a Tera Term terminal connection to the FreeWave CLI. Other
terminal emulators (e.g., HyperTerminal, PuTTY) may be used.
The images in this procedure are for Windows® 7 and/or Windows® 10 and Firefox®.

1. On the computer connected to the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2, open a terminal program (e.g., Tera
Term http://ttssh2.osdn.jp/).
2. In Tera Term, click the File menu and select New Connection. Figure 191

Figure 191: File menu > New Connection

The Tera Term New Connection dialog box opens.

3. Click the Port list box arrow and select the COM port the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 is connected to.
Figure 192

Figure 192: Select the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 COM Port

Important!: The Port assignment varies from computer to computer.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 177 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

4. Click OK to save the changes and close the dialog box.

The Tera Term window shows the connected COM port and Baud rate in the title bar of the
window.
5. In the Tera Term window, click the Setup menu and select Serial Port. Figure 193

Figure 193: Setup menu > Serial Port

The Tera Term: Serial Port Setup dialog box opens. Figure 194

Figure 194: Tera Term: Serial Port Setup dialog box with Default Settings

6. Using Figure 194 as the example, verify the COM port settings are:
Speed (Baud Rate): 115200
Data (Databits): 8 bit
Parity: none
Stop bits: 1 bit
7. Click OK to save the changes and close the dialog box.
8. In the Tera Term window, press <Enter>.
The FreeWave CLI Login returns.
9. Enter admin for the Username and press <Enter>.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 178 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

10. Enter admin for the Password and press <Enter>.

Note: The default username and password is admin.

If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.
The password does not appear when typing - it looks blank.

The FreeWave Shell opens. Figure 195

Figure 195: FreeWave Shell

11. At the > prompt, type radioSettings and press <Enter>.

The current [Page=radioSettings] appears. (Figure 196)

Figure 196: radioSettings Page

12. Continue with either:

l Hopping On: Gateway and Endpoint-Repeater Setup (on page 180)

l Hopping Off: Gateway and Endpoint-Repeater Setup (on page 182)

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 179 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

12.2.2. Hopping On: Gateway and Endpoint-Repeater Setup

Important!: This procedure has HOPPING ON
(radiosettings.radioHoppingMode=Hopping_On).

If Hopping is OFF (radiosettings.radioHoppingMode=Hopping_Off) go to

Hopping Off: Gateway and Endpoint-Repeater Setup (on page 182).

1. On the Gateway ZumLink device:

a. Complete the Open a Terminal Emulator Application (on page 177) procedure.
b. At the > prompt, type:
i. radioSettings.radioMode=Gateway and press <Enter>.
ii. radioSettings.networkId=nnnnn where nnnnn is the designated
Network ID and press <Enter>.
iii. network.ip_address=nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn where nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is the
unique IP address for each device and press <Enter>.
iv. radioSettings.rfDataRate=Rate_nnnn.nn where nnnn.nn is the RF
data rate in Kilobytes or Megabytes and press <Enter>.

Note: See rfDataRate (on page 307) for the correct command format of the RF
Data Rate.

v. radiosettings.radioHoppingMode=Hopping_On and press <Enter>.

vi. radioSettings.maxRepeater=1 and press <Enter>.
vii. radioSettings.beaconBurstCount=2 and press <Enter>.
c. At the > prompt, type save and press <Enter>.
2. Disconnect the computer from the Gateway ZumLink device.
3. On the Endpoint-Repeater ZumLink device:
a. Complete the Open a Terminal Emulator Application (on page 177) procedure.
b. At the > prompt, type:
i. radioSettings.radioMode=Endpoint_Repeater and press <Enter>.
ii. radioSettings.networkId=nnnnn where nnnnn is the designated
Network IDused when configuring the Gateway ZumLink device and press
<Enter>.
iii. network.ip_address=nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn where nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is the
unique IP address for each device and press <Enter>.
iv. radioSettings.rfDataRate=Rate_nnnn.nn where nnnn.nn is the
same data rate in Kilobytes or Megabytes used when configuring the Gateway
ZumLink device and press <Enter>.

Note: See rfDataRate (on page 307) for the correct command format of the RF
Data Rate.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 180 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

v. radioSettings.nodeId=nnnnn where nnnnn is the unique ID of the device

and press <Enter>.
vi. Verify the radioSettings.radioRepeaterSlot=1 and press <Enter>.
c. At the > prompt, type save and press <Enter>.
4. Disconnect the computer from the Endpoint-Repeater ZumLink device.
5. On the Endpoint ZumLink device:
a. Complete the Open a Terminal Emulator Application (on page 177) procedure.
b. At the > prompt, type:
i. radioSettings.radioMode=Endpoint and press <Enter>.
ii. radioSettings.networkId=nnnnn where nnnnn is the designated
Network ID used when configuring the Gateway ZumLink device and press
<Enter>.
iii. network.ip_address=nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn where nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is the
unique IP address for each device and press <Enter>.
iv. radioSettings.rfDataRate=Rate_nnnn.nn where nnnn.nn is the
same data rate in Kilobytes or Megabytes used when configuring the Gateway
ZumLink device and press <Enter>.

Note: See rfDataRate (on page 307) for the correct command format of the RF
Data Rate.

v. radioSettings.nodeId=nnnnn where nnnnn is the unique ID of the device

and press <Enter>
c. At the > prompt, type save and press <Enter>.

Note: The LEDs indicate a successful setup.

See LEDs (on page 462) for additional information.

See the Gateway-Repeater (on page 185) example.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 181 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

12.2.3. Hopping Off: Gateway and Endpoint-Repeater Setup

Important!: This procedure has HOPPING OFF
(radiosettings.radioHoppingMode=Hopping_Off).

If Hopping is ON (radiosettings.radioHoppingMode=Hopping_On) go to
Hopping On: Gateway and Endpoint-Repeater Setup (on page 180).

1. On the Gateway ZumLink device:

a. Complete the Open a Terminal Emulator Application (on page 177) procedure.
b. At the > prompt, type:
i. radioSettings.radioMode=Gateway and press <Enter>.
ii. radioSettings.networkId=nnnnnwhere nnnnn is the designated
Network ID and press <Enter>.
iii. network.ip_address=nnn.nnn.nnn.nnnwhere nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is the
unique IP address for each device and press <Enter>.
iv. radioSettings.rfDataRate=Rate_nnnn.nnwhere nnnn.nn is the RF
data rate in Kilobytes or Megabytes and press <Enter>.

Note: See rfDataRate (on page 307) for the correct command format of the RF
Data Rate.

v. Verify radiosettings.radioHoppingMode=Hopping_Off and press

<Enter>.
c. At the > prompt, type save and press <Enter>.
2. Disconnect the computer from the GatewayZumLink device.
3. On the Endpoint-Repeater ZumLink device:
a. Repeat Steps 1 to 12.
b. At the > prompt, type:
i. radioSettings.radioMode=Endpoint_Repeater and press <Enter>.
ii. radioSettings.networkId=nnnnnwhere nnnnn is the designated
Network IDused when configuring the Gateway ZumLink device and press
<Enter>.
iii. network.ip_address=nnn.nnn.nnn.nnnwhere nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is the
unique IP address for each device and press <Enter>.
iv. radioSettings.rfDataRate=Rate_nnnn.nnwhere nnnn.nn is the same
data rate in Kilobytes or Megabytesused when configuring the Gateway
ZumLink device and press <Enter>.

Note: See rfDataRate (on page 307) for the correct command format of the RF
Data Rate.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 182 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

v. radioSettings.nodeId=nnnnnwhere nnnnn is the unique ID of the device

and press <Enter>.
vi. Verify radiosettings.radioHoppingMode=Hopping_Off and press
<Enter>.
c. At the > prompt, type save and press <Enter>.
4. Disconnect the computer from the Endpoint-Repeater ZumLink device.
5. On the Endpoint ZumLink device:
a. Complete the Open a Terminal Emulator Application (on page 177) procedure.
b. At the > prompt, type:
i. radioSettings.radioMode=Endpoint and press <Enter>.
ii. radioSettings.networkId=nnnnnwhere nnnnn is the designated
Network IDused when configuring the Gateway ZumLink device and press
<Enter>.
iii. network.ip_address=nnn.nnn.nnn.nnnwhere nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is the
unique IP address for each device and press <Enter>.
iv. radioSettings.rfDataRate=Rate_nnnn.nnwhere nnnn.nn is the same
data rate in Kilobytes or Megabytesused when configuring the Gateway
ZumLink device and press <Enter>.

Note: See rfDataRate (on page 307) for the correct command format of the RF
Data Rate.

v. radioSettings.nodeId=nnnnnwhere nnnnn is the unique ID of the device

and press <Enter>
c. At the > prompt, type save and press <Enter>.

Note: The LEDs indicate a successful setup.

See LEDs (on page 462) for additional information.

See the Gateway-Repeater (on page 185) example.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 183 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

12.3. Repeater - Examples

Note: The yellow communication link arrows are used to denote which of the radio units can directly
communicate.
Radio units that DO NOT have yellow communication links between them are considered to be in
different communication spaces.

l Gateway-Repeater (on page 185)

l Endpoint-Repeater (on page 186)
l Multiple Repeaters: Gateway-Repeater and Endpoint-Repeater (on page 187)
l Multiple Repeaters: Four Endpoint-Repeaters (on page 188)
l Back-to-Back Repeaters (on page 190)

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 184 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

12.3.1. Gateway-Repeater
Figure 197 shows:
l Endpoints that cannot peer directly can communicate through a Gateway-Repeater,
extending the length of a point-to-multipoint network.
l Repeater is operating in Gateway-Repeater mode.
l No performance loss for Gateway-Repeater to Endpoint 1-Endpoint 2-Endpoint 3
communication.
l The throughput for Endpoint 2 to Endpoint 3 communication via Gateway-Repeater is
reduced by approximately 50 percent.

Figure 197: Gateway-Repeater

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 185 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

12.3.2. Endpoint-Repeater
Figure 198 shows:
l Endpoints that cannot peer directly can communicate through an Endpoint-Repeater,
extending the length of a point-to-point network.
l Repeater is operating in Endpoint-Repeater mode.
l No performance loss for Gateway to Endpoint 3, Gateway to Endpoint-Repeater, or
Endpoint-Repeater to Endpoint 1-Endpoint 2 communication.
l The throughput for Endpoint 1-Endpoint 2 to Gateway communication via Endpoint-
Repeater is reduced by approximately 50 percent.

Note: An Endpoint-Repeater strongly favors its wired device over Endpoints it’s repeating for.

User devices can be physically attached to the Endpoint-Repeater.

Figure 198: Endpoint-Repeater

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 186 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

12.3.3. Multiple Repeaters: Gateway-Repeater and Endpoint-Repeater

Figure 199 shows:
l Repeaters are operating in Gateway-Repeater and Endpoint-Repeater mode.
l No performance loss for Endpoint-Repeater to Gateway-Repeater, Endpoint 1 to
Endpoint-Repeater, Endpoint 2 to Gateway-Repeater communication.
l The throughput for Endpoint 1 to Gateway communication via Endpoint-Repeater is
reduced by approximately 50 percent.
l The throughput for Endpoint 2 to Endpoint-Repeater via the Gateway-Repeater is reduced
by approximately 50 percent.
l Endpoint 1 to Endpoint 2 communicate via the Endpoint-Repeater and Gateway-Repeater,
or 2 repeater hops.
l The throughput for Endpoint 1 to Endpoint 2 communication is approximately 25%.
l As Repeaters are chained in the network, round trip delay increases.
l When issuing pings of large packet sizes at the lower data rates, such as 115.2K, and a

beaconInterval=TWENTY_FIVE_MS, the latency can increase causing the pings to fail.

l Workaround: Allow an appropriate delay between pings.

FREEWAVE Recommends: Set the beaconBurstCount=1 or more and

beaconInterval=ONE_HUNDRED_MS or more for optimal throughput when extended Repeater
networks are used.

Figure 199: Repeater with Additional Endpoint to Enhance Connectivity

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 187 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

12.3.4. Multiple Repeaters: Four Endpoint-Repeaters

Figure 200 shows:
l Gateway has radio maximum of three Repeaters slots.
l Repeaters are operating in Endpoint-Repeater mode.
l Repeaters in the same network that have overlapping RF coverage must have unique radio
Repeater slots.
l Endpoint-Repeater 1 has a Repeater slot of 1.

l Endpoint-Repeater 2 has a Repeater slot of 2.

l Endpoint-Repeater 3 has a radio Repeater slot of 3.

l Endpoint-Repeater 4 has a radio Repeater slot of 1.

l Endpoint-Repeater 1 and Endpoint-Repeater 4 do NOT overlap in RF coverage; therefore

they can use the same repeater slot number.
l Endpoint 1 to Gateway communicate via the Endpoint-Repeater 1-2-3-4 or 4 Repeater
hops.
l The throughput for Endpoint 1 to Gateway communication will be approximately 6.25%.

Important!: Supporting three Repeaters in the same overlapping RF coverage does NOT limit the
total number of Repeaters that can be chained together. However, make careful considerations
regarding the throughput impact of chained Repeaters.

Note: An Endpoint-Repeater strongly favors its wired device over Endpoints it’s repeating for.

Figure 200: Multiple Repeaters: Four Endpoint-Repeaters

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 188 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

l As Repeaters are chained in the network, round trip delay increases.

l When issuing pings of large packet sizes at the lower data rates, such as 115.2K, and a

beaconInterval=TWENTY_FIVE_MS, the latency can increase causing the pings to fail.

l Workaround: Allow an appropriate delay between pings.

FREEWAVE Recommends: Set the beaconBurstCount=1 or more and

beaconInterval=ONE_HUNDRED_MS or more for optimal throughput when extended Repeater
networks are used.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 189 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

12.3.5. Back-to-Back Repeaters

If the network topology requires Repeaters to connect radios over greater distances, use back-to-
back Repeaters where data is repeated over a wire instead of over the air. This preserves
throughput. Figure 201
l Each link in the back to back network should be set to a unique networkId (on page 296).
l At least one of these parameters should be configured differently between each link in the
back-to-back network.
l beaconInterval (on page 287)

l frequencyKey (on page 288)

l radioFrequency (on page 297)

l radioHoppingMode (on page 299)

l rfDataRate (on page 307)

Figure 201: Back-to-Back Repeaters

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 190 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

13. Mounting the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2

Separate mounting kits are available for purchase from FreeWave.

l Z9-P2
l FreeWave Part Number: AOH0001HT

l Z9-PE2
l FreeWave Part Number: AOH4003SP

Mounting Procedures
l Z9-P2 Mounting (on page 192)
l Z9-PE2 Mounting (on page 194)

Note: See Remove the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 from the DIN Rail (on page 195) for additional information.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 191 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

13.1. Z9-P2 Mounting

Mounting Kit - Included Equipment
Z9-P2 Mounting Kit - Included Equipment
Qty Description
1 DIN Rail Spring Clip
3 Flat-head machine screws, Phillips, M4 x 0.7, 12mm Long
1 DIN Rail Bracket
4 Pan-head machine screws, Phillips, 4-40, 1/4" Long, Lock Patch
1 Mounting Instruction Sheet

User-supplied Equipment
l Medium Phillips-head screwdriver
l Medium Flat-head screwdriver

Procedure
1. Use the Pan-head machine screws to attach the DIN Rail Bracket to the Z9-P2.
2. Orient the DIN Rail Bracket / DIN Rail Spring Clip assembly so:
a. The spring-loaded end of the DIN Rail Spring Clip is on the bottom lip of the rail.
b. The fixed (not spring-loaded) end of the DIN Rail Spring Clip is on the top.

Caution: Per the manufacturer's instructions, the DIN Rail Spring Clip is oriented with
the spring-loaded end on the bottom lip of the rail.

a. Use the Flat-head machine screws to attach the DIN Rail Spring Clip to the DIN Rail
Bracket.
b. Mount the Z9-P2 to the 35mm DIN rail using the rail slide on the enclosure. Figure 202

Note: The images in this procedure are for the Z9-P.

The equipment and procedure are the same for the Z9-P2.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 192 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 202: Z9-P2 Attached to a DIN Rail with the Power Connection on Top

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 193 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

13.2. Z9-PE2 Mounting

Mounting Kit - Included Equipment
Z9-PE2 Mounting Kit - Included Equipment
Qty Description
1 DIN Rail Spring Clip
3 Flat-head machine screws, Phillips, M4 x 0.7, 12mm Long
1 DIN Rail Bracket
3 Pan-head machine screws, Phillips, 6-32 Unc, 1/4" Long
1 Mounting Instruction Sheet

User-supplied Equipment
l Medium Phillips-head screwdriver
l Medium Flat-head screwdriver

Procedure
Note: The Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 can be installed using the four corner screws on the bottom of the radio.
On the bottom of the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2, there is a set screw installed in the left-rear mounting hole.
This set screw must be removed if the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 is mounted using the four corner screws.

1. Use the Pan-head machine screws to attach the DIN Rail Bracket to the Z9-PE2.
2. Orient the DIN Rail Bracket / DIN Rail Spring Clip assembly so:
a. The spring-loaded end of the DIN Rail Spring Clip is on the bottom lip of the rail.
b. The fixed (not spring-loaded) end of the DIN Rail Spring Clip is on the top.

Caution: Per the manufacturer's instructions, the DIN Rail Spring Clip is oriented with
the spring-loaded end on the bottom lip of the rail.

a. Use the Flat-head machine screws to attach the DIN Rail Spring Clip to the DIN Rail
Bracket.
b. Mount the Z9-PE2 to the 35mm DIN rail using the rail slide on the enclosure. Figure 203

Note: The images in this procedure are for the Z9-PE.

The equipment and procedure are the same for the Z9-PE2.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 194 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Figure 203: Z9-PE2 Attached to a DIN Rail with the Power Connection on
Top

13.3. Remove the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 from the DIN Rail

1. Push upwards on the DIN Rail Spring Clip (compressing the springs in the bottom).
2. Pivot the top of the DIN Rail Bracket / DIN Rail Spring Clip assembly off of the rail.
3. Move the whole DIN Rail Spring Clip down to release the bottom of the clip.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 195 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

14. Approved Antennas

14.0.1. Yagi Directional Antennas

The 900 MHz is approved by the FCC for use with directional antennas with a dBi gain or less.

900 MHz Yagi Directional Antennas

Manufacturer FreeWave
Gain (dBd) Gain (dBi) Manufacturer
Model Number Part Number
6.45 8.6 WaveLink PRO890-8-40F02N4 EAN0906YC

14.0.2. Omni-directional Antennas

The 900 MHz is approved by the FCC for use with omni-directional antennas with a 10.5dBi gain
or less.

Note: These antennas, including antenna gains, are approved for use with the ZumLink device.

900 MHz Omni-Directional Antennas

Manufacturer FreeWave
Gain (dBd) Gain (dBi) Manufacturer
Model Number Part Number
3.85 5.0 Antenex EB8965C EAN0905WC
3.0 5.15 Maxrad MAX-9053 EAN0900WC
0.85 3.0 Mobile Mark PSKN3-925S EAN0900SR
-2.15 0.0 Mobile Mark PSTG0-915SE EAN0900SQ

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 196 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

14.0.3. Alternative Antennas

Antennas other than those listed in this section can potentially be used with the ZumLink with
provisions.
l The antennas must be of a similar type.
l The antenna gain CANNOT exceed 10.5dBi for Omni-directional.
l The antenna gain CANNOT exceed 16.0dBi for Directional antennas.
l The overall system EIRP does not exceed 36dBm.

Warning! A proper combination with the ZumLink is required to ensure the system meets
FCC requirements.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 197 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

15. COM Parameters

Note: See the COM window (on page 364) for parameter location.
The parameters for COM1 and COM2 are the same except for the TerminalServerPort (on page 209)
parameter setting.

l baudrate (on page 199) l mode (on page 206)

l breakBeforeSendUs (on page 199) l parity (on page 207)
l connectionDrops (on page 200) l RxBytes (on page 208)
l databits (on page 201) l stopbits (on page 209)
l delayBeforeSendMs (on page 202) l TerminalServerPort (on page 209)
l duplex (on page 202) l TerminalServerTimeOut (on page 210)
l flowControl (on page 203) l TxBytes (on page 211)
l handler (on page 204)

The parameter syntax is: page.parameter=value.

Parameters with unique names can be specified as parameter=value.

Note: In the CLI, if the "=" sign is appended to the parameter, it is an implied change to that
parameter.
If a value is NOT included after the "=", the value becomes a null, space, or 0 (zero) depending on
the parameter.

Example: Entering frequencyKey returns the current value of frequencyKey.

Entering frequencyKey= is an implied change to frequencyKey.
If a value is NOT included, it changes frequencyKey to 0 (zero).

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 198 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

15.1. baudrate
baudrate
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page l [Page=Com1]
l [Page=Com2]
CLI Command l Com1.baudrate=nnnn
l Com2.baudrate=nnnn

Note: Where nnnn is the baud rate value.

Web Interface Baudrate

window 1. Click the Baudrate list box arrow and select a COM port baud rate.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the COM window (on page 364) for parameter location.

Default Setting 115200

Options Rate Options
1200 38400
2400 57600
4800 115200
9600 230400
14400 250000
19200
Description The Com1.baudrate or Com2.baudrate parameter designates the COM port
baud rate for COM1 or COM2.

15.2. breakBeforeSendUs
breakBeforeSendUs
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page l [Page=Com1]
l [Page=Com2]
CLI Command l Com1.breakBeforeSendUs=nnnn
l Com2.breakBeforeSendUs=nnnn

Note: Where nnnn is the break signal value.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 199 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

breakBeforeSendUs
Setting Description
Web Interface Break Before Send Us
window 1. In the Break Before Send Us text box, enter the number of milliseconds
the COM port will send a break signal.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the COM window (on page 364) for parameter location.

Default Setting 0 (zero)

Options l The maximum value is0 (zero).
l The minimum value is 1000.
Description The Com1.breakBeforeSendUs or Com2.breakBeforeSendUs parameter
designates how long the COM port will send a break signal for at least the number
of microseconds specified before sending the data.

Example: For COM1, enter Com1.breakBeforeSendUs=500 to have

the COM1 port send a break signal for 500 microseconds.

15.3. connectionDrops
connectionDrops
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page l [Page=Com1]
l [Page=Com2]
CLI Command l Com1.connectionDrops
l Com2.connectionDrops
Web Interface Connection Drops
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the COM window (on page 364) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 200 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

connectionDrops
Setting Description
Description The Com1.connectionDrops or Com2.connectionDrops command reports the
number of terminal server connections dropped due to inactivity on the network
socket.
l The number of drops only increments if a connection is left open and no data is
sent.
l Connections that are closed by either side before the time out are not
considered a dropped connection.

Note: This is a Read-only parameter.

15.4. databits
databits
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page l [Page=Com1]
l [Page=Com2]
CLI Command l Com1.databits=7
l Com2.databits=7
l Com1.databits=8
l Com2.databits=8
Web Interface Databits
window 1. Click the Databits list box arrow and select the number of data bits in the
frame for COM1 or COM2.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the COM window (on page 364) for parameter location.

Default Setting 8
Options l 7
l 8
Description The Com1.databits or Com2.databits parameter designates the number of data
bits in the frame for COM1 or COM2.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 201 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

15.5. delayBeforeSendMs
delayBeforeSendMs
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page l [Page=Com1]
l [Page=Com2]
CLI Command l Com1.delayBeforeSendMs=nnnn
l Com2.delayBeforeSendMs=nnnn

Note: Where nnnn is the amount of time delay in milliseconds.

Web Interface Delay Before Send MS

window 1. In the Delay Before Send MS text box, enter the milliseconds of time
delay.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the COM window (on page 364) for parameter location.

Default Setting 0 (zero)

Options l The maximum value is0 (zero).
l The minimum value is 5000.
Description The Com1.delayBeforeSendMs or Com2.delayBeforeSendMs parameter
designates the amount of time delay in milliseconds the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 waits to
allow the device connected to the COM port to switch from transmit (Tx) to receive
(Rx) mode.

Example: For COM1, enter Com1.delayBeforeSendMs=100 for a 100

millisecond delay.

Increase this delay if the ZumLink is responding before a polling

system is ready for a response.

15.6. duplex
duplex
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page l [Page=Com1]
l [Page=Com2]

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 202 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

duplex
Setting Description
CLI Command l Com1.duplex=Half
l Com2.duplex=Half
l Com1.duplex=Full
l Com2.duplex=Full
Web Interface Duplex
window 1. Click the Duplex list box arrow and select the duplex designation.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the COM window (on page 364) for parameter location.

Default Setting Full

Options Half or Full
Description
Important!: This parameter applies ONLY to the RS485 mode.

The Com1.duplex or Com2.duplex parameter designates whether the COM port

is Full or Half-duplex.

Note: See Ports and Pinouts for input and output information.

15.7. flowControl
flowControl
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page l [Page=Com1]
l [Page=Com2]
CLI Command For Com2, the command is:
l Off: Com2.flowControl=Off
l On: Com2.flowControl=Hardware
Web Interface Flow Control
window 1. If applicable for COM2, click the Flow Control list box arrow and select
Hardware to activate flowControl.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the COM window (on page 364) for parameter location.

Default Setting Off

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 203 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

flowControl
Setting Description
Options l Off
l Hardware
Description The Com2.flowControl parameter designates the hardware flow control as either
On (Hardware) or Off.

15.8. handler
handler
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page l [Page=Com1]
l [Page=Com2]

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 204 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

handler
Setting Description
CLI Command CLI
When CLI is designated, a configuration CLI is on the COM port.
The command is:
l Com1.handler=cli
l Com2.handler=cli
ModbusPassthru
When ModbusPassthru is designated, modbus requests are sent out to
modbus sensors that are received via Modbus TCP or Modbus RTU.
The command is:
l Com1.handler=ModbusPassthru
l Com2.handler=ModbusPassthru
ModbusRTU
When ModbusRTU is designated, receive Modbus RTU requests from a serial
modbus RTU device.
The command is:
l Com1.handler=ModbusRTU
l Com2.handler=ModbusRTU
Off
When Off is designated, this allows for application use with no setup. A port is
never opened.
The command is:
l Com1.handler=Off
l Com2.handler=Off
Setup
When Setup is designated, the COM port then frees up the port for application
use.
The command is:
l Com1.handler=Setup
l Com2.handler=Setup
Terminal Server
When Terminal Server is designated, the COM port acts as a terminal server.
l The TCP port number is set by the COM1 TerminalServerPort (on page 209).
l The default port number for COM1 is 5041.
The command is:
l Com1.handler=TerminalServer

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 205 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

handler
Setting Description
l Com2.handler=TerminalServer
Trace
When Trace is designated, a configuration CLI with trace is on the COM port.
l Com1.handler=trace
l Com2.handler=trace
Web Interface Handler
window 1. Click the Handler list box arrow and select the designated protocol handler.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the COM window (on page 364) for parameter location.

Default Setting TerminalServer

Options l CLI (on page 205)
l ModbusPassthru (on page 205)
l ModbusRTU (on page 205)
l Off (on page 205)
l Setup (on page 205)
l Terminal Server (on page 205)
l Trace (on page 206)
Description The Com1.handler or Com2.handler parameter designates the protocol of the
COM port.
Notes
l The default port number for COM1 is 5041.
l The default port number for COM2 is 5042.

FREEWAVE Recommends: If using the TerminalServerPort parameter,

keep the TCP port numbers as their defaults.

15.9. mode
mode
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page l [Page=Com1]
l [Page=Com2]

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 206 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

mode
Setting Description
CLI Command l Com1.mode=RS232
l Com2.mode=RS232
l Com1.mode=RS485
l Com2.mode=RS485
Web Interface Mode
window 1. Click the Mode list box arrow and select the COM port mode.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the COM window (on page 364) for parameter location.

Default Setting RS232

Options l RS232
l RS485
Description The Com1.mode or Com2.mode parameter designates the COM port mode as
either RS232 or RS485.

Note: When Com1.mode=RS485 or Com2.mode=RS485

AND Com1.duplex=Full or Com2.duplex=Full,
the COM supports RS422.

15.10. parity
parity
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page l [Page=Com1]
l [Page=Com2]
CLI Command l Com1.parity=None
l Com2.parity=None
l Com1.parity=Even
l Com2.parity=Even
l Com1.parity=Odd
l Com2.parity=Odd

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 207 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

parity
Setting Description
Web Interface Parity
window 1. Click the Parity list box arrow and select the COM port parity bits for the
system.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the COM window (on page 364) for parameter location.

Default Setting None

Options l None
l Even
l Odd
Description The Com1.parity or Com2.parity parameter designates the COM port parity bits
for the system.

15.11. RxBytes
RxBytes
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page l [Page=Com1]
l [Page=Com2]
CLI Command l Com1.RxBytes
l Com2.RxBytes
Web Interface RX Bytes
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the COM window (on page 364) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The Com1.RxBytes or Com2.RxBytes command reports the total bytes
received from the COM port.

Note: This is a Read-only parameter.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 208 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

15.12. stopbits
stopbits
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page l [Page=Com1]
l [Page=Com2]
CLI Command l Com1.stopbits=1
l Com2.stopbits=1
l Com1.stopbits=2
l Com2.stopbits=2
Web Interface Stopbits
window 1. Click the Stopbits list box arrow and select the COM port number of stop
bits.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the COM window (on page 364) for parameter location.

Default Setting 1
Options l 1
l 2
Description The Com1.stopbits or Com2.stopbits parameter designates the COM port
number of stop bits.

15.13. TerminalServerPort
Note: See Terminal Server Relay Examples (on page 352) for additional information.

TerminalServerPort
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page l [Page=Com1]
l [Page=Com2]
CLI Command l Com1.TerminalServerPort=nnnn
l Com2.TerminalServerPort=nnnn

Note: Where nnnn is the TCP port number.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 209 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

TerminalServerPort
Setting Description
Web Interface Terminal Server Port
window 1. In the Terminal Server Port text box, enter the designated TCP port
number.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the COM window (on page 364) for parameter location.

Default Setting l The default port number for COM1 is 5041.

l The default port number for COM2 is 5042.
Options l The minimum value is 0 (zero).
l The maximum value is 65535.
Description The Com1.TerminalServerPort or Com2.TerminalServerPort parameter
designates the TCP port number to use when handler (on page 204) is set to
TerminalServer.

FREEWAVE Recommends: If using the TerminalServerPort parameter,

keep the TCP port numbers as their defaults.

15.14. TerminalServerTimeOut
Note: See Terminal Server Relay Examples (on page 352) for additional information.

TerminalServerTimeOut
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page l [Page=Com1]
l [Page=Com2]
CLI Command l Com1.TerminalServerTimeOut=nnnn
l Com2.TerminalServerTimeOut=nnnn

Note: Where nnnn is the amount of time, in seconds, the Terminal Server
remains open.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 210 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

TerminalServerTimeOut
Setting Description
Web Interface Terminal Server Time Out
window 1. In the Terminal Server Time Out text box, enter the number of seconds
the Terminal Server remains open without transmitting or receiving data
from the network.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.
3. Reboot the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 for changes to take effect.

Note: See the COM window (on page 364) for parameter location.

Default Setting 300

Options l The minimum value is 5.
l The maximum value is 3600.
Description The Com1.TerminalServerTimeOut or
Com2.TerminalServerTimeOut parameter designates the amount of time, in
seconds, the Terminal Server remains open without transmitting or receiving data
from the network.

Note: This can prevent an idle socket from remaining open indefinitely and
preventing new connections.

15.15. TxBytes
TxBytes
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page l [Page=Com1]
l [Page=Com2]
CLI Command l Com1.TxBytes
l Com2.TxBytes
Web Interface TX Bytes
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the COM window (on page 364) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The Com1.TxBytes or Com2.TxBytes command reports the total bytes sent out
of the COM port.

Note: This is a Read-only parameter.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 211 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

16. config Parameters

Note: See the Config window (on page 366).

l factoryDefaults (on page 213)

l licenseState (on page 213)
l reset (on page 214)
l restore (on page 214)
l save (on page 215)

The parameter syntax is: page.parameter=value.

Parameters with unique names can be specified as parameter=value.

Example: Entering frequencyKey returns the current value of frequencyKey.

Entering frequencyKey= is an implied change to frequencyKey.
If a value is NOT included, it changes frequencyKey to 0 (zero).

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 212 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

16.1. factoryDefaults
factoryDefaults
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=config]
CLI Command l config.factoryDefaults=set
l factoryDefaults=set
Web Interface Factory Defaults
window
Note: See the Config window (on page 366) for parameter location.

Important!: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.

The [Page=system] parameters are only available in the CLI window.
See the Access the CLI and Change the IP Address and nodeId (on page
35) procedure for CLI access.

Default Setting N/A

Options Idle
Description The config.factoryDefaults command restores the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 to its
factory default configuration.

16.2. licenseState
licenseState
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=config]
CLI Command l config.licenseState
l licenseState
Web Interface License State
window
Note: See the Config window (on page 366) for parameter location.

Important!: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.

The [Page=system] parameters are only available in the CLI window.
See the Access the CLI and Change the IP Address and nodeId (on page
35) procedure for CLI access.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 213 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

licenseState
Setting Description
Description The config.licenseState command reports the extra feature licenses in the Z9-
P2 or Z9-PE2.

Note: This is a Read-only parameter.

16.3. reset
reset
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=config]
CLI Command l Reboot the entire Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 device:
l config.reset=now
l config.reset=reboot
l Reset to restart the main application:
l config.reset=reset
Web Interface Reset
window
Note: See the Config window (on page 366) for parameter location.

Important!: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.

The [Page=system] parameters are only available in the CLI window.
See the Access the CLI and Change the IP Address and nodeId (on page
35) procedure for CLI access.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The config.reset command restarts or reboots the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

16.4. restore
restore
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=config]
CLI Command l config.restore=now
l config.restore
l restore

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 214 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

restore
Setting Description
Web Interface Restore
window
Note: See the Config window (on page 366) for parameter location.

Important!: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.

The [Page=system] parameters are only available in the CLI window.
See the Access the CLI and Change the IP Address and nodeId (on page
35) procedure for CLI access.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The config.restore command reloads a previously saved setting configuration of
the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

Note: Restore happens automatically when the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 starts.

16.5. save
save
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=config]
CLI Command l config.save=now
l config.save
l save
Web Interface Save
window
Note: See the Config window (on page 366) for parameter location.

Important!: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.

The [Page=system] parameters are only available in the CLI window.
See the Access the CLI and Change the IP Address and nodeId (on page
35) procedure for CLI access.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The config.save command saves changes made to the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2
configuration.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 215 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

17. dataPath Parameters

Note: See the Data Path window (on page 368).

l aggregateEnabled (on page 217)

l compressionEnabled (on page 218)
l fecRate (on page 219)
l MacTableEntryAgeTimeout (on page 221)
l otaMaxFragmentSize (on page 223)
l routeMinSignalMarginThresh (on page 223)

The parameter syntax is: page.parameter=value.

Parameters with unique names can be specified as parameter=value.

Example: Entering frequencyKey returns the current value of frequencyKey.

Entering frequencyKey= is an implied change to frequencyKey.
If a value is NOT included, it changes frequencyKey to 0 (zero).

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 216 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

17.1. aggregateEnabled
aggregateEnabled
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=dataPath]
CLI Command l Enable:
l dataPath.aggregateEnabled=true
l aggregateEnabled=true
l Disable:
l dataPath.aggregateEnabled=false
l aggregateEnabled=false
Web Interface Aggregate Enabled
window 1. Click the Aggregate Enabled list box arrow and select True to enable this
parameter and increase throughput of small packets.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: By default, the Aggregate Enabled is NOT enabled (set to False).

See the Data Path window (on page 368) for parameter location.

Default Setting False

Options l True
l False

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 217 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

aggregateEnabled
Setting Description
Description The aggregateEnabled (on page 217) setting increases throughput of small
packets by combining multiple packets into a single packet minimizing the number
of packets required for transmission.
Notes
l Increases latency by 20msec and reduces poll rates.
l When enabled, this setting adds 20 msec of latency.
l However, net throughput may increase due to sending fewer, larger
packets.
l If another packet is not received within 20 msec, the aggregated packet is
transmitted.
l This setting does NOT need to match on all radios.
l Does NOT affect medium and large packets.
l Packets below 900 bytes are aggregated up to an aggregated packet size of
970 bytes.

Important!: All radios have the ability to de-aggregate received packets,

regardless of the aggregation setting.

FREEWAVE Recommends: Enable this setting on individual radios that

send a high percentage of network data packets that are smaller than 900
bytes.

17.2. compressionEnabled
compressionEnabled
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=dataPath]
CLI Command l Enable:
l dataPath.compressionEnabled=true
l compressionEnabled=true
l Disable:
l dataPath.compressionEnabled=false
l compressionEnabled=false

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 218 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

compressionEnabled
Setting Description
Web Interface Compression Enabled
window 1. Click the Compression Enabled list box arrow and select False to disable
compression of outgoing packets.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: By default, the Compression Enabled is enabled (set to True).

See the Data Path window (on page 368) for parameter location.

Default Setting True

Options l True
l False
Description When the compressionEnabled (on page 218) setting is enabled, the outgoing
packets are analyzed and, if the data packet can be compressed, sent
compressed to transmit fewer bits over the air.

Important!: The compression ratio varies depending on the type of data

being transmitted.

Example: Text data is easily compressible, while video data is not.

Notes
l When enabled, the Packet Compression setting increases latency by a
maximum of 10msec.
l When enabled, the Packet Compression setting ensures that the packet
transmitted is no larger than the current packet size.
l Net throughput may increase due to sending more data in each packet.
l All radios have the ability to de-compress received packets regardless of their
compression setting.
l This setting does NOT need to match on all radios.

FREEWAVE Recommends: Enable Packet Compression on all

ZumLink networks.

17.3. fecRate
fecRate
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=dataPath]

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 219 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

fecRate
Setting Description
CLI Command l Enable:
l dataPath.fecRate=RATE_7_8
l fecRate=RATE_7_8
l Disable:
l dataPath.fecRate=RATE_1_1
l fecRate=RATE_1_1
Web Interface FEC Rate
window 1. Click the FEC Rate list box arrow and select the Forward Error Correction
(FEC) rate.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the Data Path window (on page 368) for parameter location.

Default Setting RATE_1_1

Options l RATE_1_1
l RATE_7_8

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 220 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

fecRate
Setting Description
Description The dataPath.fecRate setting enables the Forward Error Correction (FEC) rate.

Note: The fecRate (on page 219) increases the reliability of the data
transferred over the air at the cost of some transmission throughput.

Notes
l The FEC setting MUST match on ALL radios in the network, to maintain over-
the-air compatibility.
l When enabled, this setting indicates that for every 7 bytes in, the radio sends 8
bytes out, with the 8th byte used for parity / error correction.
l Reduces throughput by 13%.
l Improves sensitivity by 3dB to maximize link range in noisy environments.
l Adds redundant information to a data stream to detect packet errors and
corrects them to avoid retransmission of the packet.
l Adds resilience in noisy environments.
l FEC reduces the maximum achievable throughput.
l However, in noisy environments, net throughput may increase due to
reduced errors and retries.

Caution: When enabling FEC, start with the farthest Endpoints, then
any Repeaters, then lastly the Gateway.
As FEC is enabled on each radio, that radio is temporarily dropped off
the network, until any downstream Repeaters and the Gateway also
have FEC enabled, at which time all communication will resume.

FREEWAVE Recommends: When viewing local diagnostics, if the

RadioBadCRC (on page 241) count is more than 15-20% of the total
transmitted packets (the RadioLLTx (on page 244) count), enabling the
fecRate (on page 219) setting is beneficial.

17.4. MacTableEntryAgeTimeout
MacTableEntryAgeTimeout
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=dataPath]

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 221 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

MacTableEntryAgeTimeout
Setting Description
CLI Command l dataPath.MacTableEntryAgeTimeout=nnnn
l MacTableEntryAgeTimeout=nnnn

Note: Where nnnn is the number of seconds.

Web Interface MAC Table Entry Age Timeout

window 1. In the MAC Table Entry Age Timeout text box, enter the number of
seconds before an inactive entry in the MAC Table ages out and expires.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the Data Path window (on page 368) for parameter location.

Default Setting 120

Options l The minimum value is 30.
l The maximum value is 86400.
Description The dataPath.MacTableEntryAgeTimeout parameter designates the number of
seconds before an inactive entry in the MAC Table ages out and expires.
l The radio network learns the MAC address of devices connected to particular
radio Endpoints and stores them in a MAC table.
l As traffic passes between the Endpoints, the entries in the MAC table are
updated.
l If packets have NOT been sent or received to a MAC address within the
designated dataPath.MacTableEntryAgeTimeout period, the entry in the
table is marked as expired.
l Expired entries must be re-learned and generate some extra traffic on the
network until the radio Endpoint associated with the MAC address is learned.
l The timeout does impact the time it takes to learn the new path.
l This value can be optimized with parallel Repeaters to allow for fail over.
l Setting this value too small so normal traffic does not keep the MAC table
entry from expiring may generate excess network traffic.

FREEWAVE Recommends: Set this timeout longer than the polling rate
on the network.
Entries do not use the new timeout value until they are updated when a
packet transfers.

Note: See MacTableShow (on page 239) to view the MAC to nodeId
mapping table.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 222 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

17.5. otaMaxFragmentSize
otaMaxFragmentSize
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=dataPath]
CLI Command l dataPath.otaMaxFragmentSize=nnnn
l otaMaxFragmentSize=nnnn

Note: Where nnnn is the maximum fragment size.

Web Interface OTA Max Fragment Size

window 1. In the OTA Max Fragment Size text box, enter the maximum fragment
size, in bytes, sent over the air.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the Data Path window (on page 368) for parameter location.

Default Setting 1000

Options l The minimum value is 64.
l The maximum value is 1000.
Description The dataPath.otaMaxFragmentSize setting designates the maximum fragment
size, in bytes, sent over the air.
Notes
l This setting does NOT need to match on all radios.
l A smaller Max Fragment Size may increase RF link reliability in highly noisy
environments.
l A smaller Max Fragment Size may reduce data throughput.
l A larger Max Fragment Size may increase data throughput.
l A larger Max Fragment Size may reduce RF link reliability in noisy
environments.

17.6. routeMinSignalMarginThresh
routeMinSignalMarginThresh
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=dataPath]
CLI Command l dataPath.routeMinSignalMarginThresh=nnnn
l routeMinSignalMarginThresh=nnnn

Note: Where nnnn is the minimum signal margin in dB.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 223 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

routeMinSignalMarginThresh
Setting Description
Web Interface Route Min Signal Margin Thresh
window 1. In the Route Min Signal Margin Thresh text box, enter the minimum
threshold signal margin in dB.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the Data Path window (on page 368) for parameter location.

Default Setting l 10
Options l The minimum value is -5.
l The maximum value is 60.
Description The dataPath.routeMinSignalMarginThresh parameter designates the minimum
(threshold) signal margin, in dB, the next hop must be considered part of the
packet route.
Notes
l When Repeaters are enabled, the packets take the path through the radio
network with the minimum number of hops.
l By increasing the threshold value, the possible routes can be reduced to allow
a particular routing path to be preferred.

FREEWAVE Recommends: This value should be at least 4 dB lower

than the reported link margin to the next hop.

Example: If the best-reported link margin for the next hop is 20 dB, this
number should be set to 16 or less. This prevents the traffic from choosing
an alternative route with lower margin.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 224 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

18. date Parameters

Note: See the Date window (on page 370).

l dcAppStartTime (on page 226)

l dcAppUptime (on page 226)
l time (on page 227)
l timeString (on page 227)
l upTime (on page 228)
l upTimeString (on page 229)

The parameter syntax is: page.parameter=value.

Parameters with unique names can be specified as parameter=value.

Example: Entering frequencyKey returns the current value of frequencyKey.

Entering frequencyKey= is an implied change to frequencyKey.
If a value is NOT included, it changes frequencyKey to 0 (zero).

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 225 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

18.1. dcAppStartTime
Important!: Time zones do not apply to the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

dcAppStartTime
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=date]
CLI Command l date.dcAppStartTime
l dcAppStartTime
Web Interface DC App Start Time
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Date window (on page 370) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The date.dcAppStartTime parameter reports the time stamp of when the main
app started.

Note: This is a Read-only parameter.

18.2. dcAppUptime
Important!: Time zones do not apply to the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

dcAppUptime
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=date]
CLI Command l date.dcAppUptime
l dcAppUptime
Web Interface DC App Uptime
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Date window (on page 370) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 226 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

dcAppUptime
Setting Description
Description The date.dcAppUptime parameter reports the number of Days, Hours, Minutes,
and Seconds since the main app started.

Note: This is a Read-only parameter.

18.3. time
Important!: Time zones do not apply to the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

time
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=date]
CLI Command l date.time
l time
Web Interface Time
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Date window (on page 370) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The date.time parameter reports the current time in Unix time stamp format.

Note: This is a Read-only parameter.

18.4. timeString
Important!: Time zones do not apply to the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

timeString
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=date]
CLI Command date.timeString=MM/DD/YYYY HH.MM.SS

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 227 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

timeString
Setting Description
Web Interface Time String
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Date window (on page 370) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The date.timeString parameter designates the time ONLY if the ntpReference
(on page 283) is set to REFCLK_LOCALCLOCK.

Important!: If the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 loses power, the time must be

manually reset.

18.5. upTime
Important!: Time zones do not apply to the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

upTime
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=date]
CLI Command l date.upTime
l upTime
Web Interface Up Time
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Date window (on page 370) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The date.upTime parameter reports the number of seconds since the Z9-P2 or
Z9-PE2 restarted.

Note: This is a Read-only parameter.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 228 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

18.6. upTimeString
Important!: Time zones do not apply to the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

upTimeString
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=date]
CLI Command l date.upTimeString
l upTimeString

Example: A return of Uptime 5 Days 01:36:41 means the unit has been
up for 5 days, 1 hour, 36 minutes, and 41 seconds.

Web Interface Up Time String

window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Date window (on page 370) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The date.upTimeString parameter reports the amount of time in Days, Hours,
Minutes, and Seconds the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 has been powered on without a
reboot.

Note: This is a Read-only parameter.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 229 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

19. encryption Parameters

Note: See the Encryption window (on page 372).

l activeKey (on page 231)

l encryptionMode (on page 232)
l Key1 to Key 16 (on page 233)

The parameter syntax is: page.parameter=value.

Parameters with unique names can be specified as parameter=value.

Example: Entering frequencyKey returns the current value of frequencyKey.

Entering frequencyKey= is an implied change to frequencyKey.
If a value is NOT included, it changes frequencyKey to 0 (zero).

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 230 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

19.1. activeKey
Caution: Encryption settings MUST match on ALL radios in the network to maintain over-the-
air compatibility.
When enabling Encryption, start with the farthest Endpoints, then any Repeaters, then lastly
the Gateway.
As Encryption is enabled on each radio, that radio temporarily drops off the network, until any
downstream Repeaters and the Gateway also have Encryption enabled, at which time all
communication will resume.

activeKey
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=encryption]
CLI Command l encryption.activeKey=Off
l activeKey=Off
l encryption.activeKey=Key1 to Key16
l activeKey=Key1 to Key16

Example: encryption.activeKey=Key10.

Web Interface Active Key

window 1. Verify the designated Key1 to Key 16 (on page 233) is set at either a 128- or
256-bit hexadecimal.
2. Click the Active Key list box arrow and select the designated active key.
3. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the Encryption window (on page 372) for parameter location.

Default Setting Off

Options l Off
l Key1 to Key16
Description The encryption.activeKey parameter designates the key used for encryption and
decryption.

Important!: Assigning the activeKey to a key that is NOT set will NOT
allow communication across the link.
Keys MUST BE set before they can become active keys.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 231 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

19.2. encryptionMode
Caution: Encryption settings MUST match on ALL radios in the network to maintain over-the-
air compatibility.
When enabling Encryption, start with the farthest Endpoints, then any Repeaters, then lastly
the Gateway.
As Encryption is enabled on each radio, that radio temporarily drops off the network, until any
downstream Repeaters and the Gateway also have Encryption enabled, at which time all
communication will resume.

encryptionMode
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=encryption]
CLI Command l AES Counter Mode:
l encryption.encryptionMode=AES_CTR
l encryptionMode=AES_CTR
l AES Counter Mode with MIC (Message Integrity Check):
l encryption.encryptionMode=AES_CCM
l encryptionMode=AES_CCM
Web Interface Encryption Mode
window 1. Click the Encryption Mode list box arrow and select the designated
encryption mode.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the Encryption window (on page 372) for parameter location.

Default Setting AES_CTR

Options l AES_CCM
l AES_CTR
Description The encryption.encryptionMode parameter designates the encryption mode.

Important!: Use of encryption may affect latency and user throughput.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 232 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

19.3. Key1 to Key 16

Caution: Encryption settings MUST match on ALL radios in the network to maintain over-the-
air compatibility.
When enabling Encryption, start with the farthest Endpoints, then any Repeaters, then lastly
the Gateway.
As Encryption is enabled on each radio, that radio temporarily drops off the network, until any
downstream Repeaters and the Gateway also have Encryption enabled, at which time all
communication will resume.

Key1 to Key16
Setting Description
CLI / Web [Page=encryption]
Page
CLI l encryption.Key1=Key1 to Key16
Command l Key1=Key1 to Key16

Example: encryption.getKey=key8.

Web Get Key

Interface 1. In the KeyX text box, enter either the 128- or 256-bit key in 16 or 32 hexadecimal
window format respectively.
Enter Clear to erase a previously enter key.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: Where X is the designated key number.

See the Encryption window (on page 372) for parameter location.

Default Key has not been set.

Setting
Options Key1 to Key16
Description The encryption.Key1 parameter designates whether the specified key is a 128- or
256-bit key.

Example: 128 bit key: Key1=1234567890abcdef1234567890abcdef

Example: 256 bit key:

Key2=1234567890abcdef1234567890abcdef1234567890abcdef1234567890ab
cdef

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 233 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

20. ioexcom Parameters

Note: This parameter is read-only.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 234 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

21. localDiagnostics Parameters

Note: See the Local Diagnostics window (on page 381).

l signalLevel (on page 236) l RadioLLTx (on page 244)

l signalMargin (on page 236) l RadioNoAckTx (on page 244)
l cntBadBCC (on page 237) l RadioReliableRx (on page 244)
l cntBadSync (on page 237) l RadioReliableTx (on page 244)
l cntETX (on page 237) l RadioRexmit (on page 245)
l cntSTX (on page 237) l RadioRx (on page 245)
l getStats (on page 237) l RadioSendingDrop (on page 245)
l interfaceBytesRx (on page 238) l RadioTimedOut (on page 245)
l interfaceBytesTx (on page 238) l RadioTooLong (on page 245)
l interfaceDataRx (on page 238) l RadioTooShort (on page 246)
l interfaceDataTx (on page 238) l RadioTx (on page 246)
l MacTableClear (on page 238) l resetsDetected (on page 246)
l MacTableShow (on page 239) l resetsSent (on page 246)
l monitoredNode (on page 239) l resetStats (on page 246)
l noiseLevel (on page 240) l RxSuccess (on page 247)
l RadioAckTx (on page 241) l showChannelDiags (on page 248)
l RadioBadAckRx (on page 241) l showNodeDiags (on page 248)
l RadioBadCRC (on page 241) l SupplyVoltage (on page 248)
l RadioBadSync (on page 242) l timestamp (on page 249)
l RadioContentionDrop (on page 243) l TxAvailability (on page 250)
l RadioLLRx (on page 243) l TxSuccess (on page 250)
l VSWR (on page 251)

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 235 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

21.1. signalLevel
Important!: Most of the localDiagnostics parameters are read-only.
The information reported is dependent upon the connected Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

signalLevel
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=localDiagnostics]
CLI Command l localDiagnostics.signalLevel
l signalLevel
Web Interface Signal Level
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Local Diagnostics window (on page 381) for parameter location.

Default Setting 0 (zero)

Options N/A
Description The localDiagnostics.signalLevel command reports the signal level of the Z9-
P2 or Z9-PE2, in dBm, of the last received packet.

Note: This setting shows -128.00 if no packet has been received since the
stats were cleared.

21.2. signalMargin
Important!: Most of the localDiagnostics parameters are read-only.
The information reported is dependent upon the connected Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

signalMargin
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=localDiagnostics]
CLI Command l localDiagnostics.signalMargin
l signalMargin
Web Interface Signal Margin
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Local Diagnostics window (on page 381) for parameter location.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 236 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

signalMargin
Setting Description
Default Setting N/A
Options N/A
Description The localDiagnostics.signalMargin command reports the amount of signal
margin, in dB, the last received packet experienced.

Note: The signal margin is the difference between the signal level and
either the receive sensitivity or the noise level, whichever is higher, for the
configured RF data rate.

21.3. cntBadBCC
Important!: FreeWave internal use only.

21.4. cntBadSync
Important!: FreeWave internal use only.

21.5. cntETX
Important!: FreeWave internal use only.

21.6. cntSTX
Important!: FreeWave internal use only.

21.7. getStats
getStats
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=localDiagnostics]
CLI Command l localDiagnostics.getStats
l getStats

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 237 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

getStats
Setting Description
Web Interface Get Stats
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Local Diagnostics window (on page 381) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The localDiagnostics.getStats command reports the local diagnostics from the
radio immediately.

Important!: A refresh of the localDiagnostics page is required to see the

updates.

21.8. interfaceBytesRx
Important!: FreeWave internal use only.

21.9. interfaceBytesTx
Important!: FreeWave internal use only.

21.10. interfaceDataRx
Important!: FreeWave internal use only.

21.11. interfaceDataTx
Important!: FreeWave internal use only.

21.12. MacTableClear
MacTableClear
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=localDiagnostics]

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 238 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

MacTableClear
Setting Description
CLI Command l localDiagnostics.MacTableClear=Now
l localDiagnostics.MacTableClear=
l MacTableClear=Now
l MacTableClear=
Web Interface Mac Table Clear
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Local Diagnostics window (on page 381) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options Now
Description The localDiagnostics.MacTableClear command clears the MAC to the nodeId
(on page 296) mapping table and forces routes to be relearned.

21.13. MacTableShow
MacTableShow
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=localDiagnostics]
CLI Command l localDiagnostics.MacTableShow
l MacTableShow
Web Interface Mac Table Show
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Local Diagnostics window (on page 381) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The localDiagnostics.MacTableShow command reports the MAC addresses of
the devices connected to the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 in a nodeId (on page 296) table
format.

21.14. monitoredNode
Important!: Most of the localDiagnostics parameters are read-only.
The information reported is dependent upon the connected Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 239 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

monitoredNode
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=localDiagnostics]
CLI Command l localDiagnostics.monitoredNode=<Node ID here>
l monitoredNode=<Node ID here>
Web Interface Monitored Node
window 1. In the Monitored Node text box, enter the nodeId (on page 296) to monitor.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the Local Diagnostics window (on page 381) for parameter
location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The localDiagnostics.monitoredNode parameter designates the nodeId (on
page 296) to monitor the signal level.

Use the showNodeDiags (on page 248) to view the received signal
level (RSSI) of this node.

21.15. noiseLevel
Important!: Most of the localDiagnostics parameters are read-only.
The information reported is dependent upon the connected Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

noiseLevel
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=localDiagnostics]
CLI Command l localDiagnostics.noiseLevel
l noiseLevel
Web Interface Noise Level
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Local Diagnostics window (on page 381) for parameter location.

Default Setting 0.000000

Options N/A
Description The localDiagnostics.noiseLevel command reports the amount of link noise
measured in dB before the last packet was transmitted.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 240 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

21.16. RadioAckTx
Important!: FreeWave internal use only.

21.17. RadioBadAckRx
Important!: Most of the localDiagnostics parameters are read-only.
The information reported is dependent upon the connected Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

RadioBadAckRx
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=localDiagnostics]
CLI Command l localDiagnostics.RadioBadAckRx
l RadioBadAckRx
Web Interface Radio Bad Ack RX
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Local Diagnostics window (on page 381) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The localDiagnostics.RadioBadAckRx command reports the number of
received ACKs missed in unicast transmissions.

21.18. RadioBadCRC
Important!: Most of the localDiagnostics parameters are read-only.
The information reported is dependent upon the connected Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

RadioBadCRC
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=localDiagnostics]
CLI Command l localDiagnostics.RadioBadCRC
l RadioBadCRC

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 241 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

RadioBadCRC
Setting Description
Web Interface Radio Bad CRC
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Local Diagnostics window (on page 381) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The localDiagnostics.RadioBadCRC command reports the number of radio
packets received with data corruption.

FREEWAVE Recommends: When viewing local diagnostics, if the

RadioBadCRC (on page 241) count is more than 15-20% of the total
transmitted packets (the RadioLLTx (on page 244) count), enabling the
fecRate (on page 219) setting is beneficial.

21.19. RadioBadSync
Important!: Most of the localDiagnostics parameters are read-only.
The information reported is dependent upon the connected Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

RadioBadSync
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=localDiagnostics]
CLI Command l localDiagnostics.RadioBadSync
l RadioBadSync
Web Interface Radio Bad Sync
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Local Diagnostics window (on page 381) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The localDiagnostics.RadioBadSync command reports the number of times
beacons were lost and the Endpoint needed to re-synchronize with the Gateway
when radiosettings.radioHoppingMode=Hopping_On.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 242 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

21.20. RadioContentionDrop
Important!: Most of the localDiagnostics parameters are read-only.
The information reported is dependent upon the connected Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

RadioContentionDrop
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=localDiagnostics]
CLI Command l localDiagnostics.RadioContentionDrop
l RadioContentionDrop
Web Interface Radio Contention Drop
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Local Diagnostics window (on page 381) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The localDiagnostics.RadioContentionDrop command reports the number of
times a transmission was backed-off due to contention on the RF channel.

21.21. RadioLLRx
Important!: Most of the localDiagnostics parameters are read-only.
The information reported is dependent upon the connected Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

RadioLLRx
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=localDiagnostics]
CLI Command l localDiagnostics.RadioLLRx
l RadioLLRx
Web Interface Radio LL RX
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Local Diagnostics window (on page 381) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The localDiagnostics.RadioLLRx command reports the number of packets
received over the air without data corruption.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 243 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

21.22. RadioLLTx
Important!: Most of the localDiagnostics parameters are read-only.
The information reported is dependent upon the connected Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

RadioLLTx
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=localDiagnostics]
CLI Command l localDiagnostics.RadioLLTx
l RadioLLTx
Web Interface Radio LL TX
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Local Diagnostics window (on page 381) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The localDiagnostics.RadioLLTx command reports the number of packets
transmitted over the air.

FREEWAVE Recommends: When viewing local diagnostics, if the

RadioBadCRC (on page 241) count is more than 15-20% of the total
transmitted packets (the RadioLLTx (on page 244) count), enabling the
fecRate (on page 219) setting is beneficial.

21.23. RadioNoAckTx
Important!: FreeWave internal use only.

21.24. RadioReliableRx
Important!: FreeWave internal use only.

21.25. RadioReliableTx
Important!: FreeWave internal use only.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 244 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

21.26. RadioRexmit
Important!: FreeWave internal use only.

21.27. RadioRx
Important!: Most of the localDiagnostics parameters are read-only.
The information reported is dependent upon the connected Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

RadioRx
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=localDiagnostics]
CLI Command l localDiagnostics.RadioRx
l RadioRx
Web Interface Radio RX
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Local Diagnostics window (on page 381) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The localDiagnostics.RadioRx command reports the number of data packets
correctly received over the wireless RF link for this Endpoint.

21.28. RadioSendingDrop
Important!: FreeWave internal use only.

21.29. RadioTimedOut
Important!: FreeWave internal use only.

21.30. RadioTooLong
Important!: FreeWave internal use only.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 245 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

21.31. RadioTooShort
Important!: FreeWave internal use only.

21.32. RadioTx
Important!: Most of the localDiagnostics parameters are read-only.
The information reported is dependent upon the connected Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

RadioTx
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=localDiagnostics]
CLI Command l localDiagnostics.RadioTx
l RadioTx
Web Interface Radio TX
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Local Diagnostics window (on page 381) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The localDiagnostics.RadioTx command reports the number of data packets
scheduled to be transmitted.

21.33. resetsDetected
Important!: FreeWave internal use only.

21.34. resetsSent
Important!: FreeWave internal use only.

21.35. resetStats
resetStats
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=localDiagnostics]

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 246 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

resetStats
Setting Description
CLI Command l localDiagnostics.resetStats=Now
l localDiagnostics.resetStats=
l resetStats=Now
l resetStats=
Web Interface Reset Stats
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Local Diagnostics window (on page 381) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options Now
Description The localDiagnostics.resetStats command resets the local diagnostics
counters.

21.36. RxSuccess
Important!: Most of the localDiagnostics parameters are read-only.
The information reported is dependent upon the connected Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

RxSuccess
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=localDiagnostics]
CLI Command l localDiagnostics.RxSuccess
l RxSuccess
Web Interface Rx Success
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Local Diagnostics window (on page 381) for parameter location.

Default Setting 100

Options N/A
Description The localDiagnostics.RxSuccess command reports the percentage of packets
correctly received for this Endpoint.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 247 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

21.37. showChannelDiags
showChannelDiags
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=localDiagnostics]
CLI Command l localDiagnostics.showChannelDiags
l showChannelDiags
Web Interface Show Channel Diags
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Local Diagnostics window (on page 381) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The localDiagnostics.showChannelDiags command reports the received signal
level (RSSI) and nodeId (on page 296) of the last packet received on the displayed
frequencies.

21.38. showNodeDiags
showNodeDiags
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=localDiagnostics]
CLI Command l localDiagnostics.showNodeDiags
l showNodeDiags
Web Interface Show Node Diags
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Local Diagnostics window (on page 381) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The localDiagnostics.showNodeDiags command reports the channel frequency
and signal level for the node selected by the monitoredNode (on page 239)
parameter.

21.39. SupplyVoltage
Important!: Most of the localDiagnostics parameters are read-only.
The information reported is dependent upon the connected Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 248 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

SupplyVoltage
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=localDiagnostics]
CLI Command l localDiagnostics.SupplyVoltage
l SupplyVoltage
Web Interface Supply Voltage
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Local Diagnostics window (on page 381) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The localDiagnostics.SupplyVoltage command reports the supply voltage to
the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 in units of voltage (V).

21.40. timestamp
Important!: Most of the localDiagnostics parameters are read-only.
The information reported is dependent upon the connected Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

timestamp
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=localDiagnostics]
CLI Command l localDiagnostics.timestamp
l timestamp
Web Interface Timestamp
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Local Diagnostics window (on page 381) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The localDiagnostics.timestamp command reports the time the Diagnostics
Information was collected by the device.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 249 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

21.41. TxAvailability
Important!: Most of the localDiagnostics parameters are read-only.
The information reported is dependent upon the connected Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

TxAvailability
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=localDiagnostics]
CLI Command l localDiagnostics.TxAvailability
l TxAvailability
Web Interface Tx Availability
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Local Diagnostics window (on page 381) for parameter location.

Default Setting 100

Options N/A
Description The localDiagnostics.TxAvailability command reports the percentage of
packets that were transmitted without back-off.

21.42. TxSuccess
Important!: Most of the localDiagnostics parameters are read-only.
The information reported is dependent upon the connected Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

TxSuccess
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=localDiagnostics]
CLI Command l localDiagnostics.TxSuccess
l TxSuccess
Web Interface Tx Success
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Local Diagnostics window (on page 381) for parameter location.

Default Setting 100

Options N/A
Description The localDiagnostics.TxSuccess command reports the percentage of packets
that were transmitted with a successful ACK received.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 250 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

21.43. VSWR
Important!: Most of the localDiagnostics parameters are read-only.
The information reported is dependent upon the connected Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

VSWR
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=localDiagnostics]
CLI Command l localDiagnostics.VSWR
l VSWR
Web Interface Signal Level
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Local Diagnostics window (on page 381) for parameter location.

Default Setting 0 (zero)

Options N/A
Description The localDiagnostics.VSWR command reports the value proportional to the
VSWR (Voltage Standing Wave Ratio) measured from the last packet
transmitted.
l For the antenna port, the value can range from:
l 1 to 2 for an excellent match
l 2 to 10 for a good match
l 11 to 99 - user discretion
l > 100 for a poor match
Notes
l VSWR is less accurate at higher power levels (>20 dBm).
l The reported VSWR is a value proportional to the VSWR.
It is closer to VSWR at lower powers, but at higher power levels, it still
increases with reflected power.
l VSWR may not function on Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 models manufactured prior to
September, 2018.
If the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 always reports a VSWR value of 0 (zero), VSWR is not
supported.
l The VSWR is instantaneous, not averaged.
Each measurement can produce a different value; units that do support VSWR
will occasionally report 0 (zero) due to an invalid measurement.

FREEWAVE Recommends: Investigate cable and antenna at higher

VSWR levels.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 251 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

22. modbus Parameters

Note: See the Network window (on page 385).

l modbusDeviceId (on page 253) l read (on page 255)

l modbusLayout (on page 253) l readCoils (on page 256)
l modbusRtuOverTcp (on page 254) l write (on page 257)
l modbusTcp (on page 255) l writeCoils (on page 258)

The parameter syntax is: page.parameter=value.

Parameters with unique names can be specified as parameter=value.

Example: Entering frequencyKey returns the current value of frequencyKey.

Entering frequencyKey= is an implied change to frequencyKey.
If a value is NOT included, it changes frequencyKey to 0 (zero).

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 252 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

22.1. modbusDeviceId
modbusDeviceId
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=modbus]
CLI Command l modbus.modbusDeviceId=nnn
l modbusDeviceId=nnn

Note: Where nnn designates the user-defined Modbus device ID.

Web Interface Modbus Device ID

window 1. In the Modbus Device ID text box, enter a user-defined Modbus device ID.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the Modbus window (on page 383) for parameter location.

Default Setting 1
Options 1 to 247
Description The modbus.modbusDeviceId parameter designates the Modbus device ID the
local device responds to during a modbusTcp (on page 255) request over the
network or a modbusRtuOverTcp (on page 254) request coming in via COM1 or
COM2.

22.2. modbusLayout
modbusLayout
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=modbus]
CLI Command l modbus.modbusLayout
l modbusLayout
Web Interface Modbus Layout
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Modbus window (on page 383) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 253 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

modbusLayout
Setting Description
Description The modbus.modbusLayout parameter reports the Modbus map for the local
device.
Example
>modbusLayout
radioSettings.radioMode type:uint32_t Protocol
address:31001 Number registers:2 Modbus FC:4 Address:1000
radioSettings.rfDataRate type:uint32_t Protocol
address:31003 Number registers:2 Modbus FC:4 Address:1002
radioSettings.radioMaxRepeaters type:uint32_t Protocol
address:31005 Number registers:2 Modbus FC:4 Address:1004
….
rfStats.DownRateAvg2 type:double Protocol address:32121
Number registers:4 Modbus FC:4 Address:2120
RESULT:0:OK
>

22.3. modbusRtuOverTcp
modbusRtuOverTcp
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=modbus]
CLI Command l modbus.modbusRtuOverTcp=nnnn
l modbusRtuOverTcp=nnnn

Note: Where nnnn designates the TCP port used for the Modbus RTU
over TCP requests.

Web Interface Modbus RTU Over TCP

window 1. In the Modbus Rtu Over TCP text box, enter the TCP port used for the
Modbus RTU over TCP requests.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the Modbus window (on page 383) for parameter location.

Default Setting 5021

Options 0 (zero) to 65535

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 254 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

modbusRtuOverTcp
Setting Description
Description The modbus.modbusRtuOverTcp parameter designates the TCP port used for
the Modbus RTU over TCP requests.

Note: Set to 0 (zero) to disable Modbus RTU over TCP requests.

22.4. modbusTcp
modbusTcp
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=modbus]
CLI Command l modbus.modbusTcp=nnnn
l modbusTcp=nnnn

Note: Where nnnn designates the TCP port used for the Modbus TCP
requests.

Web Interface Modbus TCP

window 1. In the Modbus TCP text box, enter the TCP port used for the Modbus TCP
requests.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the Modbus window (on page 383) for parameter location.

Default Setting 502

Options 0 (zero) to 65535
Description The modbus.modbusTcp parameter designates the TCP port used for the
Modbus TCP requests.

Note: Set to 0 (zero) to disable Modbus TCP.

Important!: A reboot is required when changing the modbus.modbusTcp

value for the change to take effect.

22.5. read
read
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=modbus]

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 255 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

read
Setting Description
CLI Command l modbus.read
l read
Default Setting N/A
Options Bool LongABCD
Byte LongBADC
FloatABCD LongCDAB
FloatBADC LongDCBA
FloatCDAB Raw
FloatDCBA Unsigned
IntABCD IntDCBA
IntBADC Signed
IntCDAB

Description The modbus.read parameter creates a Modbus request from the CLI.
Example
>read --srcId=1 --srcAddress=1000 --srcFc=FC4 --
type=longABCD --numElements=4
Id:1 Fc:4 Address: 1000 Type: LongABCD Value: 0
Id:1 Fc:4 Address: 1002 Type: LongABCD Value: 4000000
Id:1 Fc:4 Address: 1004 Type: LongABCD Value: 0
Id:1 Fc:4 Address: 1006 Type: LongABCD Value: 1
RESULT:0:OK
>

22.6. readCoils
readCoils
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=modbus]
CLI Command l modbus.readCoils
l readCoils
Default Setting N/A
Options N/A

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 256 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

readCoils
Setting Description
Description The modbus.readCoils parameter creates a Modbus request to read coils from
the CLI.
Example
>readCoils --srcId=1 --srcAddress=100 --srcFc=FC1 --
numElements=4
Id:1 Fc:1 Address: 100 Value: 1
Id:1 Fc:1 Address: 101 Value: 1
Id:1 Fc:1 Address: 102 Value: 1
Id:1 Fc:1 Address: 103 Value: 1
RESULT:0:OK

22.7. write
write
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=modbus]
CLI Command l modbus.write
l write
Default Setting N/A
Options Bool LongABCD
Byte LongBADC
FloatABCD LongCDAB
FloatBADC LongDCBA
FloatCDAB Raw
FloatDCBA Unsigned
IntABCD IntDCBA
IntBADC Signed
IntCDAB

Description The modbus.write parameter creates a Modbus write request from the CLI to
write to a holding register.
Example
>write --srcId=1 --srcAddress=100 --type=intabcd --
value=1024
RESULT:0:OK

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 257 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

22.8. writeCoils
writeCoils
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=modbus]
CLI Command l modbus.writeCoils
l writeCoils
Default Setting N/A
Options N/A
Description The modbus.writeCoils parameter creates a Modbus write request from the CLI
to write to the coils.
Example
>writeCoils --srcId=1 --srcAddress=100 --value=0x55 --
numElements=4
RESULT:0:OK

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 258 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

22.9. Modbus Use Cases

The Modbus feature allows for radio diagnostics and radio settings to be read via Modbus.
Settings are read only.
The three methods of connecting to the radio are:
l Modbus TCP (on page 259),
l Modbus RTU over TCP (on page 259), and
l Modbus RTU using COM1 (on page 260)
or
Modbus RTU using COM2 (on page 260) serial ports.
COM1 or COM2 can be configured for Modbus pass thru.
This will take any request that comes in through any one of the three methods and convert it to a
serial Modbus RTU request. This request is sent out the configured serial port to a serial Modbus
device.
This allows the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 to act as a Modbus TCP to serial Modbus gateway.

22.9.1. Connecting to a Device via Modbus

Modbus TCP
1. On the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2, connect to port 502.
2. Use the Modbus TCP protocol.
3. In the CLI, enter modbus.modbusTcp=nnnn to change the port.

Note: Where nnnn designates the TCP port used for the Modbus TCP requests.
Set to 0 (zero) to disable Modbus TCP.
See modbusTcp (on page 255) for additional information.

Modbus RTU over TCP

1. On the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2, connect to port 5021.
2. Use the Modbus RTU protocol.
3. In the CLI, enter modbus.modbusRtuOverTcp=nnnn to change the port.

Note: Where nnnn designates the TCP port used for the Modbus RTU over TCP requests.
Set to 0 (zero) to disable Modbus RTU over TCP requests.
See modbusRtuOverTcp (on page 254) for additional information.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 259 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

Modbus RTU using COM1

1. Connect the device to the COM1 serial port.
2. Configure the COM port baudrate (on page 199) and other settings to match the serial
Modbus RTU device.
3. Change the COM1 handler (on page 204) to Com1.handler=ModbusRTU.
4. Send in Modbus requests via COM1.

Modbus RTU using COM2

1. Connect the device to the COM2 serial port.
2. Configure the COM port baudrate (on page 199) and other settings to match the serial
Modbus RTU device.
3. Change the COM1 handler (on page 204) to Com2.handler=ModbusRTU.
4. Send in Modbus requests via COM2.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 260 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

22.10. Reading Local Diagnostics and Radio Settings using

Modbus
Note: See modbusDeviceId (on page 253) for additional information.

The local device ID is set using modbus.modbusDeviceId=nnnn.

22.10.1. Reading from an External Modbus RTU Serial Device using

COM1
1. Connect the device to the COM1 serial port.
2. Configure the COM port baudrate (on page 199) and other settings to match the serial
Modbus device.
3. Change the COM1 handler (on page 204) to Com1.handler=ModbusPassthru.
Notes
l Incoming requests that are not for the local Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 device or for IOEX are sent
out COM1.
l Responses are returned out the port that the request came in on.
l The protocol is converted from Modbus TCP to Modbus RTU and back where necessary.

22.10.2. Reading from the External Modbus RTU Serial Device using
COM2
1. Connect the device to the COM2 serial port.
2. Configure the COM port baudrate (on page 199) and other settings to match the serial
Modbus device.
3. Change the COM2 handler (on page 204) to Com2.handler=ModbusPassthru.
Notes
l Incoming requests that are not for the local Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 device or for IOEX are sent
out COM2.
l Responses are returned out the port that the request came in on.
l The protocol is converted from Modbus TCP to Modbus RTU and back where necessary.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 261 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

23. network Parameters

Note: See the Network window (on page 385).

l arpFilterEnabled (on page 263) l netmask (on page 267)

l gateway (on page 263) l netmaskFilterEnabled (on page 268)
l ip_address (on page 264) l stpEnabled (on page 269)
l mac_address (on page 264) l txqueuelen (on page 270)
l MTU (on page 265) l vlanMgmt (on page 271)
l nameserver_address1 (on page 266) l vlanTagPort1 (on page 271)
l nameserver_address2 (on page 267) l vlanTagPort2 (on page 273)

The parameter syntax is: page.parameter=value.

Parameters with unique names can be specified as parameter=value.

Example: Entering frequencyKey returns the current value of frequencyKey.

Entering frequencyKey= is an implied change to frequencyKey.
If a value is NOT included, it changes frequencyKey to 0 (zero).

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 262 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

23.1. arpFilterEnabled
arpFilterEnabled
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=network]
CLI Command l Enable the parameter: network.arpFilterEnabled=True
l Disable the parameter: network.arpFilterEnabled=False
Web Interface Arp Filter Enabled
window 1. Click the Arp Filter Enabled list box arrow and select True to enable the
parameter.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the Network window (on page 385) for parameter location.

Default Setting False

Options l True
l False
Description The network.arpFilterEnabled setting enables ARP filter in the bridge firewall.
This allows only ARP communication that is in the netmask (on page 267)
parameter to enter the radio network.

23.2. gateway
gateway
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=network]
CLI Command l network.gateway=nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
l gateway=nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

Important!: Where nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is the Gateway IP address for the

network.

Web Interface Gateway

window 1. In the Gateway text box, enter the Gateway IP address for the network.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the Network window (on page 385) for parameter location.

Default Setting 192.168.111.1

Options N/A

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 263 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

gateway
Setting Description
Description The network.gateway parameter designates the Gateway IP address for the
network.

Important!: The use of a Gateway here is NOT related to the

radioSettings.radioMode=Gateway or
radioSettings.radioMode=Endpoint.

23.3. ip_address
ip_address
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=network]
CLI Command l network.ip_address=nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
l ip_address=nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

Important!: Where nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is the IP Address assigned to

each Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

Web Interface IP Address

window 1. In the IP Address text box, enter the IP address of the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2
assigned by the IT department for the network.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the Network window (on page 385) for parameter location.

Default Setting 192.168.111.100

Options N/A
Description The network.ip_address parameter designates the IP address of the Z9-P2 or
Z9-PE2.

23.4. mac_address
mac_address
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=network]
CLI Command l network.mac_address
l mac_address

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 264 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

mac_address
Setting Description
Web Interface MAC Address
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Network window (on page 385) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The network.mac_address command reports the MAC Address of the Z9-P2 or
Z9-PE2.

Important!: This parameter is read-only and is unique for each radio.

Notes about the MAC Address Table

l 1024 apps and programs are allowed to talk directly to the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.
l 4096 entries are allowed for the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 links.
l If 4096 is exceeded, old entries are deleted but they can be re-learned.

23.5. MTU
mtu
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=network]
CLI Command l network.mtu=nnnn
l mtu=nnnn

Note: Where nnnn is the maximum transmission unit.

Web Interface MTU

window 1. In the MTU text box, enter the maximum transmission unit.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the Network window (on page 385) for parameter location.

Default Setting 1500

Options l The minimum value is 100.
l The maximum value is 65521.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 265 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

mtu
Setting Description
Description The network.mtu parameter designates the maximum transmission unit (MTU)
frame size for the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.
Notes
l The MTU size only effects communications that originate or terminate on this
device, such as the web services or the Terminal Servers.
l All other traffic passing through the radio network is affected by this setting.

Important!: The value MUST BE increased to support jumbo size frames

that exceed the normal 1500 byte MTU.

23.6. nameserver_address1
nameserver_address1
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=network]
CLI Command l network.nameserver_address1=nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
l nameserver_address1=nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

Note: Where nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a user-defined DNS IP address.

Web Interface Nameserver Address 1

window 1. Optional: In the Nameserver Address 1 text box, enter a user-defined
DNS IP address.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the Network window (on page 385) for parameter location.

Default Setting 8.8.8.8

Note: This is a Google Public DNS.

Options User-defined DNS IP address.

Description The network.nameserver_address1 parameter designates the DNS for name-
to-address resolution.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 266 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

23.7. nameserver_address2
nameserver_address2
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=network]
CLI Command l network.nameserver_address2=nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn.
l nameserver_address2=nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

Note: Where nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a user-defined DNS IP address.

Web Interface Nameserver Address 2

window 1. Optional: In the Nameserver Address 2 text box, enter a user-defined
DNS IP address..
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the Network window (on page 385) for parameter location.

Default Setting 8.8.4.4

Note: This is a Google Public DNS.

Options User-defined DNS IP address.

Description The network.nameserver_address2 parameter designates the DNS for name-
to-address resolution.

23.8. netmask
netmask
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=network]
CLI Command l network.netmask=nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
l netmask=nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

Note: Where nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is the Netmask of the Z9-P2 or Z9-

PE2.

Web Interface Netmask

window 1. In the Netmask text box, enter the Netmask of the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the Network window (on page 385) for parameter location.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 267 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

netmask
Setting Description
Default Setting 255.255.255.0
Options N/A
Description The network.netmask parameter designates the Netmask of the Z9-P2 or Z9-
PE2.

23.9. netmaskFilterEnabled
netmaskFilterEnabled
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=network]
CLI Command l Enable:
l network.netmaskFilterEnabled=true
l netmaskFilterEnabled=true
l Disable:
l network.netmaskFilterEnabled=false
l netmaskFilterEnabled=false
Web Interface Netmask Filter Enabled
window 1. Click the Netmask Filter Enabled list box arrow and select True to enable
the bridge firewall and restrict network communication to current IPv4
subnet.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: By default, the Netmask Filter Enabled is enabled (set to False).

See the Network window (on page 385) for parameter location.

Default Setting False

Options l True
l False

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 268 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

netmaskFilterEnabled
Setting Description
Description The network.netmaskFilterEnabled enables a bridge firewall to restrict network
communication to the current IPv4 subnet.
Notes
l Allows ONLY IPv4, TCP, UDP, ICMP (ping), and ARP communication that is
in the network.netmask parameter subnet to enter into the radio network.
l VLAN tagged packets are filtered out because the radio is not considered on
the VLAN and therefore VLAN packets cannot be on the same subnet.
l Enabling Netmask Filter can prevent non-radio Ethernet traffic from adversely
affecting the performance and capacity of the radio network.

Important!: ZumLink acts as a layer 2 switch.

ALL Ethernet and Multicast packets are passed when IP Netmask Filter is
NOT enabled.

23.10. stpEnabled
stpEnabled
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=network]
CLI Command l Enable:
l network.stpEnabled=true
l stpEnabled=true
l Disable:
l network.stpEnabled=false
l stpEnabled=false
Web Interface STP Enabled
window 1. Click the STP Enabled list box arrow and select True to enable the
Spanning Tree Protocol.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: By default, the STP Enabled is NOT enabled (set to False).

See the Network window (on page 385) for parameter location.

Default Setting False

Options l True
l False
Description The network.stpEnabled setting enables the Spanning Tree Protocol.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 269 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

23.11. txqueuelen
txqueuelen
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=network]
CLI Command l network.txqueuelen=nnnn
l txqueuelen=nnnn

Note: Where nnnn is the maximum number of packets to hold in the

transmit queue.

Web Interface Txqueuelen

window 1. In the Txqueuelen text box, enter the maximum number of packets to hold
in the transmit queue.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the Network window (on page 385) for parameter location.

Default Setting 25
Options l The minimum value is 1.
l The maximum value is 1000.
Description The network.txqueuelen parameter designates the maximum number of packets
that can be buffered before they are rejected by the radio.
Notes
l The radio is still trying to send packets as soon as it receives them.
l If the queue size is too small in an Ethernet network with a high rate of small
packets, then packets could be lost.
l Increasing TX Queue Length may increase throughput if there is a lot of
network chatter that causes packets to be lost at the network layer.
l Increasing TX Queue Length can increase latency if the packets are arriving
at the Ethernet interface at an average rate that is above the capacity of the
radio link.

Example: network.txqueuelen=750 allows 750 Ethernet packets

buffered in the transmit queue.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 270 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

23.12. vlanMgmt
vlanMgmt
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=network]
CLI Command l network.vlanMgmt=nnnn
l vlanMgmt=nnnn

Note: Where nnnn designates the Management VLAN ID for the Z9-P2 or
Z9-PE2.

Web Interface VLAN MGMT

window 1. In the Vlan MGMT text box, enter the Management VLAN ID.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the Network window (on page 385) for parameter location.

Default Setting 0 (zero)

Options 0 (zero) to 4094
Description The network.vlanMgmt parameter designates the Management VLAN ID for the
Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.
l If the network.vlanMgmt is set, users can only access the device from the
same VLAN ID.
l If the vlanTagPort1 (on page 271) or vlanTagPort2 (on page 273) are set on an
Ethernet port, that port cannot be used to access the network.vlanMgmt.

Important!: network.vlanMgmt must be different from any of the

network.vlanTag IDs.

Note: Set to 0 (zero) to disable Management VLAN.

23.13. vlanTagPort1
vlanTagPort1
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=network]

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 271 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

vlanTagPort1
Setting Description
CLI Command l network.vlanTagPort1=nnnn
l vlanTagPort1=nnnn

Note: Where nnnn designates the VLAN Tag ID.

Web Interface VLAN Tag

window 1. In the Vlan Tag Port 1 and/or Vlan Tag Port 2 text boxes, enter the VLAN
ID for the designated port.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the Network window (on page 385) for parameter location.

Default Setting 0 (zero)

Options 0 (zero) to 4094
Description The network.vlanTagPort1 parameter:
l removes the VLAN ID for traffic transmitted from the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 to
VLAN-incapable equipment and
l adds a VLAN ID for traffic received on the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

Note: Set to 0 (zero) to disable VLAN tagging for the designated Ethernet
port and allow VLAN tags to pass unchanged through the Z9-P2 or Z9-
PE2.

l The VLAN Tag ID is set on the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 designated Ethernet port.
l Egress Traffic
l Egress traffic tagged with the VLAN ID has the tag stripped and sent out the
designated Ethernet port.
l Egress traffic with 802.11ad double tags will have one tag stripped and sent
out the designated Ethernet port.
l Ingress Traffic
l Ingress traffic to the designated Ethernet port has the VLAN tag with that ID
added.
l Ingress traffic that is already tagged can have an additional tag added
(802.11ad double tag).
l vlanTagPort1 and vlanTagPort2 can have the same VLAN Tag ID.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 272 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

23.14. vlanTagPort2
vlanTagPort2
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=network]
CLI Command l network.vlanTagPort2=nnnn
l vlanTagPort2=nnnn

Note: Where nnnn designates the VLAN Tag ID.

Web Interface VLAN Tag

window 1. In the Vlan Tag Port 1 and/or Vlan Tag Port 2 text boxes, enter the VLAN
ID for the designated port.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the Network window (on page 385) for parameter location.

Default Setting 0 (zero)

Options 0 (zero) to 4094
Description The network.vlanTagPort2 parameter:
l removes the VLAN ID for traffic transmitted from the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 to
VLAN-incapable equipment and
l adds a VLAN ID for traffic received on the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

Note: Set to 0 (zero) to disable VLAN tagging for the designated Ethernet
port and allow VLAN tags to pass unchanged through the Z9-P2 or Z9-
PE2.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 273 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

24. networkStats Parameters

Note: See the Network Stats window (on page 392).

l rx_bytes (on page 275)

l rx_dropped (on page 275)
l rx_errors (on page 276)
l rx_packets (on page 276)
l tx_bytes (on page 277)
l tx_dropped (on page 277)
l tx_errors (on page 278)
l tx_packets (on page 278)

The parameter syntax is: page.parameter=value.

Parameters with unique names can be specified as parameter=value.

Example: Entering frequencyKey returns the current value of frequencyKey.

Entering frequencyKey= is an implied change to frequencyKey.
If a value is NOT included, it changes frequencyKey to 0 (zero).

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 274 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

24.1. rx_bytes
rx_bytes
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=networkStats]
CLI Command l networkStats.rx_bytes
l rx_bytes
Web Interface RX Bytes
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Network Stats window (on page 392) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The networkStats.rx_bytes command reports the number of bytes received from
the radio network.

Note: This is a Read-only parameter.

24.2. rx_dropped
rx_dropped
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=networkStats]
CLI Command l networkStats.rx_dropped
l rx_dropped
Web Interface RX Dropped
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Network Stats window (on page 392) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The networkStats.rx_dropped command reports the number of Ethernet packets
received from the radio network that were dropped at the Ethernet interface.

Note: This is a Read-only parameter.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 275 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

24.3. rx_errors
rx_errors
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=networkStats]
CLI Command l networkStats.rx_errors
l rx_errors
Web Interface RX Errors
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Network Stats window (on page 392) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The networkStats.rx_errors command reports the number of Ethernet packets
received from the radio network that had Ethernet errors.

Note: This is a Read-only parameter.

24.4. rx_packets
rx_packets
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=networkStats]
CLI Command l networkStats.rx_packets
l rx_packets
Web Interface RX Packets
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Network Stats window (on page 392) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The networkStats.rx_packets command reports the number of Ethernet packets
received from the radio network.

Note: This is a Read-only parameter.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 276 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

24.5. tx_bytes
tx_bytes
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=networkStats]
CLI Command l networkStats.tx_bytes
l tx_bytes
Web Interface TX Bytes
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Network Stats window (on page 392) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The networkStats.tx_bytes command reports the number of bytes of Ethernet
packets received from the Ethernet port and sent over the radio network.

Note: This is a Read-only parameter.

24.6. tx_dropped
tx_dropped
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=networkStats]
CLI Command l networkStats.tx_dropped
l tx_dropped
Web Interface TX Dropped
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Network Stats window (on page 392) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 277 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

tx_dropped
Setting Description
Description The networkStats.tx_dropped command reports the number of Ethernet packets
received from the Ethernet port but dropped because the transmit queue is full.

Note: An increase of this counter may indicate that increasing the

txqueuelen (on page 270) parameter may improve overall network
performance.

Note: This is a Read-only parameter.

24.7. tx_errors
tx_errors
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=networkStats]
CLI Command l networkStats.tx_errors
l tx_errors
Web Interface TX Errors
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Network Stats window (on page 392) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The networkStats.tx_errors command reports the number of Ethernet packets
received from the Ethernet port that were in error.

Note: This is a Read-only parameter.

24.8. tx_packets
tx_packets
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=networkStats]
CLI Command l networkStats.tx_packets
l tx_packets

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 278 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

tx_packets
Setting Description
Web Interface TX Packets
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Network Stats window (on page 392) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The networkStats.tx_packets command reports the number of Ethernet packets
received from the Ethernet port and sent over the radio network.

Note: This is a Read-only parameter.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 279 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

25. NTP Parameters

Note: See the NTP window (on page 394).

l ntp_address (on page 281)

l ntpDate (on page 282)
l ntpReference (on page 283)
l ntpRestart (on page 284)

The parameter syntax is: page.parameter=value.

Parameters with unique names can be specified as parameter=value.

Example: Entering frequencyKey returns the current value of frequencyKey.

Entering frequencyKey= is an implied change to frequencyKey.
If a value is NOT included, it changes frequencyKey to 0 (zero).

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 280 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

25.1. ntp_address
ntp_address
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=ntp]
CLI Command l ntp.ntp_address1=nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
l ntp.ntp_address2=nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
l ntp.ntp_address3=nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
l ntp.ntp_address4=nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
l ntp.ntp_address5=nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

Note: Where nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is the IP address of the servers used for

synchronizing time.

Web Interface NTP Address 1

window NTP Address 2
NTP Address 3
NTP Address 4
NTP Address 5
1. In the NTP Address 2 to 5 text boxes, enter the IP address of the servers
used for synchronizing time.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: By default, the NTP Address 1 is time.nist.gov.

See the NTP window (on page 394) for parameter location.

Default Setting l ntp_address1: time.nist.gov

l ntp_address2-5: 0.0.0.0
Options N/A

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 281 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

ntp_address
Setting Description
Description The ntp.ntp_address1-5 parameter designates the IP address of the server used
for synchronizing time.
Notes
l This can be a server such as time.nist.gov, time1.google.com or it can be
the IP address of another radio in the network.
l A maximum of five NTP servers are allowed.
l The fields in the NTP Parameters (on page 280) parameters are not validated
by the system.
l Use 0.0.0.0 to skip a specific server.

Example: Enter ntp.ntp_address2=0.0.0.0 to skip a second server,

if it's available.

A common use is to have all of the Endpoints and Repeaters use the
IP address of the Gateway radio then the entire network will stay
synchronized to the Gateway time.

25.2. ntpDate
ntpDate
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=ntp]
CLI Command l ntp.ntpDate=now
l ntpDate=now
Web Interface NTP Date
window 1. In the NTP Date text box, enter Now to synchronize the local clock with the
time from the NTP servers specified in the ntp_address (on page 281)
settings.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the NTP window (on page 394) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options Now

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 282 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

ntpDate
Setting Description
Description The ntp.ntpDate parameter sets the local time from other NTP servers on the
network.
l The server with the best clock, as defined by the NTP protocol, is used.
l The fields in the NTP Parameters (on page 280) parameters are not validated
by the system.

25.3. ntpReference
ntpReference
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=ntp]
CLI Command l ntp.ntpReference=NETWORK_TIME_SERVER
l The reference is from other systems on the network.
l ntp.ntpReference=REFCLK_LOCALCLOCK
l The reference is generated by the local clock.
Web Interface NTP Reference
window 1. Click the NTP Reference list box arrow and select either NETWORK_
TIME_SERVER or REFCLK_LOCALCLOCK.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the NTP window (on page 394) for parameter location.

Default Setting NETWORK_TIME_SERVER

Options l NETWORK_TIME_SERVER
l REFCLK_LOCALCLOCK
Description The ntp.ntpReference parameter designates the time correction from either a
local clock or over the network clock reference for NTP.
l NTP is always running.
l NETWORK_TIME_SERVER: The clock designation is from a network clock.
l REFCLK_LOCALCLOCK: The clock designation is from the local clock.
l If no server address is set in ntp_address (on page 281), the reference is to the
REFCLK_LOCALCLOCK.
l If any ntp_address is valid then, at startup and whenever NTP restarts, the
system clock is set from the NTP servers over the network.
l The fields in the NTP Parameters (on page 280) parameters are not validated
by the system.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 283 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

25.4. ntpRestart
ntpRestart
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=ntp]
CLI Command l ntp.ntpRestart=now
l ntpRestart=now
Web Interface NTP Restart
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the NTP window (on page 394) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options Now
Description The ntp.ntpRestart parameter restarts the NTP system.
l If any ntp_address (on page 281) is valid, then the system clock is set from the
NTP servers over the network at the time the command is run.
l The fields in the NTP Parameters (on page 280) parameters are not validated
by the system.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 284 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

26. radioSettings Parameters

Note: See the Radio Settings window - Endpoint (on page 396).

l beaconBurstCount (on page 286) l radioFrequency (on page 297)

l beaconInterval (on page 287) l radioHoppingMode (on page 299)
l frequencyKey (on page 288) l radioMaxRepeaters (on page 302)
l frequencyMasks (on page 290) l radioMode (on page 304)
l lnaBypass (on page 294) l radioRepeaterSlot (on page 305)
l maxLinkDistanceinMiles (on page 295) l rfDataRate (on page 307)
l networkId (on page 296) l txPower (on page 309)
l nodeId (on page 296)

The parameter syntax is: page.parameter=value.

Parameters with unique names can be specified as parameter=value.

Example: Entering frequencyKey returns the current value of frequencyKey.

Entering frequencyKey= is an implied change to frequencyKey.
If a value is NOT included, it changes frequencyKey to 0 (zero).

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 285 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

26.1. beaconBurstCount
Important!: Only radioSettings that apply to the current radioMode, rfDataRate, and
radioHoppingMode, and are visible in the CLI and the Web Interface and can be changed.

beaconBurstCount
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=radioSettings]
CLI Command l radioSettings.beaconBurstCount=n
l beaconBurstCount=n

Note: Where n is any number between 1 and 7.

Web Interface Beacon Burst Count

window 1. In the Beacon Burst Count text box, enter the number of consecutive
beacons to send per beaconInterval time.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the Radio Settings window - Endpoint (on page 396) for
parameter location.

Default Setting 3
Options Any number between 1 and 7.
Description The radioSettings.beaconBurstCount setting designates the number of
consecutive beacons to send per beaconInterval time.
Notes
l The radioSettings.beaconBurstCount is set only on the Gateway device.
l The Endpoint radios obtain this value from a Gateway with the same
networkId via the beacon frame.
l This setting is only used when
radiosettings.radioHoppingMode=Hopping_On.
l Increasing the number of beacons may improve RF link reliability in noisy
environments.
l Decreasing the number of beacons may improve throughput in environments
where interference is minimal.

FREEWAVE Recommends: Set the beaconBurstCount (on page 286) to

2 or more for optimal throughput when Repeaters are used and the RF
environment is noisy.
This increases the number of beacons sent in a beacon interval.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 286 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

26.2. beaconInterval
Important!: Only radioSettings that apply to the current radioMode, rfDataRate, and
radioHoppingMode, and are visible in the CLI and the Web Interface and can be changed.

beaconInterval
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=radioSettings]
CLI Command l radioSettings.beaconInterval=TWENTY_FIVE_MS
l beaconInterval=TWENTY_FIVE_MS
l radioSettings.beaconInterval=FIFTY_MS
l beaconInterval=FIFTY_MS
l radioSettings.beaconInterval=ONE_HUNDRED_MS
l beaconInterval=ONE_HUNDRED_MS
l radioSettings.beaconInterval=TWO_HUNDRED_MS
l beaconInterval=TWO_HUNDRED_MS
l radioSettings.beaconInterval=FOUR_HUNDRED_MS
l beaconInterval=FOUR_HUNDRED_MS
Web Interface Beacon Interval
window 1. Click the Beacon Interval list box arrow and select how often a Gateway
radio sends out a beacon packet and changes to the next radio frequency in
the hopping pattern.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the Radio Settings window - Endpoint (on page 396) for
parameter location.

Default Setting ONE_HUNDRED_MS

Options l TWENTY_FIVE_MS
l FIFTY_MS
l ONE_HUNDRED_MS
l TWO_HUNDRED_MS
l FOUR_HUNDRED_MS

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 287 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

beaconInterval
Setting Description
Description The radioSettings.beaconInterval controls how often a Gateway radio sends out
a beacon packet and changes to the next radio frequency in the hopping pattern.
Notes
l The radioSettings.beaconInterval is set only on the Gateway device.
l The Endpoint radios obtain this value from a Gateway with the same
networkId via the beacon frame.
l This setting is only used when
radiosettings.radioHoppingMode=Hopping_On.
l A shorter Beacon Interval may improve the RF link reliability in noisy
environments.

A longer Beacon Interval may improve throughput in environments

where interference is minimal.

26.3. frequencyKey
Important!: Only radioSettings that apply to the current radioMode, rfDataRate, and
radioHoppingMode, and are visible in the CLI and the Web Interface and can be changed.

frequencyKey
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=radioSettings]
CLI Command l radioSettings.frequencyKey=Key0
l frequencyKey=Key0
l radioSettings.frequencyKey=Key1 to Key16
l frequencyKey=Key1 to Key16
Web Interface Frequency Key
window 1. Click the Frequency Key list box arrow and select the Key number used as
an index to select a hopping table.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the Radio Settings window - Endpoint (on page 396) for
parameter location.

Default Setting Key0 (zero)

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 288 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

frequencyKey
Setting Description
Options l Key0 (zero)
l Key1 to Key16
Valid frequencyKey Values

Data Rate of 115.2K

Frequency Key
Description
Values
Key0 to Key14 Select classic hop tables.
Key15 Select standard randomized hop table.
Key16 Select sequential hop table in reverse order of center
frequencies.

All Other Data Rates

Frequency Key
Description
Values
Key0 Select standard randomized hop table.
Key1 Select sequential hop table in reverse order of center
frequencies.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 289 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

frequencyKey
Setting Description
Description The radioSettings.frequencyKey setting designates the Key number used as an
index to select a hopping table.
Notes
l Use a unique Frequency Key setting to use different hop patterns for each
ZumLink network.
l This setting is only used when
radiosettings.radioHoppingMode=Hopping_On.
l The number of available frequency keys is based on the number of hopping
sequences in the hop table.
l An invalid frequency key setting is determined by being outside of the
specified range.
l If an invalid frequency key setting is found, the
radioSettings.frequencyKey is NOT changed.
l A frequency key setting is also invalid if the frequency key setting is larger
than the number of hopping tables configured for a specific rfDataRate.
l In this instance, the radioSettings.frequencyKey is set to Key0 (zero).

Important!: The Endpoint radios obtain this value from a Gateway with the
same networkId (on page 296) via the beacon frame.
After communications are established, any change of this value are picked
up by the Endpoints.

When using different hop patterns on each network, interference

caused by neighboring ZumLink networks can be minimized.

26.4. frequencyMasks
Important!: Only radioSettings that apply to the current radioMode, rfDataRate, and
radioHoppingMode, and are visible in the CLI and the Web Interface and can be changed.

frequencyMasks
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=radioSettings]

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 290 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

frequencyMasks
Setting Description
CLI Command l radioSettings.frequencyMasks=nnnn
l frequencyMasks=nnnn

Note: Where nnnn is the specified format of the frequency range to mask
shown in:
A. Single Channel Format,
B. Range of Channels Format, or
C. Combination of Channels Format.

Important!: Hop table frequency masking masks the channels that fall
within the range plus or minus one-half (½) the channel bandwidth.

Web Interface Frequency Masks

window 1. In the Frequency Masks text box, enter the exact specified format of the
frequency range to mask.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.
3. Wait a few seconds the for the radio to process the command.
4. Refresh the radio Web Interface and review the Frequency Masks text box
to verify the mask was accepted.
5. If the frequency mask setting is NOT what was requested, click the Radio
Settings Helpers menu. Figure 204

Figure 204: Radio Settings Helpers menu

6. In the Radio Settings Helpers window (on page 404), review the
frequencyMasksErrors (on page 312) to determine the error that exists in the
frequency mask string.

Note: See the Radio Settings window - Endpoint (on page 396) for
parameter location.

Default Setting Blank

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 291 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

frequencyMasks
Setting Description
Options
Caution: ONLY A comma MUST separate the values - NOT a
comma with a space.

Use this information in examples A to C:

l xxx is a value between 902-927 MHz.
l yyyy is a value between .0000-.9999 MHz.
A. Single Channel Format
l A single entry masks the specified frequency plus the bandwidth on each side
of the center frequency as a function of the rfDataRate.
l frequencyMasks=xxx.yyyy,xxx.yyyy,xxx.yyyy
B. Range of Channels Format

Important!: If a radio channel intersects with the mask limits, it will be

masked and not used.

l frequencyMasks=xxx.yyyy-xxx.yyyy,xxx.yyyy-xxx.yyyy
C. Combination of Channels Format
l frequencyMasks=xxx.yyyy-xxx.yyyy,xxx.yyyy

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 292 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

frequencyMasks
Setting Description
Description The radioSettings.frequencyMasks setting designates specific frequencies or a
set of frequencies in the hopping pattern to remove from usage.

Caution: radioSettings.frequencyMasks entries MUST BE less

than 128 bytes.

Notes
l This setting is only used when
radiosettings.radioHoppingMode=Hopping_On.
l All radios in the network MUST use the same value for this parameter.
l When Frequency Masks is enabled, interference fixed at certain frequencies
within the spectrum can be avoided by the transmitter.
l Least significant zeros are NOT required.
l .9, .09, .009 are valid entries as well as .9000, .0900, .0090.
l The radioSettings.frequencyMasks parameter needs to be re-entered when
moving between rfDataRate (on page 307).

Type frequencyMasks= and press <Enter> to clear all Frequency

Mask entries.

Important!: Special rules must be applied for the 115.2 and 250 kbps data
rates to enforce regulatory rules.

Notes for 115.2 and 250 kbps Rates for Regulatory Compliance
For 115.2 kbps:
l If the number of hopping channels contained in the hop table is > 50, txPower
(on page 309) can be set to values up to and including 30 dBm.
l radioSettings.txPower is NOT automatically changed.
l If the number of hopping channels contained in the hop table is < 50, all
masking is removed and all of the channels contained in the hop table are re-
enabled.
l radioSettings.txPower is NOT automatically changed.

For 250 kbps:

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 293 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

frequencyMasks
Setting Description
l If the number of hopping channels contained in the hop table is < 25, all
masking is removed and all of the channels contained in the hop table are re-
enabled.
l radioSettings.txPower is NOT automatically changed.

26.5. lnaBypass
Important!: Only radioSettings that apply to the current radioMode, rfDataRate, and
radioHoppingMode, and are visible in the CLI and the Web Interface and can be changed.

lnaBypass
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=radioSettings]
CLI Command l Enable LNA:
l radioSettings.lnaBypass=0
l lnaBypass=0
l Bypass LNA:
l radioSettings.lnaBypass=1
l lnaBypass=1
Web Interface LNA Bypass
window 1. In the LNA Bypass text box, enter 1 to bypass the Low Noise Amplifier
(LNA) and reduce the radio module receive signal by 10dB.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the Radio Settings window - Endpoint (on page 396) for
parameter location.

Default Setting 0 (zero)

Options l 0
l 1
Description When set to 1, the radioSettings.lnaBypass parameter bypasses the Low Noise
Amplifier (LNA) and reduces the radio module receive signal by 10dB.

It can be useful to bypass the LNA if there is a presence of strong

signals in band and packet reception is not good.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 294 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

26.6. maxLinkDistanceinMiles
Important!: Only radioSettings that apply to the current radioMode, rfDataRate, and
radioHoppingMode, and are visible in the CLI and the Web Interface and can be changed.

maxLinkDistanceinMiles
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=radioSettings]
CLI Command l radioSettings.maxLinkDistanceinMiles=nnn
l maxLinkDistanceinMiles=nnn

Note: Where nnn is the maximum one-way distance (in miles) between
any nodes in the network.

Web Interface Max Link Distance in Miles

window 1. In the Max Link Distance in Miles text box, enter the maximum one-way
distance (in miles) used to set the maximum expected propagation delay
between any Endpoints in the network.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the Radio Settings window - Endpoint (on page 396) for
parameter location.

Default Setting 20 miles

Options l The minimum value is miles.
l The maximum value is 120 miles.
Description The radioSettings.maxLinkDistanceinMiles parameter designates the
maximum one-way distance (in miles) used to set the maximum expected
propagation delay between any Endpoints in the network.
l If the parameter is set too small, then packets are retransmitted unnecessarily
and could significantly reduce throughput.
l If the parameter is set larger than the maximum propagation delay, it will take
longer than needed to retransmit lost packets.

FREEWAVE Recommends: Set a slightly larger number than needed.

All Endpoints in the network that communicate with each other should use
the same distance value.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 295 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

26.7. networkId
Important!: Only radioSettings that apply to the current radioMode, rfDataRate, and
radioHoppingMode, and are visible in the CLI and the Web Interface and can be changed.

networkId
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=radioSettings]
CLI Command l radioSettings.networkId=nnnn
l networkId=nnnn

Note: Where nnnn is the network identifier which subdivides traffic on

radio units.

Web Interface Network ID

window 1. In the Network ID text box, enter the network identifier that subdivides
traffic on radio units.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the Radio Settings window - Endpoint (on page 396) for
parameter location.

Default Setting 51966

Options l The minimum value is 2.
l The maximum value is 65535.
Description The radioSettings.networkId parameter designates the network identifier which
subdivides traffic on radio units.
Notes
l Radio units can only communicate with other units that have the same
radioSettings.networkId setting.

Important!: If radios are on the same frequency, they still receive data
from radios of a different networkId, but the data is dropped.

26.8. nodeId
Important!: Only radioSettings that apply to the current radioMode, rfDataRate, and
radioHoppingMode, and are visible in the CLI and the Web Interface and can be changed.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 296 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

nodeId
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=radioSettings]
CLI Command l radioSettings.nodeId=nnnn
l nodeId=nnnn

Note: Where nnnn is a user-designated nodeId instead of the auto-

generated nodeId.

Web Interface Node ID

window 1. In the Node ID text box, enter a user-designated nodeId instead of the
auto-generated nodeId.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the Radio Settings window - Endpoint (on page 396) for
parameter location.

Default Setting Predetermined by the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2, this is an auto-generated, unique number
from 2 through 65533.
Options N/A
Description The radioSettings.nodeId parameter designates the unique ID of the device.
Notes
l Each radio with the same networkId must have a UNIQUE nodeId.
l Otherwise, two or more nodes will unicast an acknowledgment that may
collide.
l The Gateway or Gateway-Repeater device ALWAYS has a nodeId of value
1. It cannot be changed.

26.9. radioFrequency
Important!: Only radioSettings that apply to the current radioMode, rfDataRate, and
radioHoppingMode, and are visible in the CLI and the Web Interface and can be changed.

radioFrequency
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=radioSettings]

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 297 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

radioFrequency
Setting Description
CLI Command l radioSettings.radioFrequency=nnn.nnnn
l radioFrequency=nnn.nnnn

Note: Where nnn.nnnn is the operating center frequency.

Web Interface Radio Frequency

window 1. In the Radio Frequency text box, enter the operating center frequency.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the Radio Settings window - Endpoint (on page 396) for
parameter location.

Default Setting 915.0000 for the Standard Hop Set - 900 MHz Channels (on page 431)
Options Valid Ranges
Data Rate MHz Range
4 Mbps 904.5504 - 925.7472
1.5 Mbps (Beta) 903.2562 - 925.8354
1 Mbps 903.0528 - 927.0144
500 kbps 902.7072 - 927.3600
250 kbps 902.5344 - 927.4176
115.2 kbps 902.4768 - 927.5904

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 298 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

radioFrequency
Setting Description
Description The radioSettings.radioFrequency parameter designates the operating center
frequency in MHz.
Notes
l All radios in the network MUST use the same value for this parameter.
l This setting is only used when
radiosettings.radioHoppingMode=Hopping_Off.
l The range of this parameter is dependent on the rfDataRate (on page 307)
setting.
l The frequency interval is 100 Hz.
l The minimum value increases and the maximum value decreases as the
radioSettings.rfDataRate increases.
l The increase in channel bandwidth affects these ranges.
l If the radioSettings.radioFrequency parameter is set too close to the band
edge for the current radioSettings.rfDataRate, the radio module rejects the
setting.
l A minimum of 3 hopping channels are supported when
radioSettings.rfDataRate =RATE_4M, RATE_1M, and RATE_500K.

FREEWAVE Recommends: Use a single

radioSettings.radioFrequency if
radiosettings.radioHoppingMode=Hopping_Off.

Important!: A few seconds are needed to apply the change; allow some
time prior to reading back this value.

Read back this value after setting it to determine if it was accepted

by the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

26.10. radioHoppingMode
Important!: Only radioSettings that apply to the current radioMode, rfDataRate, and
radioHoppingMode, and are visible in the CLI and the Web Interface and can be changed.

radioHoppingMode
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=radioSettings]

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 299 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

radioHoppingMode
Setting Description
CLI Command l Enable:
l radiosettings.radioHoppingMode=Hopping_On
l radioHoppingMode=Hopping_On
l Disable:
l radiosettings.radioHoppingMode=Hopping_Off
l radioHoppingMode=Hopping_Off
Web Interface Radio Hopping Mode
window 1. Click the Radio Hopping Mode list box arrow and select Off to disable
frequency hopping.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the Radio Settings window - Endpoint (on page 396) for
parameter location.

Default Setting Hopping_On

Options l Hopping_Off
l Hopping_On

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 300 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

radioHoppingMode
Setting Description
Description The radioSettings.radioHoppingMode parameter enables frequency hopping.
Notes
l All radios in the network MUST use the same value for this parameter.
l For rfDataRate values of 115.2 and 250 kbps, the
radioSettings.radioHoppingMode is forced On and CANNOT be set to
radiosettings.radioHoppingMode=Hopping_Off.
l For rfDataRate values of 500 kbps, 1 Mbps, and 4 Mbps, the choice of the
selected hopping mode is based on network frequency planning and channel
conditions.
l A Gateway is required when the
radiosettings.radioHoppingMode=Hopping_On.
l A Gateway is NOT required when the
radiosettings.radioHoppingMode=Hopping_Off.

Important!: Special rules must be applied for the 115.2 and 250 kbps data
rates to enforce regulatory rules.

For 250 kbps:

l If the number of hopping channels contained in the hop table is > 50, txPower
(on page 309) can be set to values up to and including 30 dBm.
l radioSettings.txPower is NOT automatically changed.
l If the number of hopping channels contained in the hop table is >= 25, but < 50,
radioSettings.txPower can be set to values up to and including 24 dBm.
l radioSettings.txPower is automatically reduced to 24 dBm.
l If the number of hopping channels contained in the hop table is < 25, all
masking is removed and all of the channels contained in the hop table are re-
enabled.
l radioSettings.txPower is NOT automatically changed.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 301 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

26.11. radioMaxRepeaters
Important!: Only radioSettings that apply to the current radioMode, rfDataRate, and
radioHoppingMode, and are visible in the CLI and the Web Interface and can be changed.

radioMaxRepeaters
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=radioSettings]
CLI Command l radioSettings.radioMaxRepeaters=n
l radioMaxRepeaters=n

Note: Where n is the number of Repeater slots in the network.

Web Interface Radio Max Repeaters

window 1. In the Radio Max Repeaters text box, enter the number of Repeater slots in
the network.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the Radio Settings window - Endpoint (on page 396) for
parameter location.

Default Setting 0 (zero)

Options l 0 (zero)
l 1
l 2
l 3

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 302 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

radioMaxRepeaters
Setting Description
Description The radioSettings.radioMaxRepeaters parameter designates the maximum
Repeater slots in the network when the
radiosettings.radioHoppingMode=Hopping_On.

Note: The Endpoint radios obtain this value from a Gateway with the same
networkId via the beacon frame.

l The radioSettings.radioMaxRepeaters is set on the network Gateway device

and the Gateway beacon carries this information.
l If radioSettings.radioMaxRepeaters=0:
l Set the value to 0 (zero) when there are no Endpoint-Repeaters or when
radiosettings.radioHoppingMode=Hopping_Off.
l If radioSettings.radioMaxRepeaters=n:
l If the network has one Repeater, set this to 1.
l If the network has two Repeaters, set this to 2.
l If the network has three or more Repeaters, set this to 3.
l Set the value to match the number of overlapping Repeaters, with a
maximum of 3.
l Set the value to the maximum number of repeater slots used in the
network when Endpoint-Repeaters are present in the network and when the
radiosettings.radioHoppingMode=Hopping_On.

Note: Setting this value too high adds unnecessary latency to the
network.

Communication Method
The Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 use Listen Before Talk (LBT) and Carrier Sense Multiple
Access (CSMA). There are no assigned slots. The radios transmit when the
channel is clear.
l The Gateway broadcasts packets to all Endpoints and Endpoint-Repeaters
within range.
l The Endpoints unicast packets back to the Gateway or downstream Endpoint-
Repeaters.
l The Gateway acknowledges the Endpoint or Endpoint-Repeater packets.
FreeWave’s traditional protocol has a Gateway Time Slot and an Endpoint Time
Slot within a frame.
l The Gateway transmits in its slot and listens in the Endpoint slot.
l The Endpoint transmits its slot and listens in the Gateway slot.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 303 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

26.12. radioMode
Important!: Only radioSettings that apply to the current radioMode, rfDataRate, and
radioHoppingMode, and are visible in the CLI and the Web Interface and can be changed.

radioMode
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=radioSettings]
CLI Command l radioSettings.radioMode=Gateway
l radioMode=Gateway
l radioSettings.radioMode=Endpoint
l radioMode=Endpoint
l radioSettings.radioMode=Gateway_Repeater
l radioMode=Gateway_Repeater
l radioSettings.radioMode=Endpoint_Repeater
l radioMode=Endpoint_Repeater
Web Interface Radio Mode
window 1. Click the Radio Mode list box arrow and select the device type to
designate the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 as.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the Radio Settings window - Endpoint (on page 396) for
parameter location.

Default Setting Endpoint

Options l Endpoint
l Endpoint-Repeater
l Gateway
l Gateway-Repeater

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 304 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

radioMode
Setting Description
Description The radioSettings.radioMode parameter designates the device type.
Notes
l Each network can have only ONE Gateway or Gateway-Repeater device.
l See Repeaters (on page 171) for additional information.
l The remaining devices MUST BE configured as Endpoints or Endpoint-
Repeaters.
l The Gateway or Gateway-Repeater device ALWAYS has a nodeId of value
1. It cannot be changed.
l The Endpoint or Endpoint-Repeater nodeId values are 2 through 65535.
l A Gateway is required when the
radiosettings.radioHoppingMode=Hopping_On.
l A Gateway is NOT required when the
radiosettings.radioHoppingMode=Hopping_Off.
l The Gateway-Repeater repeats packets.
l The Endpoint-Repeater has a unique nodeId and repeats packets and master
beacons.
l See Repeaters (on page 171) for additional information.

26.13. radioRepeaterSlot
Important!: Only radioSettings that apply to the current radioMode, rfDataRate, and
radioHoppingMode, and are visible in the CLI and the Web Interface and can be changed.

radioRepeaterSlot
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=radioSettings]
CLI Command l radioSettings.radioRepeaterSlot=n
l radioRepeaterSlot=n

Note: Where n is the Repeater slot.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 305 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

radioRepeaterSlot
Setting Description
Web Interface Radio Repeater Slot
window 1. In the Radio Repeater Slot text box, enter which repeater slot the
Endpoint-Repeater uses.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: The Radio Repeater Slot parameter is only visible when the Z9-P2
or Z9-PE2 is designated as an Endpoint-Repeater.
See the Radio Settings window - Endpoint (on page 396) for parameter
location.

Default Setting 1
Options l 1
l 2
l 3
Description The radioSettings.radioRepeaterSlot parameter designates which repeater slot,
up to the radioMaxRepeaters setting, the Endpoint-Repeater uses.

Important!: This setting is only available when

radioSettings.radioMode=Endpoint_Repeater.

Notes
l The radioSettings.radioRepeaterSlot is set on the Endpoint-Repeater
device when radiosettings.radioHoppingMode=Hopping_On.
l This setting does NOT apply when
radiosettings.radioHoppingMode=Hopping_Off.
l Repeater slots must be unique for Repeaters that are in communication range
so the beacons do not collide.
l Endpoint-Repeaters can share a slot number when they do not overlap and
form longer repeater chains.
l The number of entered Repeater slots cannot be larger than the numbered
entered in the radioMaxRepeaters (on page 302) setting.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 306 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

26.14. rfDataRate
Important!: Only radioSettings that apply to the current radioMode, rfDataRate, and
radioHoppingMode, and are visible in the CLI and the Web Interface and can be changed.

rfDataRate
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=radioSettings]
CLI Command l radioSettings.rfDataRate=RATE_4M
l rfDataRate=RATE_4M
l radioSettings.rfDataRate=RATE_1M
l rfDataRate=RATE_1M
l radioSettings.rfDataRate=RATE_1.5M_BETA_FEATURE
l radioSettings.rfDataRate=RATE_500K
l rfDataRate=RATE_1.5M_BETA_FEATURE
l radioSettings.rfDataRate=RATE_250K
l rfDataRate=RATE_250K
l radioSettings.rfDataRate=RATE_115.2K
l rfDataRate=RATE_115.2K
Web Interface RF Data Rate
window 1. Click the RF Data Rate list box arrow and select the RF link data rate in bits
per second.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the Radio Settings window - Endpoint (on page 396) for
parameter location.

Default Setting RATE_500K

Options l RATE_4M (4 Mbps mode)
l RATE_1M (1 Mbps mode)
l RATE_1.5M_BETA_FEATURE
l RATE_500K (500 kbps mode)
l RATE_250K (250 kbps mode)
l RATE_115.2K (115.2 kbps mode)

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 307 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

rfDataRate
Setting Description
Description The radioSettings.rfDataRate parameter designates the RF link data rate in bits
per second.
Notes
l All radios in the network MUST use the same value for this parameter.
l A higher RF link data rate provides more throughput but at the expense of link
distance or fade margin.
l When changing from lower data rates to higher ones
(e.g.,rfDataRate=RATE_115.2K to rfDataRate=RATE_1M), the
radioFrequency (on page 297) may be set back to the default if the frequency
would have been out of band.
l When selecting data rates of either rfDataRate=RATE_115.2K or
rfDataRate=RATE_250K, radioSettings.radioHoppingMode is
automatically forced to radiosettings.radioHoppingMode=Hopping_
On and cannot be turned off.
l For all other data rates, the radioSettings.radioHoppingMode remains at its
current setting.

Important!: Special rules must be applied for the 115.2 and 250 kbps data
rates to enforce regulatory rules.

For 250 kbps:

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 308 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

rfDataRate
Setting Description
l radioSettings.txPower is NOT automatically changed.

FREEWAVE Recommends: Use a single

radioSettings.radioFrequency if
radiosettings.radioHoppingMode=Hopping_Off.

Caution: The RATE_1.5M_BETA_FEATURE data rate is a Beta

feature NOT recommended for production deployment.

26.15. txPower
Important!: Only radioSettings that apply to the current radioMode, rfDataRate, and
radioHoppingMode, and are visible in the CLI and the Web Interface and can be changed.

txPower
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=radioSettings]
CLI Command l radioSettings.txPower=nn
l txPower=nn

Note: Where nn is the RF output transmit power.

Important!: Entering a decimal value changes the txpower to 0 (zero).

FREEWAVE Recommends: Use whole numbers only.

Web Interface TX Power

window 1. Click the Tx Power list box arrow and select the dB RF output transmit
power level for the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the Radio Settings window - Endpoint (on page 396) for
parameter location.

Default Setting l 30
Options l The minimum value is 10.
l The maximum value is 30.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 309 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

txPower
Setting Description
Description The radioSettings.txPower setting designates the dB RF output transmit power
for the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.
Notes
l Output power is limited to maximum of 30dBm or 1 Watt.
l Use a higher power to increase link margin.
l Use a lower transmit power to reduce interference when multiple radio links
are in close proximity.
l The maximum radioSettings.txPower can be limited if the
radiosettings.radioHoppingMode=Hopping_On.
l See frequencyMasks (on page 290) for additional details.

Entering txpower=0 or radiosettings.txpower=0 changes the

output power to the minimum or 10 dB.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 310 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

27. radioSettingsHelpers Parameters

Note: See the Radio Settings Helpers window (on page 404).

l frequencyMasksErrors (on page 312)

The parameter syntax is: page.parameter=value.

Parameters with unique names can be specified as parameter=value.

Example: Entering frequencyKey returns the current value of frequencyKey.

Entering frequencyKey= is an implied change to frequencyKey.
If a value is NOT included, it changes frequencyKey to 0 (zero).

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 311 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

27.1. frequencyMasksErrors
frequencyMasksErrors
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=radioSettingsHelpers]
CLI Command l radioSettingsHelpers.frequencyMasksErrors
l frequencyMasksErrors
Web Interface Frequency Masks Errors
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Radio Settings Helpers window (on page 404) for parameter
location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The radioSettingsHelpers.frequencyMasksErrors command reports the results
of any errors in the frequencyMasks (on page 290).

Note: This is a Read-only parameter.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 312 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

28. runtimeEnvironment Parameters

Note: See the Runtime Environment window (on page 406).

l rteInstalledByAppsVersion (on page 314)

l rteReset (on page 314)
l rteTemplateVersion (on page 315)
l rteVersion (on page 316)

The parameter syntax is: page.parameter=value.

Parameters with unique names can be specified as parameter=value.

Example: Entering frequencyKey returns the current value of frequencyKey.

Entering frequencyKey= is an implied change to frequencyKey.
If a value is NOT included, it changes frequencyKey to 0 (zero).

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 313 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

28.1. rteInstalledByAppsVersion
rteInstalledByAppsVersion
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=runtimeEnvironment]
CLI Command l runtimeEnvironment.rteInstalledByAppsVersion
l rteInstalledByAppsVersion
Web Interface Rte Installed by Apps Version
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Runtime Environment window (on page 406) for parameter
location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The runtimeEnvironment.rteInstalledByAppsVersion parameter reports the
version number of the firmware used to install the runtime developer environment.

Important!: The firmware that installed the runtime developer environment

may have a different version than the developer environment itself.

Note: This is a Read-only parameter.

28.2. rteReset
rteReset
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=runtimeEnvironment]
CLI Command l runtimeEnvironment.rteReset=Cancel
l rteReset=Cancel
l runtimeEnvironment.rteReset=Hard
l rteReset=Hard
l runtimeEnvironment.rteReset=Now
l rteReset=Now
Web Interface Rte Reset
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Runtime Environment window (on page 406) for parameter
location.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 314 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

rteReset
Setting Description
Default Setting N/A
Options l Cancel
l Hard
l Now
Description The runtimeEnvironment.rteReset parameter designates the update or reset of
the runtime application environment.
l runtimeEnvironment.rteReset=Cancel is used to REMOVE the
rteReset=Hard command BEFORE the next boot of the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.
l runtimeEnvironment.rteReset=Hard completely resets the file system
of the runtime application environment to match the latest installed developer
user package.
l This will stage the development runtimeEnvironment to be applied on the
next reboot.
l The runtime application environment reset takes place at the time of next
boot.

Warning! ALL User-generated content and settings in Z9-P2 or

Z9-PE2 ARE DELETED after the next reboot!

l runtimeEnvironment.rteReset=Now
l This reboots the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 and copies the Linux application
environment into the runtime location.
This will take several minutes to complete.
The larger the IQ Application Environment, the longer the time needed.

28.3. rteTemplateVersion
rteTemplateVersion
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=runtimeEnvironment]
CLI Command l runtimeEnvironment.rteTemplateVersion
l rteTemplateVersion
Web Interface Rte Template Version
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Runtime Environment window (on page 406) for parameter
location.

Default Setting N/A

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 315 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

rteTemplateVersion
Setting Description
Options N/A
Description The runtimeEnvironment.rteTemplateVersion parameter reports the version
number for the IQ environment template.
This is the IQ environment applied when executing the rteReset=hard
command.

Note: See rteReset (on page 314) for additional information.

Note: This is a Read-only parameter.

28.4. rteVersion
rteVersion
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=runtimeEnvironment]
CLI Command l runtimeEnvironment.rteVersion
l rteVersion
Web Interface Rte Version
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the Runtime Environment window (on page 406) for parameter
location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The runtimeEnvironment.rteVersion parameter reports the version number for
the active IQ environment

Note: If this setting is blank, the application environment has not been
initialized.

Note: This is a Read-only parameter.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 316 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

29. security Parameters

Note: See the Security window (on page 408).

l enableEthernetLogin (on page 318)

l enablePtpInterface (on page 318)

The parameter syntax is: page.parameter=value.

Parameters with unique names can be specified as parameter=value.

Example: Entering frequencyKey returns the current value of frequencyKey.

Entering frequencyKey= is an implied change to frequencyKey.
If a value is NOT included, it changes frequencyKey to 0 (zero).

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 317 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

29.1. enableEthernetLogin
enableEthernetLogin
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=security]
CLI Command l Enable:
l security.enableEthernetLogin=true
l enableEthernetLogin=true
l Disable:
l security.enableEthernetLogin=false
l enableEthernetLogin=false
Web Interface Enable Ethernet Login
window 1. Click the Enable Ethernet Login list box arrow and select False to disable
SSH logins.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: By default, the Enable Ethernet Login is enabled (set to True).

See the Security window (on page 408) for parameter location.

Default Setting True

Options l True
l False
Description The security.enableEthernetLogin parameter enables SSH logins.
l When Disabled, the device no longer responds to SSH connection requests.
l This parameter also disables any SSH-based services, such as SCP.

Important!: This parameter does NOT affect website logins.

This parameter requires a reboot to apply the changes, either by executing

the config.reset=now CLI command or power cycling the Z9-P2 or Z9-
PE2.
See reset (on page 214) for additional information.

29.2. enablePtpInterface
enablePtpInterface
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=security]

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 318 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

enablePtpInterface
Setting Description
CLI Command l Enable:
l security.enablePtpInterface=true
l enablePtpInterface=true
l Disable:
l security.enablePtpInterface=false
l enablePtpInterface=false
Web Interface Ethernet PTP Interface
window 1. Click the Ethernet PTP Interface list box arrow and select False to disable
the PTP (drag-and-drop) interface.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: By default, the Ethernet PTP Interface is enabled (set to True).

See the Security window (on page 408) for parameter location.

Default Setting True

Options l True
l False
Description The security.enablePtpInterface parameter enables the PTP (drag-and-drop)
interface.
When Disabled, the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 no longer appears in Windows® File
Explorer as _______<serialnumber> when connected to a computer using the
Micro-USB cable.

Note: Where _______ is the name of the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

Important!: The security.enablePtpInterface setting does NOT disable

serial connections through the Micro-USB cable.

This parameter requires a reboot to apply the changes, either by executing

the config.reset=now CLI command or power cycling the Z9-P2 or Z9-
PE2.
See reset (on page 214) for additional information.

LUM0107AA Rev Jul-2019 Page 319 of 476 Copyright © 2019 FreeWave

30. services Parameters

Note: See the Services window (on page 410).

l timeOutCli (on page 321)

The parameter syntax is: page.parameter=value.

Parameters with unique names can be specified as parameter=value.

Example: Entering frequencyKey returns the current value of frequencyKey.

Entering frequencyKey= is an implied change to frequencyKey.
If a value is NOT included, it changes frequencyKey to 0 (zero).

30.1. timeOutCli
timeOutCli
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=services]
CLI Command l services.timeOutCli=nnnn
l timeOutCli=nnnn

Note: Where nnnn is the number of seconds of idle time.

Web Interface Time Out CLI

window 1. In the Time Out CLI text box, enter the number of seconds of idle time
before the CLI connection is closed.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the Services window (on page 410) for parameter location.

Default Setting 900

Options
FREEWAVE Recommends: Enter any number between 60 and 3600.

Description The services.timeOutCli parameter designates the number of seconds of idle

time before the CLI connection is closed.

Warning! DO NOT enter 0 (zero). 0 disables the timeout.

31. SNMP Parameters

Note: See the SNMP window (on page 412).

l roCommunityName (on page 323)

l rwCommunityName (on page 323)
l snmpUser (on page 324)
l v1Enabled (on page 325)
l v2cEnabled (on page 326)
l v3Enabled (on page 327)

The parameter syntax is: page.parameter=value.

Parameters with unique names can be specified as parameter=value.

Example: Entering frequencyKey returns the current value of frequencyKey.

Entering frequencyKey= is an implied change to frequencyKey.
If a value is NOT included, it changes frequencyKey to 0 (zero).

31.1. roCommunityName
roCommunityName
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=SNMP]
CLI Command l snmp.roCommunityName=enter_unique_name_here
l roCommunityName=enter_unique_name_here

Note: Where enter_unique_name_here is a user-designated name.

Web Interface RO Community Name

window 1. In the RO Community Name text box, enter the user-designated name for
SNMP V1/V2C Read-only access.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the SNMP window (on page 412) for parameter location.

Default Setting public

Options Maximum of 31 characters.
Description The snmp.roCommunityName parameter designates the user-defined name for
SNMP V1/V2C read-only access.

Important!: Special characters are allowed EXCEPT # but they may not
be compatible with 3rd-party SNMP managers.

31.2. rwCommunityName
rwCommunityName
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=SNMP]
CLI Command l snmp.rwCommunityName=enter_unique_name_here
l rwCommunityName=enter_unique_name_here

Note: Where enter_unique_name_here is a user-designated name.

rwCommunityName
Setting Description
Web Interface RW Community Name
window 1. In the RW Community Name text box, enter the user-designated name for
SNMP V1/V2C Read-Write access.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the SNMP window (on page 412) for parameter location.

Default Setting private

Options Maximum of 31 characters.
Description The snmp.rwCommunityName parameter designates the user-defined name for
SNMP V1/V2C read-write access.

Important!: Special characters are allowed EXCEPT # but they may not
be compatible with 3rd-party SNMP managers.

31.3. snmpUser
snmpUser
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=SNMP]
CLI Command l Add User**:
l snmpUser=add <username>

Example: snmpUser=add <username> <ReadOnly or

ReadWrite> <MD5 or SHA> <Authentication Passphrase>
<AES or DES> <Encryption Passphrase>

l Modify User**:
l snmpUser=modify <username>

Example: snmpUser modify <username> <ReadOnly or

ReadWrite> <MD5 or SHA> <Authentication Passphrase>
<AES or DES> <Encryption Passphrase>

l Remove User:
l snmpUser remove <username>
l View All Users:
l snmpUser=show

snmpUser
Setting Description
Web Interface SNMP User
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the SNMP window (on page 412) for parameter location.

Default Setting Blank

Options l Add User
l Modify User
l Remove User
l View All Users

Note: **Add or Modify access authorization options are:

l <AES> <Encryption Passphrase>

l <DES> <Encryption Passphrase>
l <MD5> <Authentication Passphrase>
l <ReadOnly>
l <ReadWrite>
l <SHA> <Authentication Passphrase>
Description The snmp.snmpUser parameter manages the SNMP V3 users.

Example: snmpUser=add <username> <AES> <Encryption

Passphrase>.
snmpUser=modify <username> <ReadWrite>

Important!: The Passphrase requires a minimum of 8 characters.

31.4. v1Enabled
v1Enabled
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=SNMP]

v1Enabled
Setting Description
CLI Command l Enable SNMP V1:
l snmp.v1Enabled=true
l v1Enabled=true
l Disable SNMP V1:
l snmp.v1Enabled=false
l v1Enabled=false
Web Interface V1 Enabled
window 1. Click the V1 Enabled list box arrow and select True to enable SNMP
V1.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the SNMP window (on page 412) for parameter location.

Default Setting False

Options False
Description The snmp.v1Enabled parameter enables SNMP V1.

Important!: For security, the protocol SNMP v1 is read-only.

31.5. v2cEnabled
v2cEnabled
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=SNMP]
CLI Command l Enable SNMP V2C:
l snmp.v2cEnabled=true
l v2cEnabled=true
l Disable SNMP V2C:
l snmp.v2cEnabled=false
l v2cEnabled=false
Web Interface V2C Enabled
window 1. Click the V2C Enabled list box arrow and select True to enable SNMP
V2C.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: By default, the v2c Enabled is NOT enabled (set to False).

See the SNMP window (on page 412) for parameter location.

v2cEnabled
Setting Description
Default Setting False
Options l True
l False
Description The snmp.v2cEnabled parameter enables SNMP V2C.

31.6. v3Enabled
v3Enabled
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=SNMP]
CLI Command l Enable SNMP V3:
l snmp.v3Enabled=true
l v3Enabled=true
l Disable SNMP V3:
l snmp.v3Enabled=false
l v3Enabled=false
Web Interface V3 Enabled
window 1. Click the V3 Enabled list box arrow and select True to enable SNMP
V3.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: By default, the v3 Enabled is NOT enabled (set to False).

See the SNMP window (on page 412) for parameter location.

Default Setting False

Options l True
l False
Description The snmp.v3Enabled parameter enables SNMP V3.

32. system Parameters

Important!: The [Page=system] parameters are only available in the CLI window.
See the Access the CLI and Change the IP Address and nodeId (on page 35) procedure for CLI
access.

Note: See the System Info window (on page 414).

l dump (on page 329) l logout (on page 332)

l dumpFormat (on page 329) l pages (on page 333)
l dumpPage (on page 330) l password (on page 333)
l dumpTag (on page 331) l passwordRestoreDefaults (on page 334)
l filter (on page 331) l showLayout (on page 334)
l help (on page 331) l tags (on page 335)
l login (on page 332) l whoami (on page 335)

The parameter syntax is: page.parameter=value.

Parameters with unique names can be specified as parameter=value.

Example: Entering frequencyKey returns the current value of frequencyKey.

Entering frequencyKey= is an implied change to frequencyKey.
If a value is NOT included, it changes frequencyKey to 0 (zero).

32.1. dump
dump
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=system]
CLI Command l system.dump
l dump
Web Interface
Important!: The [Page=system] parameters are only available in the CLI
window
window.
See the Access the CLI and Change the IP Address and nodeId (on page
35) procedure for CLI access.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The system.dump command reports all of the device configuration and status
values using the format specified in dumpFormat (on page 329).

Note: This is a Read-only parameter.

32.2. dumpFormat
dumpFormat
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=system]
CLI Command l system.dumpFormat=Full
l dumpFormat=Full
l system.dumpFormat=Json
l dumpFormat=Json
l system.dumpFormat=Result
l dumpFormat=Result
l system.dumpFormat=Short
l dumpFormat=Short
l system.dumpFormat=Verbose
l dumpFormat=Verbose

dumpFormat
Setting Description
Web Interface
Important!: The [Page=system] parameters are only available in the CLI
window
window.
See the Access the CLI and Change the IP Address and nodeId (on page
35) procedure for CLI access.

Default Setting Short

Options N/A
Description The system.dumpFormat parameter designates the format of the output of
commands and setting changes.
l dumpFormat Full: Shows each setting with its fully-qualified name and value
(page.setting=value).
l dumpFormat Json Shows the output results in JavaScript Object Notation
(Json).
l dumpFormat Result This setting is identical to dumpFormat Full.
l dumpFormat Short Shows the page name in a header row, then each setting
indented with its value.
l dumpFormat Verbose This setting shows:
l The fully-quailifed name and value (the same as the dumpFormat Full).
l The header row (the same as the dumpFormat Short).

Example: Enter dumpPage=SNMP to show the SNMP settings.

32.3. dumpPage
dumpPage
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=system]
CLI Command l system.dumpPage=enter_page_name_here
l dumpPage=enter_page_name_here

Note: Where enter_page_name_here is a CLI page.

Web Interface
Important!: The [Page=system] parameters are only available in the CLI
window
window.
See the Access the CLI and Change the IP Address and nodeId (on page
35) procedure for CLI access.

Default Setting N/A

dumpPage
Setting Description
Options N/A
Description The system.dumpPage command reports all device configuration and status
values for the specified page, using the format specified in dumpFormat (on page
329).

Example: Enter dumpPage=SNMP to show the SNMP settings.

Note: This is a Read-only parameter.

32.4. dumpTag
Important!: FreeWave internal use only.

32.5. filter
Important!: FreeWave internal use only.

32.6. help
help
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=system]
CLI Command l system.help
l help
l help <parameter>
l to see help for a specific parameter
Web Interface
Important!: The [Page=system] parameters are only available in the CLI
window
window.
See the Access the CLI and Change the IP Address and nodeId (on page
35) procedure for CLI access.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A

help
Setting Description
Description The system.help command lists the help.txt file.

Important!: Help information is only available for active parameters.

Example: If the ZumLink is designated as a gateway, the Help

information for radioSettings.nodeId is not provided since the nodeId
parameter cannot be changed.

32.7. login
password
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=system]
CLI Command system.login=[username],[password]
Web Interface
Important!: The [Page=system] parameters are only available in the CLI
window
window.
See the Access the CLI and Change the IP Address and nodeId (on page
35) procedure for CLI access.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The system.login command logs the user into the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

32.8. logout
logout
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=system]
CLI Command l system.logout
l logout
Web Interface
Important!: The [Page=system] parameters are only available in the CLI
window
window.
See the Access the CLI and Change the IP Address and nodeId (on page
35) procedure for CLI access.

Default Setting N/A

logout
Setting Description
Options N/A
Description The logout command logs out of the CLI session.

32.9. pages
pages
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=system]
CLI Command l system.pages
l pages
Web Interface
Important!: The [Page=system] parameters are only available in the CLI
window
window.
See the Access the CLI and Change the IP Address and nodeId (on page
35) procedure for CLI access.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The system.pages command lists all of the pages of settings and commands in
the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

32.10. password
password
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=system]
CLI Command system.password=[oldpassword],[newpassword],[newpassword]
Web Interface
Important!: The [Page=system] parameters are only available in the CLI
window
window.
See the Access the CLI and Change the IP Address and nodeId (on page
35) procedure for CLI access.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A

password
Setting Description
Description The system.password parameter designates the password.

Important!: Must be logged in to the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

Example: system.password=admin,12345,12345.

Note: An error message appears when there is an error in typing the new
password command.

32.11. passwordRestoreDefaults
passwordRestoreDefaults
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=system]
CLI Command l system.passwordRestoreDefaults
l passwordRestoreDefaults
Web Interface
Important!: The [Page=system] parameters are only available in the CLI
window
window.
See the Access the CLI and Change the IP Address and nodeId (on page
35) procedure for CLI access.

Default Setting N/A

Options Now
Description The system.passwordRestoreDefaults command resets both the admin and
devuser account passwords to factory defaults.
l After executing this command, the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 must be rebooted by
either:
l executing the reset now command (see reset (on page 214)) or
l power-cycling the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

32.12. showLayout
Important!: FreeWave internal use only.

32.13. tags
Important!: FreeWave internal use only.

32.14. whoami
whoami
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=system]
CLI Command l system.whoami
l whoami
Web Interface
Important!: The [Page=system] parameters are only available in the CLI
window
window.
See the Access the CLI and Change the IP Address and nodeId (on page
35) procedure for CLI access.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The system.whoami command reports the user currently logged in.

Note: This is a Read-only parameter.

33. systemInfo Parameters

Note: See the System Info window (on page 414).

l deviceConfiguration (on page 337) l radioFirmwareVersion (on page 341)

l deviceFirmwareVersion (on page 337) l radioModel (on page 342)
l deviceId (on page 338) l radioModelCode (on page 342)
l deviceModel (on page 338) l radioSerialNumber (on page 343)
l deviceName (on page 339) l resetInfo (on page 343)
l hopTableVersion (on page 339) l rteTemplateVersion (on page 344)
l layoutHash (on page 340) l rteVersion (on page 344)
l licenses (on page 340) l serialNumber (on page 345)
l modelCode (on page 341) l themeVersion (on page 345)

The parameter syntax is: page.parameter=value.

Parameters with unique names can be specified as parameter=value.

Example: Entering frequencyKey returns the current value of frequencyKey.

Entering frequencyKey= is an implied change to frequencyKey.
If a value is NOT included, it changes frequencyKey to 0 (zero).

33.1. deviceConfiguration
deviceConfiguration
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=systemInfo]
CLI Command l systemInfo.deviceConfiguration
l deviceConfiguration
Web Interface Device Configuration
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the System Info window (on page 414) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The systemInfo.deviceConfiguration command reports the device
configuration of the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

Note: This is a Read-only parameter.

33.2. deviceFirmwareVersion
deviceFirmwareVersion
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=systemInfo]
CLI Command l systemInfo.deviceFirmwareVersion
l deviceFirmwareVersion
Web Interface Device Firmware Version
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the System Info window (on page 414) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The systemInfo.deviceFirmwareVersion command reports the device firmware
version of the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

Note: For the IQ Application Environment, see Verify Activation.

Note: This is a Read-only parameter.

33.3. deviceId
deviceId
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=systemInfo]
CLI Command l systemInfo.deviceId=nnnn
l deviceId

Note: Where nnnn is a user-designated device ID.

Web Interface Device ID

window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the System Info window (on page 414) for parameter location.

Default Setting 1
Options N/A
Description l The systemInfo.deviceId parameter designates the Device Identifier
selected for the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.
l The systemInfo.deviceId=nnnn parameter designates the device ID.
l Where nnnn is a user-designated device ID.

33.4. deviceModel
deviceModel
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=systemInfo]
CLI Command l systemInfo.deviceModel
l deviceModel
Web Interface window Device Model

Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.

See the System Info window (on page 414) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The systemInfo.deviceModel command reports the device model.

Note: This is a Read-only parameter.

33.5. deviceName
deviceName
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=systemInfo]
CLI Command l systemInfo.deviceName=nnnn
l deviceName

Note: Where nnnn is the user-defined name for the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

Web Interface Device Name

window 1. In the Device Name text box, enter the user-defined name for the Z9-P2 or
Z9-PE2.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.

Note: See the System Info window (on page 414) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The systemInfo.deviceName parameter designates the user-defined name for
the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

33.6. hopTableVersion
hopTableVersion
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=systemInfo]
CLI Command l systemInfo.hopTableVersion
l hopTableVersion
Web Interface Hop Table Version
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the System Info window (on page 414) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The systemInfo.hopTableVersion command reports the radio Hop Table
Version of the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

Note: This is a Read-only parameter.

33.7. layoutHash
layoutHash
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=systemInfo]
CLI Command l systemInfo.layoutHash
l layoutHash
Web Interface Layout Hash
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the System Info window (on page 414) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The systemInfo.layoutHash command reports the Unique Layout Identifier.

Note: This is a Read-only parameter.

33.8. licenses
licenses
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=systemInfo]
CLI Command l systemInfo.licenses
l licenses
Web Interface Licenses
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the System Info window (on page 414) for parameter location.

Default Setting None

Options N/A
Description The systemInfo.licenses command reports all of the license information.

Note: For the IQ Application Environment, see Verify Activation.

Note: This is a Read-only parameter.

33.9. modelCode
modelCode
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=systemInfo]
CLI Command l systemInfo.modelCode
l modelCode
Web Interface Model Code
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the System Info window (on page 414) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The systemInfo.modelCode command reports the model code of the Z9-P2 or
Z9-PE2.

Note: This is a Read-only parameter.

33.10. radioFirmwareVersion
radioFirmwareVersion
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=systemInfo]
CLI Command l systemInfo.radioFirmwareVersion
l radioFirmwareVersion
Web Interface Radio Firmware Version
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the System Info window (on page 414) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The systemInfo.radioFirmwareVersion command reports the radio firmware
version of the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

Note: This is a Read-only parameter.

33.11. radioModel
radioModel
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=systemInfo]
CLI Command l systemInfo.radioModel
l radioModel
Web Interface Radio Model
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the System Info window (on page 414) for parameter location.

Default Setting AMT0100AA

Options N/A
Description The systemInfo.radioModel command reports the radio model of the Z9-P2 or
Z9-PE2.

Note: This is a Read-only parameter.

33.12. radioModelCode
radioModelCode
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=systemInfo]
CLI Command l systemInfo.radioModelCode
l radioModelCode
Web Interface Radio Model Code
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the System Info window (on page 414) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The systemInfo.radioModelCode command reports the radio model code of the
Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

Note: This is a Read-only parameter.

33.13. radioSerialNumber
radioSerialNumber
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=systemInfo]
CLI Command l systemInfo.radioSerialNumber
l radioSerialNumber
Web Interface Radio Serial Number
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the System Info window (on page 414) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The systemInfo.radioSerialNumber command reports the radio serial number of
the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

Note: This is a Read-only parameter.

33.14. resetInfo
resetInfo
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=systemInfo]
CLI Command l systemInfo.resetInfo
l resetInfo
Web Interface Reset Info
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the System Info window (on page 414) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The systemInfo.resetInfo parameter commands the radio to reset the
information.

33.15. rteTemplateVersion
rteTemplateVersion
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=systemInfo]
CLI Command l systeminfo.rteTemplateVersion
l rteTemplateVersion
Web Interface N/A
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the System Info window (on page 414) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The systeminfo.rteTemplateVersion command reports the version number for
the IQ environment template.
This is the IQ environment applied when executing the rteReset=hard
command.
Notes
l See rteReset (on page 314) for additional information.
l For the IQ Application Environment, see Verify Activation.
l This is a Read-only parameter.

33.16. rteVersion
rteVersion
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=systemInfo]
CLI Command l systeminfo.rteVersion
l rteVersion
Web Interface N/A
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the System Info window (on page 414) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A

rteVersion
Setting Description
Description The systeminfo.rteVersion command reports the version number for the active
IQ environment.

Note: If this setting is blank, the application environment has not been
initialized. For the IQ Application Environment, see Verify Activation.

Note: This is a Read-only parameter.

33.17. serialNumber
serialNumber
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=systemInfo]
CLI Command l systemInfo.serialNumber
l serialNumber
Web Interface Serial Number
window
Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.
See the System Info window (on page 414) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description The systemInfo.serialNumber command reports the serial number of the Z9-P2
or Z9-PE2.

Note: This is a Read-only parameter.

33.18. themeVersion
themeVersion
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=systemInfo]
CLI Command l systemInfo.themeVersion
l themeVersion

themeVersion
Setting Description
Web Interface window Theme Version

Note: This parameter is read-only in the Web Interface.

See the System Info window (on page 414) for parameter location.

Default Setting N/A

Options N/A
Description
Note: FreeWave internal use only.
This is a Read-only parameter.

34. TerminalServerRelay Parameters

Note: See the Terminal Server Relay window (on page 416).

l remote_termserv_ip_address (on page 348)

l termserv_relay_mapping (on page 348)

The parameter syntax is: page.parameter=value.

Parameters with unique names can be specified as parameter=value.

Example: Entering frequencyKey returns the current value of frequencyKey.

Entering frequencyKey= is an implied change to frequencyKey.
If a value is NOT included, it changes frequencyKey to 0 (zero).

34.1. remote_termserv_ip_address
remote_termserv_ip_address
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=TerminalServerRelay]
CLI Command l TerminalServerRelay.remote_termserv_ip_
address=nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
l remote_termserv_ip_address=nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

Note: Where nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is the IP address for the remote

terminal server.

Web Interface Remote Termserv IP Address

window 1. In the Remote Termserv IP Address text box, enter the IP address for the
remote terminal server.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.
3. Restart the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 for the changes to be implemented.

Note: See the Terminal Server Relay window (on page 416) for parameter
location.

Default Setting 0.0.0.0

Options N/A
Description l The TerminalServerRelay.remote_termserv_ip_address= parameter
designates the IP address of the remote terminal server.
l The TerminalServerRelay.remote_termserv_ip_
address=nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn changes the IP address of the remote
terminal server.

34.2. termserv_relay_mapping
termserv_relay_mapping
Setting Description
CLI / Web Page [Page=TerminalServerRelay]

termserv_relay_mapping
Setting Description
CLI Command l TerminalServerRelay.termserv_relay_mapping=TERMSERV_
RELAY_DISABLED
l termserv_relay_mapping=TERMSERV_RELAY_DISABLED
l TerminalServerRelay.termserv_relay_mapping=LOCAL_BOTH_
COM_TO_REMOTE_BOTH_COM
l termserv_relay_mapping=LOCAL_BOTH_COM_TO_REMOTE_BOTH_
COM
l TerminalServerRelay.termserv_relay_mapping=LOCAL_COM1_
TO_REMOTE_COM1
l termserv_relay_mapping=LOCAL_COM1_TO_REMOTE_COM1
l TerminalServerRelay.termserv_relay_mapping=LOCAL_COM2_
TO_REMOTE_COM2
l termserv_relay_mapping=LOCAL_COM2_TO_REMOTE_COM2
l TerminalServerRelay.termserv_relay_mapping=LOCAL_BOTH_
COM_TO_REMOTE_COM1
l termserv_relay_mapping=LOCAL_BOTH_COM_TO_REMOTE_COM1
l TerminalServerRelay.termserv_relay_mapping=LOCAL_BOTH_
COM_TO_REMOTE_COM2
l termserv_relay_mapping=LOCAL_BOTH_COM_TO_REMOTE_COM2
l TerminalServerRelay.termserv_relay_mapping=LOCAL_COM1_
TO_REMOTE_BOTH_COM
l termserv_relay_mapping=LOCAL_COM1_TO_REMOTE_BOTH_COM
l TerminalServerRelay.termserv_relay_mapping=LOCAL_COM2_
TO_REMOTE_BOTH_COM
l termserv_relay_mapping=LOCAL_COM2_TO_REMOTE_BOTH_COM
Web Interface Termserv Relay Mapping
window 1. Click the Termserv Relay Mapping list box arrow and select a setting used
for the transfer of a bi-directional byte stream between two serial device
servers.
2. Click the Update button to save the change.
3. Restart the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 for the changes to be implemented.

Note: See the Terminal Server Relay window (on page 416) for parameter
location.

Default Setting TERMSERV_RELAY_DISABLED

termserv_relay_mapping
Setting Description
Options l TERMSERV_RELAY_DISABLED
l Data forwarding between local and remote COM ports is disabled.
l LOCAL_BOTH_COM_TO_REMOTE_BOTH_COM (on page 355).
l Data is forwarded between the local COM1 and remote COM1 ports.
l Data is forwarded between the local COM2 and remote COM2 ports.
l LOCAL_COM1_TO_REMOTE_COM1 (on page 356).
l Data is forwarded between the local COM1 and remote COM1 ports.
l LOCAL_COM2_TO_REMOTE_COM2 (on page 357).
l Data is forwarded between the local COM2 and remote COM2 ports.
l LOCAL_BOTH_COM_TO_REMOTE_COM1 (on page 358).
l Data is forwarded between the local COM1 and remote COM1 ports.
l Data is forwarded between the local COM2 and remote COM1 ports.
l LOCAL_BOTH_COM_TO_REMOTE_COM2 (on page 359).
l Data is forwarded between the local COM1 and remote COM2 ports.
l Data is forwarded between the local COM2 and remote COM2 ports.
l LOCAL_COM1_TO_REMOTE_BOTH_COM (on page 360).
l Data is forwarded between the local COM1 and remote COM1 ports.
l Data is forwarded between the local COM1 and remote COM2 ports.
l LOCAL_COM2_TO_REMOTE_BOTH_COM (on page 361).
l Data is forwarded between the local COM2 and remote COM1 ports.
l Data is forwarded between the local COM2 and remote COM2 ports.

termserv_relay_mapping
Setting Description
Description The TerminalServerRelay.termserv_relay_mapping parameter is used to
transfer a bi-directional byte stream between two serial device servers.
Notes
l The data relay is only supported between the terminal server on this Z9-P2 or
Z9-PE2 radio and the terminal server on a separate Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 radio in
the same IP network.
See Terminal Server Relay Examples (on page 352).
l For the relay function to operate, COM1 must be assigned to port 5041 and and
COM2 must be assigned to port 5042 on both the local and remote terminal
servers.
l The TerminalServerRelay.termserv_relay_mapping should only be enabled
on one side of the connection.
l When the termserv_relay_mapping (on page 348) parameter is designated and
the flowControl (on page 203) parameter is set to Hardware, the COM port's
flow control does not function.

Important!: If using TerminalServerRelay Parameters (on page 347),the

TCP port numbers designated in the TerminalServerPort (on page 209)
MUST BE be consistent across all involved radios.

FREEWAVE Recommends: If using the TerminalServerPort parameter,

keep the TCP port numbers as their defaults.

35. Terminal Server Relay Examples

l Connected Terminal Servers and Terminal Server Relay (on page 353)
l LOCAL_BOTH_COM_TO_REMOTE_BOTH_COM (on page 355)
l LOCAL_COM1_TO_REMOTE_COM1 (on page 356)
l LOCAL_COM2_TO_REMOTE_COM2 (on page 357)
l LOCAL_BOTH_COM_TO_REMOTE_COM1 (on page 358)
l LOCAL_BOTH_COM_TO_REMOTE_COM2 (on page 359)
l LOCAL_COM1_TO_REMOTE_BOTH_COM (on page 360)
l LOCAL_COM2_TO_REMOTE_BOTH_COM (on page 361)
l Example: Multicast (on page 362)

35.1. Connected Terminal Servers and Terminal Server Relay

Figure 205 shows the Terminal Servers and the Terminal Server Relay (client) connected
together through the Bridge.

Note: Figure 205 shows the ZumLink Z9-PE connections. They are the same for the Z9-P2 or Z9-
PE2.

l The Bridge connects the Ethernet interface with the radio interface.
l The Terminal Servers are connected to the COM ports.
l From any network interface you can get to the Terminal Servers.
The Terminal Server Relay is designed to connect the local Terminal Servers (hence the COM
ports) to any remote Terminal Server.
l This connection could be over the Ethernet or radio interface.
l It does not matter since it is a TCP connection.
l Each terminal server can have 20 concurrent TCP connections.
l Expects COM1 to be on port 5041 for both local and remote units.
l Expects COM2 to be on port 5042 for both local and remote units.

Figure 205: Terminal Servers and Terminal Server Relay (Client) Connected
Together through the Bridge

35.2. LOCAL_BOTH_COM_TO_REMOTE_BOTH_COM
Figure 206 illustrates the Terminal Server Relay command:
LOCAL_BOTH_COM_TO_REMOTE_BOTH_COM.
l Data is forwarded between the local COM1 and remote COM1 ports.
l Data is forwarded between the local COM2 and remote COM2 ports.

Figure 206: Terminal Server Relay command:

LOCAL_BOTH_COM_TO_REMOTE_BOTH_COM

35.3. LOCAL_COM1_TO_REMOTE_COM1
Figure 207 illustrates the Terminal Server Relay command:
LOCAL_COM1_TO_REMOTE_COM1.
l Data is forwarded between the local COM1 and remote COM1 ports.

Figure 207: Terminal Server Relay command:

LOCAL_COM1_TO_REMOTE_COM1

35.4. LOCAL_COM2_TO_REMOTE_COM2
Figure 208 illustrates the Terminal Server Relay command:
LOCAL_COM2_TO_REMOTE_COM2.
l Data is forwarded between the local COM2 and remote COM2 ports.

Figure 208: Terminal Server Relay command:

LOCAL_COM2_TO_REMOTE_COM2

35.5. LOCAL_BOTH_COM_TO_REMOTE_COM1
Figure 209 illustrates the Terminal Server Relay command:
LOCAL_BOTH_COM_TO_REMOTE_COM1.
l Data is forwarded between the local COM1 and remote COM1 ports.
l Data is forwarded between the local COM2 and remote COM1 ports.

Figure 209: Terminal Server Relay command:

LOCAL_BOTH_COM_TO_REMOTE_COM1

35.6. LOCAL_BOTH_COM_TO_REMOTE_COM2
Figure 210 illustrates the Terminal Server Relay command:
LOCAL_BOTH_COM_TO_REMOTE_COM2.
l Data is forwarded between the local COM1 and remote COM2 ports.
l Data is forwarded between the local COM2 and remote COM2 ports.

Figure 210: Terminal Server Relay command:

LOCAL_BOTH_COM_TO_REMOTE_COM2

35.7. LOCAL_COM1_TO_REMOTE_BOTH_COM
Figure 211 illustrates the Terminal Server Relay command:
LOCAL_COM1_TO_REMOTE_BOTH_COM.
l Data is forwarded between the local COM1 and remote COM1 ports.
l Data is forwarded between the local COM1 and remote COM2 ports.

Figure 211: Terminal Server Relay command:

LOCAL_COM1_TO_REMOTE_BOTH_COM

35.8. LOCAL_COM2_TO_REMOTE_BOTH_COM
Figure 212 illustrates the Terminal Server Relay command:
LOCAL_COM2_TO_REMOTE_BOTH_COM.
l Data is forwarded between the local COM2 and remote COM1 ports.
l Data is forwarded between the local COM2 and remote COM2 ports.

Figure 212: Terminal Server Relay command:

LOCAL_COM2_TO_REMOTE_BOTH_COM

35.9. Example: Multicast

Figure 213: Example: Multicast

36. Web Interface

The available windows are:

l COM window (on page 364) l Network Diagnostics window (on page 387)
l Config window (on page 366) l Network Stats window (on page 392)
l Data Path window (on page 368) l NTP window (on page 394)
l Date window (on page 370) l Radio Settings window - Endpoint (on page 396)
l Encryption window (on page 372) l Radio Settings Helpers window (on page 404)
l File Upload window (on page 374) l Runtime Environment window (on page 406)
l Help window (on page 376) l Security window (on page 408)
l Home window (on page 378) l Services window (on page 410)
l ioExCom window (on page 379) l SNMP window (on page 412)
l Local Diagnostics window (on page l System Info window (on page 414)
381) l Terminal Server Relay window (on page 416)
l Modbus window (on page 383) l User Data - Drag and Drop window (on page 418)
l Network window (on page 385)

36.1. COM window

The COM windows are used to read and change information about the communication settings of
the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

Note: See the COM Parameters (on page 198) for detailed information about the parameters.

Access and Window Description

4. On the Menu list, click the Configuration link. Figure 214

Figure 214: Configuration link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

5. Click either the COM1 or COM2 tab to access their respective COM parameters. Figure
215 or Figure 216

Note: The parameters for COM1 and COM2 are the same except for the TerminalServerPort
(on page 209) parameter setting.
See the COM Parameters (on page 198) for detailed information about the parameters.

Figure 215: COM1 window

Figure 216: COM2 window

6. Optional: On the Menu list, click the Configuration link to Change the COM Parameters
(on page 91).

36.2. Config window

The Config window is used to reset the radio, restore factory defaults, view IQ license status.

Note: See the config Parameters (on page 212) for detailed information about the parameters.

Access and Window Description

4. On the Menu list, click the System Info link. Figure 217

Figure 217: System Info link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

6. Click the Config tab to access the Config parameters. Figure 218

Important!: The information in this window is read-only.

The parameters in this window can only be changed in the CLI.
See the Access the CLI and Change the IP Address and nodeId (on page 35) procedure for
CLI access.
See the config Parameters (on page 212) for detailed information about the parameters.

Figure 218: Config window

36.3. Data Path window

The Data Path window is used to define more advanced data path features.

Note: See the dataPath Parameters (on page 216) for detailed information about the parameters.

Access and Window Description

4. On the Menu list, click the Configuration link. Figure 219

Figure 219: Configuration link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

6. Click the Data Path tab to access the Data Path parameters. Figure 220

Note: The information in this window is read-only.

See the dataPath Parameters (on page 216) for detailed information about the parameters.

Figure 220: Data Path window

7. Optional: On the Menu list, click the Configuration link to Change the Data Path
Parameters (on page 94).

36.4. Date window

The Date window is used to view the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 operation and application uptime.

Note: See the date Parameters (on page 225) for detailed information about the parameters.

Access and Window Description

4. On the Menu list, click the Configuration link. Figure 221

Figure 221: Configuration link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

6. Click the Date tab to access the Date parameters. Figure 222

Note: The information in this window is read-only.

See the date Parameters (on page 225) for detailed information about the parameters.

Figure 222: Date window

36.5. Encryption window

The Encryption window is used to enable or disable encryption on the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

Note: See the encryption Parameters (on page 230) for detailed information about the parameters.

Access and Window Description

4. On the Menu list, click the Configuration link. Figure 223

Figure 223: Configuration link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

6. Click the Encryption tab to access the Encryption parameters. Figure 224

Note: See the encryption Parameters (on page 230) for detailed information about the
parameters.

Figure 224: Encryption window

7. Optional: On the Menu list, click the Configuration link to Change the Encryption
Parameters (on page 96).

36.6. File Upload window

The File Upload window is used to search for and upload these file types into the Z9-P2 or Z9-
PE2:

Extension File Type

.cfg; .cfg.txt Configuration changes
.fcf; .fcf.txt Radio module Firmware updates
.pkg; .pkg.txt Interface board Firmware updates

Access and Window Description

Note: The images in this procedure are for Windows® 7 and/or Windows® 10 and Firefox®.

1. Verify the Setup the Computer IP Address Configuration procedure is completed.

2. Open a web browser.
3. In the URL address bar, enter the IP address of the connected Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 and press
<Enter>.
The Home window (on page 378) opens.

4. On the Menu list, click the File Upload link. Figure 225

Figure 225: File Upload link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the File Upload window opens. Figure 226

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

Figure 226: File Upload window

6. Optional: Complete the Firmware Update for the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

File Upload window

Control Title Control Description
Browse button Click to open the Microsoft® File Upload dialog box.

Note: The Browse button title is dependent on the chosen browser.

Send button Click to start the update process on the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.
Cancel button Click to cancel the file transfer if already started or refresh the window and
clear the selected file.

36.7. Help window

The Help window is used to read information about the settings of the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

Access and Window Description

1. Verify the Setup the Computer IP Address Configuration procedure is completed.
2. Open a web browser.
3. In the URL address bar, enter the IP address of the connected Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 and press
<Enter>.
The Home window (on page 378) opens.

4. On the Menu list, click the Help link. Figure 227

Figure 227: Help link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

The Login dialog box closes and the Help window opens. Figure 228

Note: The information in this window is read-only.

Figure 228: Help window

36.8. Home window

The Home window is the default window that opens when the Web Interface is used.
It is used to:
l View basic System information of the connected Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.
l Provide links to other windows of the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.
Access and Window Description
1. Open a web browser.
2. In the URL address bar, enter the IP address of the connected Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 and press
<Enter>.
The Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 Home window opens. Figure 229

Figure 229: Home (System Info) window

Note: The information in this window is read-only.

36.9. ioExCom window

The ioExCom window is used to designate the modbusDeviceId (on page 253) of the connected
IOEX device that responds to during a Modbus TCP request over the network or a Modbus RTU
request coming in via COM1 or COM2.

Note: See the ioexcom Parameters (on page 234) for detailed information about the parameters.

Access and Window Description

4. On the Menu list, click the Configuration link. Figure 230

Figure 230: Configuration link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

6. Click the Io Ex Com tab to access the Io Ex Com parameters. Figure 231

Note: See the ioexcom Parameters (on page 234) for detailed information about the
parameters.

Figure 231: Io Ex Com window

Note: The information in this window is read-only.

36.10. Local Diagnostics window

The Local Diagnostics window is used to view diagnostic info about the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

Note: See the localDiagnostics Parameters (on page 235) for detailed information about the
parameters.

Access and Window Description

4. On the Menu list, click the Configuration link. Figure 232

Figure 232: Configuration link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

6. Click the Local Diagnostics tab to access the Local Diagnostics parameters. Figure 233

Note: See the localDiagnostics Parameters (on page 235) for detailed information about the
parameters.

7. Optional: On the Menu list, click the Configuration link to Change the Local Diagnostics -
Monitored Node (on page 99).

Figure 233: Local Diagnostics window

36.11. Modbus window

The Modbus window is used to view Modbus information about the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

Note: See the modbus Parameters (on page 252) for detailed information about the parameters.

Access and Window Description

4. On the Menu list, click the Configuration link. Figure 234

Figure 234: Configuration link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

6. Click the Modbus tab to access the Modbus parameters. Figure 235

Note: See the modbus Parameters (on page 252) for detailed information about the
parameters.

Figure 235: Modbus window

7. Optional: On the Menu list, click the Configuration link to Change the Modbus Parameters
(on page 101).

36.12. Network window

The Network window is used to provide network information for the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

Note: See the network Parameters (on page 262) for detailed information about the parameters.

Access and Window Description

4. On the Menu list, click the Configuration link. Figure 236

Figure 236: Configuration link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

6. Click the Network tab to access the Network parameters. Figure 237

Note: See the network Parameters (on page 262) for detailed information about the
parameters.

Figure 237: Network window

7. Optional: On the Menu list, click the Configuration link to Change the Network
Parameters (on page 103).

36.13. Network Diagnostics window

The Network Diagnostics window is used to:
l Discover other Endpoints in the network.
l Show hops and their paths from the Gateway.
l Show the link quality (RSSI and Margin).
l Show neighbors.

Important!: A Gateway is required in the network to use this window.

Access and Window Description

4. On the Menu list, click the Network Diagnostics link.

Figure 238: Network Diagnostics link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

The Network Diagnostics window opens, scanning the network. Figure 239
The diagram takes a few moments to render.
The Options list box default selection is Margin.

Figure 239: Network Diagnostics window - Scanning Network

The Link Margin connections appear in the Network Diagram.

Network Diagnostics window

Control
Control Area Control Description
Title
Options list box Click the Options list box arrow and select a connections
diagram option.
Options list box Show Big Select the Show Big Graph option to view the Network
Graph Diagram in a large format.
Options list box Show Table In the Options list box, select the Show Table option to view
the radio connection table of the selected device below the
Network Diagram.

Note: See Show Table in the Network Diagnostics

Window (on page 141) to view network and device
information in a table format.

Options list box Save Image Select the Save Image option to open the Save Image dialog
box.

Note: See Save a Network Diagram Image (on page

137) to save the Network Diagram as a .PNG file.

Options list box Gateway IP Select the Gateway IP option to open the Add Device IP
dialog box and add a Gateway IP address.

Note: See Add a Gateway Device IP Address (on page

128) for additional information.

Network Diagnostics window

Control
Control Area Control Description
Title
Options list box Clear Click Clear Display to erase the network diagram in the
Display window.

Note: In the Options list box, click Refresh Network

Diagnostics to show the network in the window.

Options list box Save Select the Save Network Diagnostics option to open the
Network Opening network_diag.json dialog box.
Diagnostics
Note: See Save Network Diagnostics (on page 134) to
save the current network performance reading for later
review and to monitor network performance over time.

Options list box Download Select the Download Support Bundle option to open the
Support Opening support_bundle_nnn.zip dialog box.
Bundle
Note: Where nnn is the selected device in the Network
Diagram.

Use the Opening support_bundle_nnn.zip

dialog box to save the current network
performance reading to send to FreeWave
Technical Support for faster issue resolution.

Options list box Refresh Select the Refresh Network Diagnostics option to updated
Network the current network performance reading.
Diagnostics
Options list box Clear All Select the Clear All Stats option to reset the localDiagnostics
Stats Parameters (on page 235), networkStats Parameters (on page
274), and Network Diagnostics.
Options list box Clear Stats Select the Clear Stats option to clear only the local
diagnostics.

Important!: This does NOT clear the networkStats

Parameters (on page 274) or Network Diagnostics.

Network Diagnostics window

Control
Control Area Control Description
Title
Options list box Margin Click the Options list box arrow and select the Margin option
to show the Link Margin connections in the Network
Diagram.

Note: See the View the Network Diagnostics - Margin

(on page 149) for a diagram example.

Options list box RSSI Click the Options list box arrow and select the RSSI option to
show the RSSI connections in the Network Diagram.

Note: See View the Network Diagnostics - RSSI (on

page 154) for a diagram example.

Options list box Tx Rate Click the Options list box arrow and select the Tx Rate option
to show the Tx Rate connections in the Network Diagram.

Note: See View the Network Diagnostics - Tx Rate (on

page 161) for a diagram example.

Options list box Rx Rate Click the Options list box arrow and select the Rx Rate option
to show the Rx Rate connections in the Network Diagram.

Note: See View the Network Diagnostics - Rx Rate (on

page 159) for a diagram example.

Options list box Margin with Click the Options list box arrow and select the Margin with
Neighbors Neighbors option to show the Margin with Neighbors
connections in the Network Diagram.

Note: See View the Network Diagnostics - Margin with

Neighbors (on page 151) for a diagram example.

Options list box RSSI with Click the Options list box arrow and select the RSSI with
Neighbors Neighbors option to show the RSSI with Neighbors
connections in the Network Diagram.

Note: See View the Network Diagnostics - RSSI with

Neighbors (on page 156) for a diagram example.

Network Diagnostics window

Control
Control Area Control Description
Title
Options list box Breadthfirst Click the Options list box arrow and select the Breadthfirst
option to show the Breadthfirst connections in the Network
Diagram.

Note: See the View the Network Diagnostics -

Breadthfirst (on page 143) for a diagram example.

Options list box Cose- Click the Options list box arrow and select the Cose-bilkent
bilkent option to show the Cose-bilkent connections in the Network
Diagram.

Note: See the View the Network Diagnostics - Cose-

bilkent (on page 145) for a diagram example.

Options list box Grid Click the Options list box arrow and select the Grid option to
show the Grid connections in the Network Diagram.

Note: See the View the Network Diagnostics - Grid (on

page 147) for a diagram example.

Options list box Dagre When Dagre is select, the network diagram shows possible
loops in a complicated network.

Note: By default, Dagre is selected.

Options list box Paused When Paused is selected, no updates or layout changes are
made in the network diagram.
Options list box Updating When Updating Layout is select, the node layouts are
Layout automatically set by the computer.

Note: By default, Updating Layout is selected.

36.14. Network Stats window

The Network Stats window is used to view received, dropped, or sent Ethernet packet
information.

Note: See the networkStats Parameters (on page 274) for detailed information about the parameters.

Access and Window Description

4. On the Menu list, click the Configuration link. Figure 240

Figure 240: Configuration link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

6. Click the Network Stats tab to access the Network Stats parameters. Figure 241

Note: The information in this window is read-only.

See the networkStats Parameters (on page 274) for detailed information about the
parameters.

Figure 241: Network Stats window

36.15. NTP window

The NTP window is used to designate the date and time used on the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

Note: See the NTP Parameters (on page 280) for detailed information about the parameters.

Access and Window Description

4. On the Menu list, click the Configuration link. Figure 242

Figure 242: Configuration link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

6. Click the NTP tab to access the NTP parameters. Figure 243

Note: The information in this window is read-only.

See the NTP Parameters (on page 280) for detailed information about the parameters.

Figure 243: NTP window

7. Optional: On the Menu list, click the Configuration link to Change the NTP Parameters
(on page 105).

36.16. Radio Settings window - Endpoint

The Radio Settings window is used to define the key parameters of an Endpoint Z9-P2 or Z9-
PE2.

Note: See the radioSettings Parameters (on page 285) for detailed information about the parameters.

Access and Window Description

4. On the Menu list, click the Configuration link. Figure 244

Figure 244: Configuration link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

6. Click the Radio Settings tab to access the Radio Settings parameters. Figure 245

Note: By default, the radioMode (on page 304) parameter is set to Endpoint.
See the radioSettings Parameters (on page 285) for detailed information about the
parameters.

Figure 245: Radio Settings window - Endpoint

7. Optional: On the Menu list, click the Configuration link to Change the Radio Settings
Parameters - Endpoint (on page 107).

Important!: Only radioSettings that apply to the current radioMode, rfDataRate, and
radioHoppingMode, and are visible in the CLI and the Web Interface and can be changed.

36.16.1. Radio Settings window - Endpoint-Repeater

The Radio Settings window is used to define the key parameters of an Endpoint-Repeater Z9-
P2 or Z9-PE2.

Note: See the radioSettings Parameters (on page 285) for detailed information about the parameters.

Access and Window Description

4. On the Menu list, click the Configuration link. Figure 246

Figure 246: Configuration link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

6. Click the Radio Settings tab to access the Radio Settings parameters.

Note: By default, the radioMode (on page 304) parameter is set to Endpoint.
See the radioSettings Parameters (on page 285) for detailed information about the
parameters.

7. Click the Radio Mode list box arrow and select Endpoint_Repeater. Figure 247

Figure 247: Radio Settings window - Endpoint_Repeater

8. Optional: On the Menu list, click the Configuration link to Change the Radio Settings
Parameters - Endpoint-Repeater (on page 109).

Important!: Only radioSettings that apply to the current radioMode, rfDataRate, and
radioHoppingMode, and are visible in the CLI and the Web Interface and can be changed.

36.16.2. Radio Settings window - Gateway

The Radio Settings window is used to define the key parameters of an Gateway Z9-P2 or Z9-
PE2.

Note: See the radioSettings Parameters (on page 285) for detailed information about the parameters.

Access and Window Description

4. On the Menu list, click the Configuration link. Figure 248

Figure 248: Configuration link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

6. Click the Radio Settings tab to access the Radio Settings parameters.

Note: By default, the radioMode (on page 304) parameter is set to Endpoint.
See the radioSettings Parameters (on page 285) for detailed information about the
parameters.

7. Click the Radio Mode list box arrow and select Gateway. Radio Settings window -
Gateway (on page 401)

Figure 249: Radio Settings window - Gateway

8. Optional: On the Menu list, click the Configuration link to Change the Radio Settings
Parameters - Gateway (on page 111).

Important!: Only radioSettings that apply to the current radioMode, rfDataRate, and
radioHoppingMode, and are visible in the CLI and the Web Interface and can be changed.

36.16.3. Radio Settings window - Gateway-Repeater

The Radio Settings window is used to define the key parameters of an Gateway-Repeater Z9-
P2 or Z9-PE2.

Note: See the radioSettings Parameters (on page 285) for detailed information about the parameters.

Access and Window Description

4. On the Menu list, click the Configuration link. Figure 250

Figure 250: Configuration link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

6. Click the Radio Settings tab to access the Radio Settings parameters.

Note: By default, the radioMode (on page 304) parameter is set to Endpoint.
See the radioSettings Parameters (on page 285) for detailed information about the
parameters.

7. Click the Radio Mode list box arrow and select Gateway_Repeater. Figure 251

Figure 251: Radio Settings window - Gateway_Repeater

8. Optional: On the Menu list, click the Configuration link to Change the Radio Settings
Parameters - Gateway-Repeater (on page 114).

Important!: Only radioSettings that apply to the current radioMode, rfDataRate, and
radioHoppingMode, and are visible in the CLI and the Web Interface and can be changed.

36.17. Radio Settings Helpers window

The Radio Settings Helpers window is used to determine the error that exists in the frequency
mask string.

Note: This window is only available if the radioHoppingMode (on page 299) parameter is set to
Hopping_On.
See the radioSettingsHelpers Parameters (on page 311) for detailed information about the
parameters.
See frequencyMasks (on page 290) for usage.

Access and Window Description

4. On the Menu list, click the Configuration link. Figure 252

Figure 252: Configuration link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

6. Click the Radio Settings Helpers tab to access the Radio Settings Helpers
parameter. Figure 253

Note: The information in this window is read-only.

See the radioSettingsHelpers Parameters (on page 311) for detailed information about the
parameters.
See frequencyMasks (on page 290) for usage.

Figure 253: Radio Settings Helpers window

36.18. Runtime Environment window

The Runtime Environment window is used to provide information specific to the Linux Runtime
Environment.

Note: See the runtimeEnvironment Parameters (on page 313) for detailed information about the
parameters.

Access and Window Description

4. On the Menu list, click the Configuration link. Figure 254

Figure 254: Configuration link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

6. Click the Runtime Environment tab to access The Runtime Environment parameters.
Figure 255

Note: The information in this window is read-only.

See the runtimeEnvironment Parameters (on page 313) for detailed information about the
parameters.

Figure 255: Runtime Environment window

36.19. Security window

The Security window is used to enable or disable the drag-n-drop interface and SSH access.

Note: See the security Parameters (on page 317) for detailed information about the parameters.

Access and Window Description

4. On the Menu list, click the Configuration link. Figure 256

Figure 256: Configuration link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

5. Click the Security tab to access the Security parameters. Figure 257

Note: See the security Parameters (on page 317) for detailed information about the
parameters.

Figure 257: Security window

6. Optional: On the Menu list, click the Configuration link to Change the Security Parameters
(on page 117).

36.20. Services window

The Services window is used to enter the number of seconds of idle time before the CLI
connection is closed.

Note: See the services Parameters (on page 320) for detailed information about the parameters.

Access and Window Description

4. On the Menu list, click the Configuration link. Figure 258

Figure 258: Configuration link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

6. Click the Services tab to access the Services parameters. Figure 259

Note: See the services Parameters (on page 320) for detailed information about the
parameters.

Figure 259: Services window

7. Optional: On the Menu list, click the Configuration link to Change the Services
Parameters (on page 119).

36.21. SNMP window

The SNMP window is used to enable, disable, and define SNMP access.

Note: See the SNMP Parameters (on page 322) for detailed information about the parameters.

Access and Window Description

4. On the Menu list, click the Configuration link. Figure 260

Figure 260: Configuration link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

6. Click the SNMP tab to access the SNMP parameters.

Note: See the SNMP Parameters (on page 322) for detailed information about the
parameters.

Figure 261: SNMP window

7. Optional: On the Menu list, click the Configuration link to Change the SNMP Parameters
(on page 121).

36.22. System Info window

The System Info window provides system level information for the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

Note: See the systemInfo Parameters (on page 336) for detailed information about the parameters.

Access and Window Description

4. On the Menu list, click the Configuration link. Figure 262

Figure 262: Configuration link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

6. Click the System Info tab to access the System Info parameters. Figure 263

Figure 263: System Info window

7. Optional: On the Menu list, click the Configuration link to Change the System Info
Parameters (on page 123).

36.23. Terminal Server Relay window

The Terminal Server Relay window is used to connect the local Terminal Servers (hence the
COM ports) to any remote Terminal Server.

Note: See the TerminalServerRelay Parameters (on page 347) for detailed information about the
parameters.

Access and Window Description

4. On the Menu list, click the Configuration link. Figure 264

Figure 264: Configuration link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the System Info window opens.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

6. Click the Terminal Server Relay tab to access the Terminal Server Relay
parameters. Figure 265

Note: See the TerminalServerRelay Parameters (on page 347) for detailed information about
the parameters.

Figure 265: Terminal Server Relay window

7. Optional: On the Menu list, click the Configuration link to Change the Terminal Server
Relay Parameters (on page 125).

36.24. User Data - Drag and Drop window

The User Data - Drag and Drop window lists the default files of the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

Access and Window Description

4. On the Menu list, click the User Data - Drag and DropUser Data link.

Figure 266: User Data - Drag and Drop Files link

The Authentication Required (Login) dialog box opens.

5. Enter admin in both the User Name and Password text boxes and click OK.

Note: If the User Name or Password were changed, enter the applicable information.

The Login dialog box closes and the User Data window opens. Figure 267

Figure 267: User Data window

Note: See the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 Files and Descriptions (on page 465) for additional information.

37. Release Notes

These sections describe the additions, changes, and known limitations in each software version
for the ZumLink Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2. The most recent version is listed first.

The latest firmware and software versions and the most recent list of known limitations and
workarounds are available on www.freewave.com.

37.1. Version 1.1.2.2 (Initial Release)

Release Date: July 2019
Additions and Changes
l The Web Interface has been re-designed for improved usability on the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.
l Support has been added for:

Note: See the SupplyVoltage (on page 248) parameter for more information.

l VLAN Management
l Users can only access the device from the VLAN ID.

l If the VLAN tag is set on a specific Ethernet port, that port cannot be used to access

the Management VLAN ID.

Note: See the vlanMgmt (on page 271) parameter for additional information.

l Windows® File Explorer now shows 4.4 GB of space instead of the 1.8 GB in previous
software versions.
l This is a result of the ptp directory moving to a new partition.

l To view space available for applications, login as devuser and run the command df-h.
l The /persist directory is where applications reside.

Corrections have been implemented for:

l The devuser login password and the sudo password were out of sync when loading a
new IQ Application Environment when the default password was changed on the existing
IQ Application Environment. These passwords are now in sync.
l Files uploaded using the Web Interface cannot be deleted by users.
l After updating the rteTemplateVersion (on page 344) parameter, a reboot is necessary to
update the sys_info.txt file.

Known Limitations and Workarounds

l Setting timeString (on page 227) causes the entire Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 configuration to
revert to saved settings.
l Workaround: Save settings before changing the date.timeString parameter.

l Cannot change the date.timeString once the time is set using NTP.
l The UCD-SNMP-MIB-WP201.txt file is missing definition for dskIndex.
l The Ethernet ports can become unresponsive after changing networks and the
vlanTagPort1 (on page 271) and/or vlanTagPort2 (on page 273) IDs.
l Workaround: Reboot the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 for changes to take effect.

l Setting the vlanTagPort1 (on page 271) or vlanTagPort2 (on page 273) may affect the
connectivity of the other port.
l Unable to get input voltage via Modbus.
l When using the Web Interface on a computer with Windows® 8 or Windows® 10, clicking
Cancel does not halt the upload process.
l Files uploaded using the Web Interface drag-n-drop procedure are now write-protected
and cannot be deleted.
l When changing and saving the radioSettings Parameters (on page 285), the CLI interface
may momentarily lock.
l If there is enough space to transfer the update firmware but not enough to facilitate the
update, the update fails and the Upgrade Failed LEDs do not function.
l Workaround: Users should verify the available free space before uploading an update

firmware file.
At least 2x free space is needed on the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 for the firmware update file.
l Users should wait at least 30 seconds after a factory default command is issued before
making configuration changes.
l The fields in the NTP Parameters (on page 280) parameters are not validated by the
system.
l Workaround: Verify the NTP parameter settings are correct.

l Unable to set the time when the ntpReference (on page 283) parameter =NETWORK_
TIME_SERVER.
l The highest baud rate supported for RS422 and RS485 is 421 kbps.
l In Firmware v1.1.2.2, when the flowControl (on page 203) parameter is set to hardware,
the COM port's flow control does not function.
l Exiting from the CLI may take up to 30 seconds.
l Entering the shortcut text of ModbusTcp and ModbusRtuOverTcp results in a
DUPLICATE_PARAMETER Error.
l Workaround: The fully-qualified parameter of modbus.modbusTcp and

modbus.modbusRtuOverTcp must be entered.

l When issuing the factoryDefaults=set command, after making changes for any of
the network Parameters (on page 262), the user is locked out of the CLI.
l Workaround: Reboot the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 for changes to take effect.

l VSWR reading may be inconsistent between the Network Diagram on the Network
Diagnostics window (on page 387) and the information reported in the Local Diagnostics
window (on page 381).
l The File Upload window (on page 374) shows a 100% upload when the upload file has not
completed on Windows® 8 and Windows® 10 computers.
l Workaround: Wait the appropriate amount of time or watch the LEDs to indicate

completion of file transfer or use the v1112-Firmware Update - Drag and Drop
procedure.
l When setting the parameter arpFilterEnabled=true, ARP requests and responses are
NOT blocked on VLAN interfaces.
l Rebooting a pair of radios simultaneously when one of the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 has the
parameter termserv_relay_mapping=Enabled, the terminal server relay takes up to 6
minutes to become active.
l To update the Network Diagnostics window (on page 387), refresh the browser to clear the
browser cache.
l When the termserv_relay_mapping (on page 348) parameter is designated and the
flowControl (on page 203) parameter is set to Hardware, the COM port's flow control does
not function.
l Significant data is lost between radios when operating in close proximity (3-6 feet) when
radioSettings.rfDataRate=RATE_4M (See rfDataRate (on page 307)).
l Workarounds:

l Reduce power on radios when operating in close proximity.

l Enable the lnaBypass (on page 294).

l When using the USB, the CLI may lock up on units with termserv_relay_mapping (on page
348) enabled.
l Workarounds:

l Re-seat the cable

l Reconfigure the termserv_relay_mapping using either of these procedures:

Drag and Drop Configuration (on page 28) or
Web Interface Configuration (on page 39)
l When the termserv_relay_mapping parameter is in use, the connectionDrops (on page
200) count should be ignored.
l When operating at rfDataRate = RATE_4M and with multiple Repeaters, if a
short beaconInterval and a high beaconBurstCount are designated, throughput is very
low.
l Workaround: Use either a longer beaconInterval or a lower beaconBurstCount.

l As Repeaters are chained in the network, round trip delay increases.

l When issuing pings of large packet sizes at the lower data rates, such as 115.2K, and a

beaconInterval=TWENTY_FIVE_MS, the latency can increase causing the pings to fail.

l Workaround: Allow an appropriate delay between pings.

FREEWAVE Recommends: Set the beaconBurstCount=2 or more and

beaconInterval=ONE_HUNDRED_MS or more for optimal throughput when extended
Repeater networks are used.

l The signalLevel (on page 236) parameter reports a maximum of -42 dBm when the
rfDataRate=RATE_1M.

38. Available Accessories

These are the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 accessories available from FreeWave.

l Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 Accessories (on page 424)
l Z9-P2 Only Accessories (on page 425)
l Z9-PE2 Only Accessories (on page 425)

38.1. Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 Accessories

Available Accessories - Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2
Part Number Description
EAN0900SQ l ¼ Wave Omni-directional 900 MHz Stub Antenna
l 0 (zero) dBi gain
l Straight, SMA Male RF connector
EAN0900SR l ½ Wave Omni-directional 900 MHz Stub Antenna
l 2 dBi gain
l Right-angle 360 degree swivel, SMA Male RF connector
EAN0900WC l Open coil Omni-directional 896-940 MHz Antenna
l 5.15 dBi gain.

Important!: Does NOT include mounting hardware or cable.

EAN0905WC l Closed coil Omni-directional 896-970 MHz Antenna

l 5 dBi gain

Available Accessories - Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2

Part Number Description
EAN0906YC l 3 Element 890-960 MHz Yagi antenna
l 8.65 dBi gain
l 24” feedline terminated with N female connector
ECD0324ER 3 foot long RJ-45 to DB-9 cable adapter
ECD0658EB 6.5 foot long shielded Ethernet cable
EMD1280AX 12 VDC @ 800 mA AC-to-DC power supply with Phoenix Contact (#
1776692)

38.2. Z9-P2 Only Accessories

Available Accessories - Z9-PE Only
Part Number Description
AOH0001HT Multi-position DIN rail bracket kit

38.3. Z9-PE2 Only Accessories

Available Accessories - Z9-PE2 Only
Part Number Description
EMD1280AX 12 VDC @ 800 mA AC-to-DC power supply with DC plug
AOH4003SP Reversible DIN rail bracket kit

39. Mechanical Drawing - Z9-P2

39.1. Z9-P2 - Top and Sides

This document is subject to change without notice. This document is the property of FreeWave Technologies, Inc. and contains proprietary information owned
by FreeWave. This document cannot be reproduced in whole or in part by any means without written permission from FreeWave Technologies, Inc.
39. Mechanical Drawing - Z9-P2 Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 User-Reference Manual

39.2. Z9-P2 - Dimensions

This document is subject to change without notice. This document is the property of FreeWave Technologies, Inc. and contains proprietary information owned
by FreeWave. This document cannot be reproduced in whole or in part by any means without written permission from FreeWave Technologies, Inc.
40. Mechanical Drawing - Z9-PE2 Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 User-Reference Manual

40. Mechanical Drawing - Z9-PE2

40.1. Z9-PE2 - Top and Sides

This document is subject to change without notice. This document is the property of FreeWave Technologies, Inc. and contains proprietary information owned
by FreeWave. This document cannot be reproduced in whole or in part by any means without written permission from FreeWave Technologies, Inc.
40. Mechanical Drawing - Z9-PE2 Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 User-Reference Manual

40.2. Z9-PE2 - Back

This document is subject to change without notice. This document is the property of FreeWave Technologies, Inc. and contains proprietary information owned
by FreeWave. This document cannot be reproduced in whole or in part by any means without written permission from FreeWave Technologies, Inc.
Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2
User-Reference Manual

41. Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 Hop Tables

l Standard Hop Set - 900 MHz Channels (on page 431)

41.1. Standard Hop Set - 900 MHz Channels

These are the standard channels supported when the radioHoppingMode (on page 299) is
Enabled.

Note: When the Radio Hopping Mode is Disabled, the frequency can be set manually.

l RF Data Rate: 115.2 kbps (on page 431)

l RF Data Rate: 250 kbps (on page 432)
l RF Data Rate: 500 kbps (on page 432)
l RF Data Rate: 1 Mbps (on page 432)
l RF Data Rate: 1.5 Mbps (Beta) (on page 433)
l RF Data Rate: 4 Mbps (on page 433)

41.1.1. RF Data Rate: 115.2 kbps

Channel Size (MHz): 0.2304
Number of Channels: 110
Standard Hop Set - ZumLink 900 MHz Channels
RF Data Rate: 115.2 kbps
902.4768 907.0848 911.6928 916.3008 920.9088 925.5168
902.7072 907.3152 911.9232 916.5312 921.1392 925.7472
902.9376 907.5456 912.1536 916.7616 921.3696 925.9776
903.1680 907.7760 912.3840 916.9920 921.6000 926.2080
903.3984 908.0064 912.6144 917.2224 921.8304 926.4384
903.6288 908.2368 912.8448 917.4528 922.0608 926.6688
903.8592 908.4672 913.0752 917.6832 922.2912 926.8992
904.0896 908.6976 913.3056 917.9136 922.5216 927.1296
904.3200 908.9280 913.5360 918.1440 922.7520 927.3600
904.5504 909.1584 913.7664 918.3744 922.9824 927.5904
904.7808 909.3888 913.9968 918.6048 923.2128
905.0112 909.6192 914.2272 918.8352 923.4432
905.2416 909.8496 914.4576 919.0656 923.6736
905.4720 910.0800 914.6880 919.2960 923.9040
905.7024 910.3104 914.9184 919.5264 924.1344
905.9328 910.5408 915.1488 919.7568 924.3648
906.1632 910.7712 915.3792 919.9872 924.5952
906.3936 911.0016 915.6096 920.2176 924.8256
906.6240 911.2320 915.8400 920.4480 925.0560
906.8544 911.4624 916.0704 920.6784 925.2864

41.1.2. RF Data Rate: 250 kbps

Channel Size (MHz): 0.3456
Number of Channels: 73
Standard Hop Set - ZumLink900 MHz Channels
RF Data Rate: 250 kbps
902.5344 907.0272 911.5200 916.0128 920.5056 924.9984
902.8800 907.3728 911.8656 916.3584 920.8512 925.3440
903.2256 907.7184 912.2112 916.7040 921.1968 925.6896
903.5712 908.0640 912.5568 917.0496 921.5424 926.0352
903.9168 908.4096 912.9024 917.3952 921.8880 926.3808
904.2624 908.7552 913.2480 917.7408 922.2336 926.7264
904.6080 909.1008 913.5936 918.0864 922.5792 927.0720
904.9536 909.4464 913.9392 918.4320 922.9248 927.4176
905.2992 909.7920 914.2848 918.7776 923.2704
905.6448 910.1376 914.6304 919.1232 923.6160
905.9904 910.4832 914.9760 919.4688 923.9616
906.3360 910.8288 915.3216 919.8144 924.3072
906.6816 911.1744 915.6672 920.1600 924.6528

41.1.3. RF Data Rate: 500 kbps

Channel Size (MHz): 0.6912
Number of Channels: 36
Standard Hop Set - ZumLink 900 MHz Channels
RF Data Rate: 500 kbps
902.7072 906.8544 911.0016 915.1488 919.2960 923.4432
903.3984 907.5456 911.6928 915.8400 919.9872 924.1344
904.0896 908.2368 912.3840 916.5312 920.6784 924.8256
904.7808 908.9280 913.0752 917.2224 921.3696 925.5168
905.4720 909.6192 913.7664 917.9136 922.0608 926.2080
906.1632 910.3104 914.4576 918.6048 922.7520 926.8992

41.1.4. RF Data Rate: 1 Mbps

Channel Size (MHz): 1.3824
Number of Channels: 18
Standard Hop Set - ZumLink 900 MHz Channels
RF Data Rate: 1 Mbps
903.0528 915.4944
904.4352 916.8768

41.1.5. RF Data Rate: 1.5 Mbps (Beta)

Channel Size (MHz): 1.3824
Number of Channels: 17
Standard Hop Set - ZumLink 900 MHz Channels
RF Data Rate: 1.5 Mbps (Beta)
903.2562 916.1586
904.8690 917.7714
906.4818 919.3842
908.0946 920.9970
909.7074 922.6098
911.3202 924.2226
912.9330 925.8354
914.5458

41.1.6. RF Data Rate: 4 Mbps

Channel Size (MHz): 3.2256
Number of Channels: 7
Standard Hop Set - ZumLink 900 MHz Channels
RF Data Rate: 4 Mbps
904.5504
907.7760
911.0016
914.2272
917.4528
920.6784
923.9040

42. Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 MIB

These are the supported item groups in the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 MIB file:
l CPU Usage (on page 435)
l Disk Usage (on page 435)
l Memory Usage (on page 437)
l FreeWave Technologies - MIB (on page 438)
l SNMP Write Access (on page 451)

42.1. CPU Usage

ZumLink MIB - CPU Usage
Objective Type Syntax MAX Access Status Description ::=
ssCpuUser Integer32 Read-only Deprecated The percentage of CPU time spent processing { systemStats 9 }
user-level code, calculated over the last minute.
ssCpuSystem Integer32 Read-only Deprecated The percentage of CPU time spent processing { systemStats 10 }
system-level code, calculated over the last
minute.
ssCpuIdle Integer32 Read-only Deprecated The percentage of processor time spent idle, { systemStats 11 }
calculated over the last minute.
ssCpuNice Integer32 Read-only Deprecated The percentage of processor time spent nice, { systemStats 12 }
calculated over the last minute.

42.2. Disk Usage

ZumLink MIB - Disk Usage
Objective MAX
Syntax Status Description ::=
Type Access
dskTable Sequence of Not Current Disk watching information. { ucdavis 9 }
DskEntry Accessible Partitions to be watched are configured by the snmpd.conf
file of the agent.

This document is subject to change without notice. This document is the property of FreeWave Technologies, Inc. and contains proprietary information owned
by FreeWave. This document cannot be reproduced in whole or in part by any means without written permission from FreeWave Technologies, Inc.
42. Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 MIB Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 User-Reference Manual

ZumLink MIB - Disk Usage

Objective MAX
Syntax Status Description ::=
Type Access
dskEntry DskEntry Not Current An entry containing a disk and its statistics. { dskTable 1 }
Accessible Index = { dskIndex }

DskEntry ::= SEQUENCE {

dskPath DisplayString,
dskDevice DisplayString,
dskTotal Integer32,
dskAvail Integer32,
dskUsed Integer32,
dskPercent Integer32,
dskPercentNode Integer32
}
dskPath DisplayString Read-only Current Path where the disk is mounted. { dskEntry 2 }
dskDevice DisplayString Read-only Current Path of the device for the partition. { dskEntry 3 }
dskTotal Integer32 Read-only Current Total size of the disk / partition (kBytes). { dskEntry 6 }
dskAvail Integer32 Read-only Current Available space on the disk. { dskEntry 7 }
dskUsed Integer32 Read-only Current Used space on the disk. { dskEntry 8 }
dskPercent Integer32 Read-only Current Percentage of space used on disk. { dskEntry 9 }
dskPercentNode Integer32 Read-only Current Percentage of nodes used on disk. { dskEntry 10 }

This document is subject to change without notice. This document is the property of FreeWave Technologies, Inc. and contains proprietary information owned
by FreeWave. This document cannot be reproduced in whole or in part by any means without written permission from FreeWave Technologies, Inc.
42. Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 MIB Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 User-Reference Manual

42.3. Memory Usage

ZumLink MIB - Memory Usage
MAX
Objective Type Syntax Units Status Description ::=
Access
memTotalSwap Integer32 kB Read-only Current The total amount of swap space configured for { memory 3 }
this host.
memAvailSwap Integer32 kB Read-only Current The amount of swap space currently unused or { memory 4 }
available.
memTotalReal Integer32 kB Read-only Current The total amount of real / physical memory { memory 5 }
installed on the host.
memAvailReal Integer32 kB Read-only Current The amount of real / physical memory currently { memory 7 }
unused or available.
memShared Integer32 kB Read-only Current The total amount of real or virtual memory { memory 13 }
currently allocated for use as shared memory.
This object will not be implemented on hosts
where the underlying operating system does not
explicitly identify memory as specifically
reserved for this purpose.
memBuffer Integer32 kB Read-only Current The total amount of real or virtual memory { memory 14 }
currently allocated for use as memory buffers.
This object will not be implemented on hosts
where the underlying operating system does not
explicitly identify memory as specifically
reserved for this purpose.
memCached Integer32 kB Read-only Current The total amount of real or virtual memory { memory 15 }
currently allocated for use as cached memory.
This object will not be implemented on hosts
where the underlying operating system does not
explicitly identify memory as specifically
reserved for this purpose.

This document is subject to change without notice. This document is the property of FreeWave Technologies, Inc. and contains proprietary information owned
by FreeWave. This document cannot be reproduced in whole or in part by any means without written permission from FreeWave Technologies, Inc.
42. Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 MIB Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 User-Reference Manual

ZumLink MIB - Memory Usage

MAX
Objective Type Syntax Units Status Description ::=
Access
memUsedReal Integer32 kB Read-only Current The amount of real / physical memory currently { memory 18 }
used or available.
memSpeed Integer32 Hz Read-only Current The Speed of real / physical memory. { memory 19 }

42.4. FreeWave Technologies - MIB

FreeWave Technologies - MIB
Object Description Access Syntax
fwtZumLinkSerialNumber Serial Number Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkModelCode Model Code Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkRadioModel Radio model Read-only DisplayString
fwtZumLinkRadioModelCode Radio Model Code Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkRadioFirmwareVersion Radio Firmware Version Read-only DisplayString
fwtZumLinkRadioSerialNumber Radio Serial Number Read-only DisplayString
fwtZumLinkDeviceName Device Name Read-only DisplayString
fwtZumLinkDeviceModel Device Model Read-only DisplayString
fwtZumLinkDeviceConfiguration Device Configuration Read-only DisplayString
fwtZumLinkDeviceFirmwareVersion Device Firmware Version Read-only DisplayString
fwtZumLinkDeviceId Device Identifier Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkLayoutHash Unique Layout Identifier Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkResetInfo Reset Information Read-only DisplayString
fwtZumLinkHopTableVersion Radio Hop Table Version Read-only DisplayString
fwtZumLinkRteVersion Runtime Environment Version Read-only DisplayString
fwtZumLinkRteTemplateVersion Runtime Template Environment Version Read-only DisplayString

This document is subject to change without notice. This document is the property of FreeWave Technologies, Inc. and contains proprietary information owned
by FreeWave. This document cannot be reproduced in whole or in part by any means without written permission from FreeWave Technologies, Inc.
42. Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 MIB Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 User-Reference Manual

FreeWave Technologies - MIB

Object Description Access Syntax
fwtZumLinkLicenses License Information Read-only DisplayString
fwtZumLinkThemeVersion Theme Version Read-only DisplayString
fwtZumLinkRadioMode Radio Operational Mode Read-Write ZUMLINK_RADIO_
MODE_THOR
fwtZumLinkRfDataRate RF Link Data Rate Read-Write ZUMLINK_RF_DATA_
RATES
fwtZumLinkRadioMaxRepeaters Max Repeater slots in the Network Read-Write Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkRadioRepeaterSlot Repeater Slot Read-Write Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkTxPower Transmit Power Read-Write ZUMLINK_RADIO_TX_
POWER
fwtZumLinkNetworkId Network Identifier Read-Write Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkNodeId Node ID Read-Write Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkFrequencyKey Frequency Key Read-Write ZUMLINK_
FREQUENCYKEYS
fwtZumLinkRadioFrequency Operating Center Frequency in MHz Read-Write Float32TC
fwtZumLinkRadioHoppingMode Radio Hopping Mode Read-Write ZUMLINK_RADIO_
HOPPING_MODE
fwtZumLinkBeaconInterval Beacon Interval Read-Write ZUMLINK_BEACON_
INTERVALS
fwtZumLinkBeaconBurstCount The number of beacons to send per beacon Read-Write Unsigned32
time.
fwtZumLinkLnaBypass LNA Bypass Read-Write ZUMLINK_LNA_
BYPASS
fwtZumLinkMaxLinkDistanceInMiles The max link distance in miles Read-Write Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkFrequencyMasks Frequency Masks Read-Write DisplayString

This document is subject to change without notice. This document is the property of FreeWave Technologies, Inc. and contains proprietary information owned
by FreeWave. This document cannot be reproduced in whole or in part by any means without written permission from FreeWave Technologies, Inc.
42. Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 MIB Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 User-Reference Manual

FreeWave Technologies - MIB

Object Description Access Syntax
fwtZumLinkFrequencyMasksErrors Frequency Masks Error Read-only DisplayString
fwtZumLinkEncryptionMode Encryption mode Read-Write ZUMLINK_
ENCRYPTION_MODE
fwtZumLinkActiveKey The active selected key. Read-Write ZUMLINK_
ENCRYPTION_KEYS
fwtZumLinkSetKeySelect Selection of the next encryption key to be Read-Write ZUMLINK_
modified. ENCRYPTION_KEYS
fwtZumLinkSetKeyValue Set the value of the selected key. Read-Write DisplayString
fwtZumLinkCompressionEnabled If compression is enabled out going packets Read-Write TruthValue
will be sent compressed if the compressed
packet is smaller.
fwtZumLinkOtaMaxFragmentSize OTA Max Fragment Size Read-Write Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkFecRate Sets the FEC (Forward Error Correction) rate. Read-Write ZUMLINK_FEC_
RATES
fwtZumLinkAggregateEnabled Enables the aggregation of smaller packets to Read-Write TruthValue
enhance throughput.
fwtZumLinkRouteMinSignalMarginThresh The radio route minimum signal level threshold Read-Write INTEGER
in dB.
fwtZumLinkMacTableEntryAgeTimeout The number of seconds before an inactive Read-Write INTEGER
entry in the MAC Table ages out and becomes
expired.
fwtZumLinkSignalLevel Signal Level Read-only INTEGER
fwtZumLinkSignalMargin Signal Margin Read-only INTEGER
fwtZumLinkTimestamp Diagnostics Time Stamp Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkRadioTx Radio Tx Data Packets Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkRadioRx Radio Rx Data Packets Read-only Unsigned32

This document is subject to change without notice. This document is the property of FreeWave Technologies, Inc. and contains proprietary information owned
by FreeWave. This document cannot be reproduced in whole or in part by any means without written permission from FreeWave Technologies, Inc.
42. Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 MIB Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 User-Reference Manual

FreeWave Technologies - MIB

Object Description Access Syntax
fwtZumLinkRadioReliableTx Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkRadioReliableRx Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkRadioRexmit Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkRadioAckTx Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkRadioNoAckTx Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkRadioTimedOut Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkRadioBadAckRx Radio Bad ACK Received Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkRadioTooLong Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkRadioTooShort Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkRadioBadSync Radio Bad Synchronization Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkRadioBadCRC Radio Bad CRC on RX packets. Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkRadioContentionDrop Radio Contention Drop Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkRadioSendingDrop Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkRadioLLTx Radio Low Level Transmit Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkRadioLLRx Radio Low Level Receive Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkCntSTX Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkCntETX Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkCntBadSync Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkCntBadBCC Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkInterfaceDataTx Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkInterfaceDataRx Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkInterfaceBytesTx Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkInterfaceBytesRx Read-only Unsigned32

This document is subject to change without notice. This document is the property of FreeWave Technologies, Inc. and contains proprietary information owned
by FreeWave. This document cannot be reproduced in whole or in part by any means without written permission from FreeWave Technologies, Inc.
42. Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 MIB Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 User-Reference Manual

FreeWave Technologies - MIB

Object Description Access Syntax
fwtZumLinkResetsDetected Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkResetsSent Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkResetStats Reset Statistics Read-Write ZUMLINK_NOW_
OPTION
fwtZumLinkMonitoredNode Monitor Node Read-Write Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkChannelDiagsTable Show Channel Diagnostics Not Accessible
fwtZumLinkChannelDiagsEntry A row containing diagnostics for a channel. Not Accessible
fwtZumLinkChannelDiagsIdx Index to a set of diagnostics for a channel Not Accessible Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkChannelDiagsFreq Channel Diagnostics Frequency Read-only Float32TC
fwtZumLinkChannelDiagsRSSI Channel Diagnostics RSSI Read-only INTEGER
fwtZumLinkChannelDiagsMargin Channel Diagnostics Margin Read-only INTEGER
fwtZumLinkChannelDiagsNodeId Channel Diagnostics Node ID Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkNodeDiagsTable Show Monitored Node Diagnostics Not Accessible
fwtZumLinkNodeDiagsEntry A row containing diagnostics for a node. Not Accessible
fwtZumLinkNodeDiagsNodeId Node Diagnostics Node ID Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkNodeDiagsFreq Node Diagnostics Frequency Read-only Float32TC
fwtZumLinkNodeDiagsRSSI Node Diagnostics RSSI Read-only INTEGER
fwtZumLinkNodeDiagsMargin Node Diagnostics Margin Read-only INTEGER
fwtZumLinkMacTableClear Clear the MAC to nodeId mapping table and Read-Write ZUMLINK_NOW_
force routes to be relearned. OPTION
fwtZumLinkNoiseLevel Noise Level Read-only INTEGER
fwtZumLinkVSWR VSWR Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkTxSuccess Transmit Success Percentage Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkTxAvailability Transmit Availability Percentage Read-only Unsigned32

This document is subject to change without notice. This document is the property of FreeWave Technologies, Inc. and contains proprietary information owned
by FreeWave. This document cannot be reproduced in whole or in part by any means without written permission from FreeWave Technologies, Inc.
42. Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 MIB Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 User-Reference Manual

FreeWave Technologies - MIB

Object Description Access Syntax
fwtZumLinkRxSuccess Receive Success Percentage Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkSupplyVoltage Supply Voltage Read-only INTEGER
fwtZumLinkReset Read-Write ZUMLINK_RESET_
OPTIONS
fwtZumLinkFactoryDefaults Read-Write ZUMLINK_FDR_
OPTIONS
fwtZumLinkSave Read-Write ZUMLINK_NOW_
OPTION
fwtZumLinkTimeOutCli The number of seconds of idle before CLI Read-Write Unsigned32
connection will be closed.
fwtZumLinkMac_address Read-only MacAddress
fwtZumLinkIp_address IP address of unit. Read-Write IpAddress
fwtZumLinkNetmask Netmask of unit. Read-Write IpAddress
fwtZumLinkGateway Gateway of unit. Read-Write IpAddress
fwtZumLinkStpEnabled Spanning tree protocol is enabled or disabled. Read-Write TruthValue
fwtZumLinkTxqueuelen Sets the Ethernet transmit packet queue Read-Write Unsigned32
length.
fwtZumLinkMtu Sets the MTU frame size for the unit. Read-Write Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkNetmaskFilterEnabled Enable or disable bridge firewall. Read-Write TruthValue
fwtZumLinkNameserver_address1 DNS for name-to-address resolution. Read-Write IpAddress
fwtZumLinkNameserver_address2 DNS for name-to-address resolution. Read-Write IpAddress
fwtZumLinkArpFilterEnabled Enable or disable ARP filtering in bridge Read-Write TruthValue
firewall.
fwtZumLinkVlanMgmt Management VLAN ID for the device Read-Write Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkVlanTagPort1 VLAN Tag ID for the Ethernet Port1 Read-Write Unsigned32

This document is subject to change without notice. This document is the property of FreeWave Technologies, Inc. and contains proprietary information owned
by FreeWave. This document cannot be reproduced in whole or in part by any means without written permission from FreeWave Technologies, Inc.
42. Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 MIB Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 User-Reference Manual

FreeWave Technologies - MIB

Object Description Access Syntax
fwtZumLinkVlanTagPort2 VLAN Tag ID for the Ethernet Port2 Read-Write Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkRx_bytes Number bytes of Ethernet packets received Read-only Unsigned32
from the radio network.
fwtZumLinkRx_packets Number of Ethernet packets received from the Read-only Unsigned32
radio network.
fwtZumLinkRx_dropped Number of Ethernet packets received from the Read-only Unsigned32
radio network that were dropped at the
Ethernet interface.
fwtZumLinkRx_errors Number of Ethernet packets received from the Read-only Unsigned32
radio network that were had Ethernet errors.
fwtZumLinkTx_bytes Number bytes of Ethernet packets received Read-only Unsigned32
from the Ethernet port and sent over the radio
network.
fwtZumLinkTx_packets Number Ethernet packets received from the Read-only Unsigned32
Ethernet port and sent over the radio network.
fwtZumLinkTx_dropped Number Ethernet packets received from the Read-only Unsigned32
Ethernet port but dropped because the txqueue
was full.
fwtZumLinkTx_errors Number Ethernet packets received from the Read-only Unsigned32
Ethernet port that were in error.
fwtZumLinkNtpReference Clock reference for NTP. Read-Write ZUMLINK_NTP_
REFERENCE
fwtZumLinkNtpRestart Cause the NTP system to restart. Read-Write ZUMLINK_NOW_
OPTION
fwtZumLinkNtpDate Set the local time from other NTP servers on Read-Write ZUMLINK_NOW_
the network. OPTION

This document is subject to change without notice. This document is the property of FreeWave Technologies, Inc. and contains proprietary information owned
by FreeWave. This document cannot be reproduced in whole or in part by any means without written permission from FreeWave Technologies, Inc.
42. Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 MIB Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 User-Reference Manual

FreeWave Technologies - MIB

Object Description Access Syntax
fwtZumLinkNtp_address1 Server to be used for syncing time. Use 0.0.0.0 Read-Write DisplayString
to skip this server.
fwtZumLinkNtp_address2 Server to be used for syncing time. Use 0.0.0.0 Read-Write DisplayString
to skip this server.
fwtZumLinkNtp_address3 Server to be used for syncing time. Use 0.0.0.0 Read-Write DisplayString
to skip this server.
fwtZumLinkNtp_address4 Server to be used for syncing time. Use 0.0.0.0 Read-Write DisplayString
to skip this server.
fwtZumLinkNtp_address5 Server to be used for syncing time. Use 0.0.0.0 Read-Write DisplayString
to skip this server.
fwtZumLinkCom1Mode Com port mode Read-Write ZUMLINK_UART_
MODE
fwtZumLinkCom1Handler Protocol of the com port Read-Write ZUMLINK_UART_
HANDLER
fwtZumLinkCom1Baudrate Com port baud rate Read-Write ZUMLINK_UART_
BAUDRATES
fwtZumLinkCom1Databits Com port data bits Read-Write ZUMLINK_UART_
DATABITS
fwtZumLinkCom1Parity Com port parity Read-Write ZUMLINK_UART_
PARITY
fwtZumLinkCom1Stopbits Com port number of stop bits Read-Write ZUMLINK_UART_
STOPBITS
fwtZumLinkCom1Duplex Com port is full or half duplex Read-Write ZUMLINK_UART_
DUPLEX
fwtZumLinkCom1FlowControl Com port hardware flow control is not Read-Write ZUMLINK_UART_
supported. FLOWCONTROL_OFF

This document is subject to change without notice. This document is the property of FreeWave Technologies, Inc. and contains proprietary information owned
by FreeWave. This document cannot be reproduced in whole or in part by any means without written permission from FreeWave Technologies, Inc.
42. Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 MIB Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 User-Reference Manual

FreeWave Technologies - MIB

Object Description Access Syntax
fwtZumLinkCom1DelayBeforeSendMs Com port will delay sending in Ms to allow the Read-Write Unsigned32
other side to switch from tx to rx mode.
fwtZumLinkCom1BreakBeforeSendUs Com port will send a break signal for at least Read-Write Unsigned32
the number of microseconds specified before
sending the data.
fwtZumLinkCom1TerminalServerPort The TCP port number to use when handler is Read-Write Unsigned32
set to TerminalServer.
fwtZumLinkCom1TerminalServerTimeOut Terminal Server TimeOut Read-Write Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkCom1TxBytes The total bytes sent out of the Com port. Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkCom1RxBytes The total bytes received from the Com port. Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkCom1ConnectionDrops The number of terminal server connections Read-only Unsigned32
dropped due to inactivity.
fwtZumLinkCom2Mode Com port mode Read-Write ZUMLINK_UART_
MODE
fwtZumLinkCom2Handler Protocol of the com port Read-Write ZUMLINK_UART_
HANDLER
fwtZumLinkCom2Baudrate Com port baud rate Read-Write ZUMLINK_UART_
BAUDRATES
fwtZumLinkCom2Databits Com port data bits Read-Write ZUMLINK_UART_
DATABITS
fwtZumLinkCom2Parity Com port parity Read-Write ZUMLINK_UART_
PARITY
fwtZumLinkCom2Stopbits Com port number of stop bits Read-Write ZUMLINK_UART_
STOPBITS
fwtZumLinkCom2Duplex Com port is full or half duplex Read-Write ZUMLINK_UART_
DUPLEX

This document is subject to change without notice. This document is the property of FreeWave Technologies, Inc. and contains proprietary information owned
by FreeWave. This document cannot be reproduced in whole or in part by any means without written permission from FreeWave Technologies, Inc.
42. Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 MIB Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 User-Reference Manual

FreeWave Technologies - MIB

Object Description Access Syntax
fwtZumLinkCom2FlowControl Com port hardware flow control is on or off Read-Write ZUMLINK_UART_
FLOWCONTROL
fwtZumLinkCom2DelayBeforeSendMs Com port will delay sending in Ms to allow the Read-Write Unsigned32
other side to switch from tx to rx mode.
fwtZumLinkCom2BreakBeforeSendUs Com port will send a break signal for at least Read-Write Unsigned32
the number of microseconds specified before
sending the data.
fwtZumLinkCom2TerminalServerPort The TCP port number to use when handler is Read-Write Unsigned32
set to TerminalServer.
fwtZumLinkCom2TerminalServerTimeOut Terminal Server Time Out Read-Write Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkCom2TxBytes The total bytes sent out of the Com port. Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkCom2RxBytes The total bytes received from the Com port. Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkCom2ConnectionDrops The number of terminal server connections Read-only Unsigned32
dropped due to inactivity.
fwtZumLinkTermserv_relay_mapping Options for streaming between serial device Read-Write ZUMLINK_
servers. TERMSERV_RELAY_
MAPPING
fwtZumLinkRemote_termserv_ip_address IP address of remote terminal server. Read-Write IpAddress
fwtZumLinkUpTime The number of seconds since the unit Read-only Unsigned32
restarted.
fwtZumLinkUpTimeString The number days, hours:minutes:seconds Read-only DisplayString
since the unit restarted.
fwtZumLinkDcAppUptime The number of seconds since the main app Read-only DisplayString
restarted.
fwtZumLinkDcAppStartTime The timestamp of when the main app restarted. Read-only DisplayString
fwtZumLinkTimeString The current time. Read-Write DisplayString

This document is subject to change without notice. This document is the property of FreeWave Technologies, Inc. and contains proprietary information owned
by FreeWave. This document cannot be reproduced in whole or in part by any means without written permission from FreeWave Technologies, Inc.
42. Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 MIB Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 User-Reference Manual

FreeWave Technologies - MIB

Object Description Access Syntax
fwtZumLinkFileTransferStatus File Transfer Status Read-only DisplayString
fwtZumLinkEnablePtpInterface Enable PTP interface Read-Write TruthValue
fwtZumLinkEnableEthernetLogin Enable SSH logins Read-Write TruthValue
fwtZumLinkNeighborTableNumNeighbors Number of Neighbors Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkNeighborTableNodeId Device Node ID Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkNeighborTableNodeType Node Type Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkNeighborTableIpAddress Neighbor IP Address Read-only IpAddress
fwtZumLinkNeighborTableMacAddress Neighbor MAC Address Read-only MacAddress
fwtZumLinkNeighborTableDeviceName Device Name Read-only DisplayString
fwtZumLinkNeighborTableFWVersion Device Node ID Read-only DisplayString
fwtZumLinkNeighborTableCounter Neighbor Table Counter Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkNeighborTable This table gives detailed status information for Not Accessible
each neighbor of this node.
fwtZumLinkNeighborEntry A row containing status information for a Not Accessible
specific neighbor.
fwtZumLinkNeighborNodeId Neighbor Node ID Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkNeighborIpAddress Neighbor IP Address Read-only IpAddress
fwtZumLinkNeighborMacAddress Neighbor MAC Address Read-only MacAddress
fwtZumLinkNeighborNodeType Neighbor Node Type Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkNeighborRSSI Neighbor RSSI Read-only INTEGER
fwtZumLinkNeighborLinkMargin Neighbor Link Margin Read-only INTEGER
fwtZumLinkNeighborCounter Neighbor Table Counter Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkNeighborTimestamp Time When Node Info Received Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkNetworkTableDiscoveryState Start or Stop Network Discovery Read-Write INTEGER

This document is subject to change without notice. This document is the property of FreeWave Technologies, Inc. and contains proprietary information owned
by FreeWave. This document cannot be reproduced in whole or in part by any means without written permission from FreeWave Technologies, Inc.
42. Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 MIB Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 User-Reference Manual

FreeWave Technologies - MIB

Object Description Access Syntax
fwtZumLinkNetworkTableDiscoveryStatus Get Discover Network Status Read-only DisplayString
fwtZumLinkNetworkTableNumNodes Number of nodes in network Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkNetworkTableTimeStamp Timestamp for when network table was last Read-only Unsigned32
updated
fwtZumLinkNetworkTable This table gives detailed status information for Not Accessible
each neighbor of this node.
fwtZumLinkNetworkEntry A row containing status information for a Not Accessible
specific node.
fwtZumLinkNetworkNodeId Device ID Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkNetworkNodeType Node Type / Role Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkNetworkIpAddress IP Address Read-only IpAddress
fwtZumLinkNetworkMacAddress MAC Address Read-only MacAddress
fwtZumLinkNetworkDeviceName Device Name Read-only DisplayString
fwtZumLinkNetworkFwVersion Firmware Version Read-only DisplayString
fwtZumLinkNetworkHopCount number of hops from node id Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkNetworkNeighborTable Neighbor Nodes Not Accessible
fwtZumLinkNetworkNeighborEntry A row containing status information for a Not Accessible
specific neighbor node.
fwtZumLinkNetworkNeighborNodeId Neighbor Node ID Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkNetworkNeighborRSSI RSSI From Neighbor Node Read-only INTEGER
fwtZumLinkNetworkPathTable List of nodes in path from current node where Not Accessible
info is gathered to current node
fwtZumLinkNetworkPathEntry A row containing status information for a node Not Accessible
in the path.
fwtZumLinkNetworkPathIdx Index to a node in the path Not Accessible Unsigned32

This document is subject to change without notice. This document is the property of FreeWave Technologies, Inc. and contains proprietary information owned
by FreeWave. This document cannot be reproduced in whole or in part by any means without written permission from FreeWave Technologies, Inc.
42. Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 MIB Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 User-Reference Manual

FreeWave Technologies - MIB

Object Description Access Syntax
fwtZumLinkNetworkPathNodeId Node In Path From Current Node Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkNetworkPathRSSITable RSSI values between all the nodes along the Not Accessible
path
fwtZumLinkNetworkPathRSSIEntry A row containing RSSI for a node along the Not Accessible
path.
fwtZumLinkNetworkPathRssiIdx Index to a pair of source and destination nodes Not Accessible Unsigned32
along the path
fwtZumLinkNetworkPathRssiSrc Source Node Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkNetworkPathRssiDst Destination Node Read-only Unsigned32
fwtZumLinkNetworkPathRssiSrcDstRSSI Source Destination RSSI Read-only INTEGER
fwtZumLinkNetworkPathRssiDstSrcRSSI Source Destination RSSI Read-only INTEGER

This document is subject to change without notice. This document is the property of FreeWave Technologies, Inc. and contains proprietary information owned
by FreeWave. This document cannot be reproduced in whole or in part by any means without written permission from FreeWave Technologies, Inc.
42. Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 MIB Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 User-Reference Manual

42.5. SNMP Write Access

1. Verify v2cEnabled (on page 326) is enabled.
2. Make a note of the rwCommunityName (on page 323).

Note: The default is private if it was not changed.

>snmp
[Page=snmp]
v1Enabled=false
v2cEnabled=true
v3Enabled=false
roCommunityName=public
rwCommunityName=private
snmpUser
RESULT:0:OK

3. Perform the Read/Write using the snmp.rwCommunityName identified in Step 2.

Example
~$ snmpset -mFREEWAVE-TECHNOLOGIES-MIB -Pu -v2c -c private 192.168.2.10
fwtZumLinkRadioMode.0 i gateway
FREEWAVE-TECHNOLOGIES-MIB::fwtZumLinkRadioMode.0 = INTEGER: gateway(0)
~$ snmpget -mFREEWAVE-TECHNOLOGIES-MIB -Pu -v2c -c private 192.168.2.10
fwtZumLinkRadioMode.0
FREEWAVE-TECHNOLOGIES-MIB::fwtZumLinkRadioMode.0 = INTEGER: gateway(0)
~$ snmpset -mFREEWAVE-TECHNOLOGIES-MIB -Pu -v2c -c private 192.168.2.10
fwtZumLinkRadioMode.0 i endpoint
FREEWAVE-TECHNOLOGIES-MIB::fwtZumLinkRadioMode.0 = INTEGER: endpoint(1)
~$ snmpget -mFREEWAVE-TECHNOLOGIES-MIB -Pu -v2c -c private 192.168.2.10
fwtZumLinkRadioMode.0

This document is subject to change without notice. This document is the property of FreeWave Technologies, Inc. and contains proprietary information owned
by FreeWave. This document cannot be reproduced in whole or in part by any means without written permission from FreeWave Technologies, Inc.
42. Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 MIB Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 User-Reference Manual

FREEWAVE-TECHNOLOGIES-MIB::fwtZumLinkRadioMode.0 = INTEGER: endpoint(1)

4. After adjusting the settings, issue the save command.

Note: This is the same workflow as the CLI.

~$ snmpset -mFREEWAVE-TECHNOLOGIES-MIB -Pu -v2c -c private 192.168.2.10

fwtZumLinkSave.0 i now
FREEWAVE-TECHNOLOGIES-MIB::fwtZumLinkSave.0 = INTEGER: now(1)

Best practice for snmp.v2cEnabled is to change the snmp.rwCommunityName for a production network.

This document is subject to change without notice. This document is the property of FreeWave Technologies, Inc. and contains proprietary information owned
by FreeWave. This document cannot be reproduced in whole or in part by any means without written permission from FreeWave Technologies, Inc.
Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2
User-Reference Manual

Appendix A: Technical Specifications

Note: Specifications are subject to change without notice. For the most up-to-date specifications
information, see the product's data sheet available at www.freewave.com.

l Computing Resources (on page 454)

l Data Transmission (on page 454)
l General Information (on page 455)
l Interfaces (on page 456)
l Management (on page 456)
l Networking (on page 456)
l Power Requirements and Current Consumption (on page 457)
l Receiver (on page 457)
l Transmitter (on page 458)

Computing Resources
Note: Access to the Computing Resources for the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 requires licensing.
For information, contact FreeWave Sales at www.freewave.com/how-to-buy.

Computing Resources
Specification Description
CPU ARM Cortex-A8 1 GHz
RAM 1 GB
Storage 1 GB
OS Debian-based Linux

Data Transmission
Data Transmission
Specification Description
Type Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum
Modulation l 2 level GFSK
l 4- and 8-ary FSK
Link Throughput l Maximum of 1.6 Mbps
l 4 Mbps with Compression
Error Detection l ARQ
l CRC
l Retransmit on error
l Forward Error Correction (FEC)
Hopping Rates 400, 200, 100, 50, 25 ms
Hopping Channels l Maximum of 110 channels
l rfDataRate (on page 307) dependent
Hopping Patterns l Maximum of 16 patterns
l rfDataRate (on page 307) dependent
Protocol Adaptive Spectrum Learning (ASL)
User Interface Rate l Ethernet Rate: 10/100 Mbps
l Serial Rate: up to 250 kbps
Data Encryption 128-and 256-bit AES CCM
Advanced Features l Packet Aggregation
l Packet Compression

General Information
General Information
Specification Description
Operating Temperature l Z9-P2
l -40°C to +85°C
l -40°F to +185°F

Caution: This is the Z9-P2 temperature as defined for the

exposed copper heat sink surface of the ZumLink radio
PCB shown in the Z9-P2-Exposed Copper Heat Sink (on
page 458), Figure 268.
See Mechanical Drawing - Z9-P2 (on page 426).

l Z9-PE2
l -40°C to +75°C
l -40°F to +167°F

Note: This is the Z9-PE2 temperature as defined for the local

ambient air in contact with the product enclosure and assumes no
solar radiation.

Humidity 0 to 95% non-condensing

Dimensions l Z9-P2:
l 170.18 L x 86.6 W x 27.18 H (mm)
l 6.70 L x 3.41 W x 1.07 H (in)
l Z9-PE2:
l 191.00 L x 104.39 W x 41.91 H (mm)
l 7.52 L x 4.11 W x 1.65 H (in)
Weight l Z9-P2: 200.5 g (0.44 lbs)
l Z9-PE2: 750 g (1.7 lbs)
Reliability MTBF 206,186
Safety Class I, Division 2, Groups A-D
UL
Z9-P2:

Z9-PE2:

Interfaces
Interfaces
Specification Description
Data Connectors l Four RJ-45s
l 2 Ethernet
l 2 Serial
USB Connector l Micro USB
l Type A USB (Future Expansion)
RF Connector TNC
Power Connectors Phoenix Contact (# 1776692)

Important!: Torque to lock the conductors: 0.5-0.6 N-m. Torque

for the mating jack: 0.3 N-m.

Management
Management
Specification Description
Management l Enterprise MIB
l HTTP
l MIB-II
l Modbus
l SNMPv1/v2c/v3
l SSH

Networking
Networking
Specification Description
Serial l Modbus RTU
l Modbus/TCP
l TCP client
l TCP server
Traffic Filtering l ARP filter
l Netmask filter
VLAN 802.1Q

Power Requirements and Current Consumption

Current Consumption

Operating State Description

Operating Voltage +6 to +30 VDC
Idle Current 143 mA @ 12 VDC
Receive Current 159 mA @ 12 VDC
Transmit Current 377 mA @ 12 VDC

Power Requirements

Maximum Recommended
Operating Voltage
Current Draw Supplied Current
+6 VDC 870 mA 900 mA
+12 VDC 490 mA 520 mA
+24 VDC 270 mA 300 mA
+30 VDC 220 mA 250 mA

Receiver
Receiver
Specification Description
IF Selectivity > 40 dB
System Gain 135 dB
Sensitivity RF Data Rate Without FEC With FEC
115.2 kbps -105 dBm -108 dBm
250 kbps -102 dBm -105 dBm
500 kbps -99 dBm -102 dBm
1 Mbps -95 dBm -98 dBm
1.5 Mbps (Beta) -90 dBm -93 dBm
4 Mbps -83 dBm -86 dBm

Transmitter
Transmitter
Specification Description
Frequency Range l 902 to 928MHz
l Thailand:
Z9-P2-THA & Z9-PE2-THA: 920 to 925 MHz
Frequency Stability 15ppm
Output Power l 10mW to 1W
l User selectable
Output Impedance 50 ohms
Range 97 km (60 miles), clear line of sight
Channel Spacing l 230.4 kHz l 1382.4 kHz
l 345.6 kHz l 1612.8 (Beta) kHz
l 691.2 kHz l 3225.6 kHz

RF Data Rate l 115.2 kbps l 1 Mbps

l 250 kbps l 1.5 Mbps (Beta)
l 500 kbps l 4 Mbps

Z9-P2-Exposed Copper Heat Sink

Figure 268: Exposed Copper Heat Sink Surface of the Z9-P2 Radio PCB

Appendix B: OTA Interoperability

Model # / Firmware Compatibility OTA / Firmware Compatibility

Firmware Models Supported RF Data Rate
Device FW Radio FW Z9-PE2 Z9-P2 Z9-PE Z9-P Z9-PC Z9-PC-SR001 115.2kbps 250kbps 500kbps 1Mbps 1.5Mbps (Beta) 4Mbps
1.1.2.2 1.0.7.1 x x x x x x x XX XX x x x
1.1.1.2 1.0.7.1 NA NA x x x x x XX XX x x x
1.1.0.1 1.0.7.1 NA NA x x x x x XX XX x x x
1.0.7.0 1.0.7.0 NA NA x x x x x XX XX x x x
1.0.6.0 1.0.4.0 NA NA x x NA NA x x x x NA x
1.0.4.3 1.0.4.0 NA NA NA NA x x x x x x NA x
1.0.4.2 1.0.4.0 NA NA x x NA NA x x x x NA x

Note: XX Enhanced 250kbps & 500kbps RF Data Rates

This document is subject to change without notice. This document is the property of FreeWave Technologies, Inc. and contains proprietary information owned
by FreeWave. This document cannot be reproduced in whole or in part by any means without written permission from FreeWave Technologies, Inc.
Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 User-Reference Manual

Appendix C: Firmware & Feature Interoperability

Firmware & Feature Interoperability

Device Firmware Version v1.1.2.2 v1.1.1.2 v1.1.0.1 v1.0.7.0 v1.0.6.0 v1..0.4.3 v1.0.4.2
Radio Firmware Version v1.0.7.1 v1.0.7.1 v1.0.7.1 v1.0.7.0 v1.0.4.0 v1.0.4.0 v1.0.4.0
Feature
Z9-P2
Input Voltage N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Z9-PE2
Z9-P
Z9-PE Z9-P Z9-P
Z9-PC Z9-PE Z9-PE Z9-P
ZumIQ N/A N/A N/A
Z9-PC-SR001 Z9-PC Z9-PC Z9-PE
Z9-P2 Z9-PC-SR001 Z9-PC-SR001
Z9-PE2
VLAN Management X N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
ARP Filtering X X N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
VLAN (tagging and un-tagging) X X N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Encryption Key Radio Web Interface Configuration X X N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Network Diagnostics Diagram X X N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Modbus X X N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
VSWR X X X N/A N/A N/A N/A
Expanded Local Diagnostics
X X X N/A N/A N/A N/A
Noise level, RX success, TX availability, TX success

This document is subject to change without notice. This document is the property of FreeWave Technologies, Inc. and contains proprietary information owned
by FreeWave. This document cannot be reproduced in whole or in part by any means without written permission from FreeWave Technologies, Inc.
Appendix C: Firmware & Feature Interoperability Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 User-Reference Manual

Firmware & Feature Interoperability

Device Firmware Version v1.1.2.2 v1.1.1.2 v1.1.0.1 v1.0.7.0 v1.0.6.0 v1..0.4.3 v1.0.4.2
Radio Firmware Version v1.0.7.1 v1.0.7.1 v1.0.7.1 v1.0.7.0 v1.0.4.0 v1.0.4.0 v1.0.4.0
Feature
Expanded MIB
X X X N/A N/A N/A N/A
Query & configure most statistics and settings
Network Diagnostics Radio Web Interface X X X N/A N/A N/A N/A
Enhanced 250 & 500 kbps data rates
X X X X N/A N/A N/A
Improved sensitivity, noise filtering, interference
1.5 Mbps RF Data Rate (Beta) X X X X N/A N/A N/A
MacTable Entry-Age Timeout (Beta) X X X X N/A N/A N/A
128 128 128 20
Terminal Server Connections concurrent concurrent concurrent concurrent N/A N/A N/A
TCP TCP TCP TCP
Multiple Multiple Multiple Multiple Single Single Single
Repeaters
Repeaters Repeaters Repeaters Repeaters Repeater Repeater Repeater

This document is subject to change without notice. This document is the property of FreeWave Technologies, Inc. and contains proprietary information owned
by FreeWave. This document cannot be reproduced in whole or in part by any means without written permission from FreeWave Technologies, Inc.
Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 User-Reference Manual

Appendix D: LEDs

These are the LEDs for the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2.

Note: See Z9-P2 Port Connections (on page 21) or Z9-PE2 Port Connections (on page 21) for additional information.

Normal Operation
LEDs - Normal Operation
CD TX RX Condition Notes
Solid Red (Bright) Not Linked While operating with Frequency Hopping enabled,
this LED indicates the radio has NOT received the
beacon within the last 60 seconds.
Solid Green Radio linked The radio is linked with a margin of 20dB or greater
above sensitivity or noise level, whichever is
highest.
Solid Green Solid Green Receiving Data The radio is actively receiving data over the wireless
or RF link.
Alternate Solid
Green / Solid Red
(Bright)

This document is subject to change without notice. This document is the property of FreeWave Technologies, Inc. and contains proprietary information owned
by FreeWave. This document cannot be reproduced in whole or in part by any means without written permission from FreeWave Technologies, Inc.
Appendix D: LEDs Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 User-Reference Manual

LEDs - Normal Operation

CD TX RX Condition Notes
Solid Green Solid Green Transmitting Data The radio is actively transmitting data over the
or wireless RF link.
Alternate Solid
Green / Solid Red
(Bright)
Alternate Solid Solid Green Receiving Data l There are 4 blink rates for levels 15dB, 10dB,
Green / Solid Red 5dB, and 0dB above sensitivity or noise level,
(Bright) whichever is highest.
l The blink rates are faster as the levels increase
from the sensitivity / noise point.
l The RSSI level is based on the last packet
received.
l The pattern continues for 60 seconds after the
last received packet before turning back to if the
link has dropped.
Solid Amber (Yellow) Blinking Red Blinking Red Upgrading firmware or changing TX and RX blink in unison at a slow rate.
the configuration.
Blinking Green Off Off Upgrade or update succeeded.
5 Times
Blinking Red Off Off Upgrade or update failed.
5 Times

This document is subject to change without notice. This document is the property of FreeWave Technologies, Inc. and contains proprietary information owned
by FreeWave. This document cannot be reproduced in whole or in part by any means without written permission from FreeWave Technologies, Inc.
Appendix D: LEDs Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 User-Reference Manual

COM LEDs
Note: During boot, the COM LEDs will cycle indicating startup.

LEDs - COM
LED LED Color Description
COM1 Left Blinking Green Transmitting data on COM1.
COM1 Right Blinking Green Receiving data on COM1.
COM2 Left Blinking Green Transmitting data on COM2.
COM2 Right Blinking Green Receiving data on COM2.

Ethernet LEDs
LEDs - Ethernet
LED LED Color Description
Ethernet Left Solid Green l Shows Power.
l LED is lit while power is applied to the Ethernet module.
Ethernet Right Solid Green Shows Ethernet link but no activity.
Ethernet Right Blinking Green l Shows Activity.
l LED will blink / flicker while sending and receiving data on the Ethernet port.

This document is subject to change without notice. This document is the property of FreeWave Technologies, Inc. and contains proprietary information owned
by FreeWave. This document cannot be reproduced in whole or in part by any means without written permission from FreeWave Technologies, Inc.
Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2
User-Reference Manual

Appendix E: Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2

Files and Descriptions

When the Windows® File Explorer window of the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 is opened, there are default
files that appear.
This is a list of those files and descriptions of their purpose.

Note: If the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 has been updated or rebooted, other files may appear.

Figure 269: Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 Files shown in Windows® File Explorer

Files and Descriptions - Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2

File Name Description
boot_results.txt The boot_results.txt file shows the firmware version the device is currently
running.
config.txt The config.txt file contains all of the configuration parameters of the Z9-P2 or
Z9-PE2.
These parameters determine how the device functions and connects to other
devices in the network.
fw_upgrade_ The fw_upgrade_result.txt file shows the status of the update procedure for the
result.txt device firmware.

Note: This file appears after the ZumLink has been updated to a newer
version of firmware.

help.txt The help.txt file contains online user assistance information using the CLI
commands.

Example: In a CLI window, enter help=txPower or help txpower to see

the help information for the radioSetting.txpower setting.

layout.txt The layout.txt file is used for management applications to provide the CLI and
config.cfg with a format description of the commands.
modbuslayout.txt
Note: The modbuslayout.txt file is not used.

result.txt The result.txt is used to verify the acceptance or rejection of each parameter
change applied to the config.txt file.

Note: This file appears after the config.txt file of the ZumLink has been
changed.

sys_info.txt The sys_info.txt file provides information about the radio including serial
number, model number, firmware versions, and device name.

Appendix F: Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2

Modbus Register Map

This table provides a register map for the Modbus Input / Output devices.

Note: The Register Names that can be polled using Modbus correspond to the pages of the CLI.

Important!: By design, unused registers return 0 (zero).

Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 Modbus Register Map

Protocol Number Modbus
Register Name Type Address
Address Registers FC
radioSettings.radioMode uint32_t 31001 2 4 1000
radioSettings.rfDataRate uint32_t 31003 2 4 1002
radioSettings.radioMaxRepeaters uint32_t 31005 2 4 1004
radioSettings.radioRepeaterSlot uint32_t 31007 2 4 1006
radioSettings.txPower uint32_t 31009 2 4 1008
radioSettings.networkId uint16_t 31011 1 4 1010
radioSettings.nodeId uint16_t 31012 1 4 1011
radioSettings.frequencyKey uint32_t 31013 2 4 1012
radioSettings.radioFrequency float 31015 2 4 1014
radioSettings.radioHoppingMode uint32_t 31017 2 4 1016
radioSettings.beaconInterval uint32_t 31019 2 4 1018

Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 Modbus Register Map

Protocol Number Modbus
Register Name Type Address
Address Registers FC
radioSettings.beaconBurstCount uint32_t 31021 2 4 1020
radioSettings.lnaBypass uint32_t 31023 2 4 1022
radioSettings.maxLinkDistanceInMiles uint32_t 31025 2 4 1024
localDiagnostics.signalLevel int 32001 2 4 2000
localDiagnostics.signalMargin int 32003 2 4 2002
localDiagnostics.NoiseLevel int 32005 2 4 2004
localDiagnostics.VSWR uint32_t 32007 2 4 2006
localDiagnostics.TxSuccess uint32_t 32009 2 4 2008
localDiagnostics.TxAvailability uint32_t 32011 2 4 2010
localDiagnostics.RxSuccess uint32_t 32013 2 4 2012
localDiagnostics.timestamp uint32_t 32015 2 4 2014
localDiagnostics.RadioTx uint32_t 32017 2 4 2016
localDiagnostics.RadioRx uint32_t 32019 2 4 2018
localDiagnostics.RadioReliableTx uint32_t 32021 2 4 2020
localDiagnostics.RadioReliableRx uint32_t 32023 2 4 2022
localDiagnostics.RadioRexmit uint32_t 32025 2 4 2024
localDiagnostics.RadioAckTx uint32_t 32027 2 4 2026
localDiagnostics.RadioNoAckTx uint32_t 32029 2 4 2028
localDiagnostics.RadioTimedOut uint32_t 32031 2 4 2030
localDiagnostics.RadioBadAckRx uint32_t 32033 2 4 2032
localDiagnostics.RadioTooLong uint32_t 32035 2 4 2034
localDiagnostics.RadioTooShort uint32_t 32037 2 4 2036
localDiagnostics.RadioBadSync uint32_t 32039 2 4 2038
localDiagnostics.RadioBadCRC uint32_t 32041 2 4 2040
localDiagnostics.RadioContentionDrop uint32_t 32043 2 4 2042
localDiagnostics.RadioSendingDrop uint32_t 32045 2 4 2044
localDiagnostics.RadioLLTx uint32_t 32047 2 4 2046
localDiagnostics.RadioLLRx uint32_t 32049 2 4 2048
localDiagnostics.cntSTX uint32_t 32051 2 4 2050
localDiagnostics.cntETX uint32_t 32053 2 4 2052
localDiagnostics.cntBadSync uint32_t 32055 2 4 2054
localDiagnostics.cntBadBCC uint32_t 32057 2 4 2056

Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 Modbus Register Map

Protocol Number Modbus
Register Name Type Address
Address Registers FC
localDiagnostics.interfaceDataTx uint32_t 32059 2 4 2058
localDiagnostics.interfaceDataRx uint32_t 32061 2 4 2060
localDiagnostics.interfaceBytesTx uint32_t 32063 2 4 2062
localDiagnostics.interfaceBytesRx uint32_t 32065 2 4 2064
localDiagnostics.resetsDetected uint32_t 32067 2 4 2066
localDiagnostics.resetsSent uint32_t 32069 2 4 2068
localDiagnostics.SupplyVoltage float 32123 2 4 2122
localDiagnostics.SupplyVoltage_mV int 32125 2 4 2124
networkStats.rx_bytes uint32_t 32071 2 4 2070
networkStats.rx_packets uint32_t 32073 2 4 2072
networkStats.rx_dropped uint32_t 32075 2 4 2074
networkStats.rx_errors uint32_t 32077 2 4 2076
networkStats.tx_bytes uint32_t 32079 2 4 2078
networkStats.tx_packets uint32_t 32081 2 4 2080
networkStats.tx_dropped uint32_t 32083 2 4 2082
networkStats.tx_errors uint32_t 32085 2 4 2084
Com1.TxBytes uint32_t 32087 2 4 2086
Com1.RxBytes uint32_t 32089 2 4 2088
Com2.TxBytes uint32_t 32091 2 4 2090
Com2.RxBytes uint32_t 32093 2 4 2092
date.upTime uint32_t 32095 2 4 2094
date.time uint32_t 32097 2 4 2096
rfStats.UpPackets uint32_t 32099 2 4 2098
rfStats.UpBytes uint32_t 32101 2 4 2100
rfStats.UpErrors uint32_t 32103 2 4 2102
rfStats.UpRate double 32105 4 4 2104
rfStats.UpRateAvg double 32107 4 4 2106
rfStats.UpRateAvg2 double 32109 4 4 2108
rfStats.DownPackets uint32_t 32111 2 4 2110
rfStats.DownBytes uint32_t 32113 2 4 2112
rfStats.DownErrors uint32_t 32115 2 4 2114
rfStats.DownRate double 32117 4 4 2116

Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 Modbus Register Map

Protocol Number Modbus
Register Name Type Address
Address Registers FC
rfStats.DownRateAvg double 32119 4 4 2118
rfStats.DownRateAvg2 double 32121 4 4 2120

Appendix G: FreeWave Legal Information

Export Notification
FreeWave Technologies, Inc. products may be subject to control by the Export Administration Regulations (EAR)
and/or the International Traffic in Arms Regulations (ITAR). Export, re-export, or transfer of these products without
required authorization from the U.S. Department of Commerce, Bureau of Industry and Security, or the U.S.
Department of State, Directorate of Defense Trade Controls, as applicable, is prohibited. Any party exporting, re-
exporting, or transferring FreeWave products is responsible for obtaining all necessary U.S. government
authorizations required to ensure compliance with these and other applicable U.S. laws. Consult with your legal
counsel for further guidance.
Restricted Rights
Any product names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
companies and are hereby acknowledged.
This manual is only for use by purchasers and other authorized users of FreeWave products.
No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical,
or for any purpose without the express written permission of FreeWave Technologies, Inc. FreeWave reserves
the right to make changes to this manual without notice. FreeWave assumes no responsibility or liability for the
use of this manual or the infringement of any copyright or other proprietary right.
FreeWave products are designed and manufactured in the United States of America.

Warning! DO NOT OPEN THE ZumLink Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 WHEN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE IS
PRESENT.

GNU License Notification

Some of the software in the firmware is licensed under the GNU General Public License and other Open Source
and Free Software licenses. Contact FreeWave to obtain the corresponding source on CD.

FCC Notifications
FCC Supplier's Declaration of Conformity
FreeWave Technologies, Inc.
5395 Pearl Parkway, Boulder, CO 80301
Phone Number: 303.381.9200
Website: www.freewave.com
declare under our sole responsibility that the product Models: Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 complies with Part 15 of FCC
Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The content of this guide covers FreeWave Technologies, Inc. models sold under FCC ID: KNYPMT0101AB.
All models sold under the listed FCC ID(s) must be installed professionally and are only approved for use when
installed in devices produced by FreeWave Technologies or third party OEMs with the express written approval
of FreeWave Technologies, Inc. Changes or modifications should not be made to the device.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's
authority to operate the equipment.
FCC Part 15 Class A

Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with
the User-Reference Manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be
required to correct the interference at their own expense.

FCC NEMA Installation and Label

Where applicable, the models described in this guide must be installed in a NEMA enclosure. When any
FreeWave Technologies, Inc. module is placed inside an enclosure, a label must be placed on the outside of the
enclosure. The label must include the text: "Contains Transmitter Module with FCC ID: KNYPMT0101AB."
FCC Radiation Exposure Statement
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This
equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 52 cm between the radiator and your body.
FCC Notification of Power Warning
The ZumLink Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 covered in this document has a maximum transmitted output power of +30dBm.
The antennas used MUST provide a separation distance of at least 52 cm from all persons and MUST NOT be
co-located or operate in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
Argentina CNC
Identificación CNC
l Z9-P2 / Z9-PE2Contiene CNC ID: C-21612
ISED Notifications
This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. CAN ICES-3 (A)/NMB-3(A)
Ce dispositif est conforme aux normes permis-exemptes du Canada RSS d'industrie. L'opération est sujette aux
deux conditions suivantes: (1) ce dispositif peut ne pas causer l'interférence, et (2) ce dispositif doit accepter
n'importe quelle interférence, y compris l'interférence qui peut causer le fonctionnement peu désiré du dispositif.
CAN ICES-3 (A)/NMB-3(A)

ISED Host Installation and Label

The content of this documentation covers FreeWave Technologies, Inc. models sold under IC: 2329B-
PMT0101AB.
When any FreeWave Technologies, Inc. module is placed inside a Host, a label must be placed on the outside of
the Host. The label must include the text “Contains IC: 2329B-PMT0101AB".
ISED Radiation Exposure Statement
This system has been evaluated for RF Exposure per RSS-102 and is in compliance with the limits specified by
Health Canada Safety Code 6. The system must be installed at a minimum separation distance from the antenna
to a general bystander of 7.8 inches (20 cm) to maintain compliance with the General Population limits.
L’exposition aux radiofréquences de ce système a été évaluée selon la norme RSS-102 et est jugée conforme
aux limites établies par le Code de sécurité 6 de Santé Canada. Le système doit être installé à une distance
minimale de 7.8 pouces (20 cm) séparant l’antenne d’une personne présente en conformité avec les limites
permises d’exposition du grand public.
Professional Installation
All models sold under the listed IC ID must be professionally installed.
Thailand

This telecommunication equipment conforms to the standard or technical requirements of NBTC.

(This radio communication equipment has the electromagnetic field strength in compliance with the Safety
Standard for the Use of Radio communication Equipment on Human Health announced by the National
Telecommunications Commission.)
UL Power Source
Input power shall be derived from a certified, Class 2:
l single power source or
l a limited power source (LPS) in accordance with:
l UL 60950-1
l IEC/EN 60950-1
l CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-07.
l Input voltage for the Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 is +6 to +30 VDC.
UL and Safety Notification
Z9-P2 is a Recognized component under UL File Numbers: e484141 and e327789.

Z9-PE2 is a Listed component under UL File Numbers: e484141 and e327789.

E484141

Power Source
l Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 IS intended to be operated from a Limited Power Source (LPS) or Class 2 power source
in accordance with IEC/EN/UL 60950-1 and CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-07.
l The Z9-P2 or Z9-PE2 IS approved to operate with an input voltage range of +6 to +30 VDC.
l When used with external power supply by Kuantech KSAS012xxxyyyyzz where 'xxx' 060 to 240, 'yyyy' =
0020 minimum, zz = VU or HU or D5, the power supply shall be located within a max 50C ambient; used
with external by SHENZHEN MINGXIN POWER TECHNOLOGIES CO LTD MX15 Series, the power supply
shall be located within a max 40C ambient.
l Lorsqu'il est utilisé avec une alimentation externe par Kuantech KSAS012xxxyyyyzz où 'xxx' 060 à 240,
'aaaa' = 0020 minimum, zz = VU ou HU ou D5, l'alimentation doit être située dans une température
ambiante maximale de 50°C, utilisé avec externe par la série SHENZHEN MINGXIN POWER
TECHNOLOGIES CO LTD MX15, l'alimentation doit être située dans une plage de température ambiante
maximale de 40°C.
Standards and Editions
l HazLoc Standards
l ANSI / ISA-12.12.01-2015
l CAN / CSA C22.2 No. 213-15
l Nonincendive Electrical Equipment for Use in Class I and II, Division 2 and Class III, Division 1 and 2
Hazardous (Classified) Locations
l Ordinary Location Standards
l UL 60950, 2nd Edition
l CAN / CSA-C22.2 No. 60950, 2nd Edition
l IEC 60950, 2nd Edition
l EN 60950, 2nd Edition
l Essential Health and Safety Requirements related to the design and construction of products intended for
use in potentially explosive atmospheres given in Annex II to Directive 2014/34/EU of the European
Parliament and the Council. Compliance with:
l EN 60079-0:2012 + A11:2013
l EN 60079-15:2010
l DEMKO 16 ATEX 1705X Rev 1

l II 3 G Ex nA IIC T5/T6 Gc
Schedule of Limitations
l Antenna connection is internal wiring only.
l The Ex Components shall only be used in an area of not more than pollution degree 2, as defined in
IEC/EN60664-1.
l The Ex Components shall be installed in an enclosure with tool removable door or cover that provides a
degree of protection not less than IP 54 in accordance with IEC/EN60679-15.
l Transient protection shall be provided that is set at a level not exceeding 140% of the peak rated voltage
value at the supply terminals to the equipment.
l The T6 Tcode is allowed when used in a maximum rated ambient temperature of 60°C. (Z9-PE2 only)
l The T5 Tcode is allowed when used in a maximum rated ambient temperature of 75°C. (Z9-PE2 only)

Z9-P2 Only
l The maximum recorded temperature on the Z9-P2 was 99°C on U8 (interface board).
l All temperatures normalized to 85°C.
l Suitability of temperatures shall be determined in the end-use investigation, with consideration given to
conducting the heating test within the end-use application.
l Temperature code determination must be performed in the end-product evaluation.
l Connector J12 may not be provided with mating connectors. As such, the securement of these
connectors must be evaluated during end-product investigation.
Installation Instructions
l This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D OR non-hazardous
locations only.

Warning! EXPLOSION HAZARD – Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been
removed or the area is known to be non-hazardous.
AVERTISSEMENT – RISQUE D’EXPLOSION. NE PAS DEBRANCHER A MOINS QUE
L’ALIMENTATION N’AIT ETE COUPEE OU QUE L’ENDROIT SOIT CONNE POUR ETRE
NON DANGEREUX.

l This equipment is intended to be mounted within a suitable enclosure that is only accessible with the use
of a tool.

Z9 P Z9 PE User Manual
No ratings yet
Z9 P Z9 PE User Manual
445 pages
FGR2 User Manual and Ref Guide Rev Dec 2014
No ratings yet
FGR2 User Manual and Ref Guide Rev Dec 2014
115 pages
GBPPR 'Zine - Issue #83
No ratings yet
GBPPR 'Zine - Issue #83
97 pages
Z-Wave in A Nutshell
No ratings yet
Z-Wave in A Nutshell
84 pages
Manual FGR Plus RE
No ratings yet
Manual FGR Plus RE
98 pages
2nd Sep Full Set
100% (1)
2nd Sep Full Set
100 pages
Ultrawave BTS: Installation and Commissioning Guide Release 6.5
No ratings yet
Ultrawave BTS: Installation and Commissioning Guide Release 6.5
108 pages
Qubino Z Wave Plus Flush Shutter Module Zmnhcd3 Extended Manual
No ratings yet
Qubino Z Wave Plus Flush Shutter Module Zmnhcd3 Extended Manual
60 pages
W Interface
No ratings yet
W Interface
44 pages
P3. - Freewave z9-PE
No ratings yet
P3. - Freewave z9-PE
20 pages
Ezlo Plus User Manual
No ratings yet
Ezlo Plus User Manual
59 pages
Z-Wave and Z-Wave Long Range Network Layer Specification
No ratings yet
Z-Wave and Z-Wave Long Range Network Layer Specification
184 pages
Tek tds700d Series User Manual
No ratings yet
Tek tds700d Series User Manual
372 pages
Seismic Acquisition, Land System Equipment.
No ratings yet
Seismic Acquisition, Land System Equipment.
205 pages
Optimization Technic and Trick
No ratings yet
Optimization Technic and Trick
501 pages
Key Features: Z-Wave Interface Module
No ratings yet
Key Features: Z-Wave Interface Module
2 pages
FreeWave LDS0010AA ZumLink Z9 P2 PE2 Data Sheet Jul 2019
No ratings yet
FreeWave LDS0010AA ZumLink Z9 P2 PE2 Data Sheet Jul 2019
2 pages
Simrad RS87 морской радио станция
No ratings yet
Simrad RS87 морской радио станция
80 pages
typeABZ Datasheet Rev S
No ratings yet
typeABZ Datasheet Rev S
23 pages
Door Controller
No ratings yet
Door Controller
199 pages
Data PDF
No ratings yet
Data PDF
6 pages
Wireless I IO Expansion Module User MNL V1 - 0i
No ratings yet
Wireless I IO Expansion Module User MNL V1 - 0i
42 pages
FGR2-PLUS-User-Manual MODEM RADIO
No ratings yet
FGR2-PLUS-User-Manual MODEM RADIO
211 pages
Icom IC-R9000L Instruction Manual
No ratings yet
Icom IC-R9000L Instruction Manual
72 pages
Ug261: Efr32Mg12 2.4 GHZ 10 DBM Radio Board User'S Guide
100% (1)
Ug261: Efr32Mg12 2.4 GHZ 10 DBM Radio Board User'S Guide
34 pages
FELCOM 12 Operator's Manual M2 1-22-03
No ratings yet
FELCOM 12 Operator's Manual M2 1-22-03
182 pages
Manuals Fibaro Com Double Relay Switch
No ratings yet
Manuals Fibaro Com Double Relay Switch
18 pages
Guardmaster Configurable Safety Relay: User Manual
No ratings yet
Guardmaster Configurable Safety Relay: User Manual
190 pages
Manuals Fibaro Com Relay Switch
No ratings yet
Manuals Fibaro Com Relay Switch
18 pages
Ef Johnson 7780snszservman
No ratings yet
Ef Johnson 7780snszservman
116 pages
RMB-35-ZW 2a 20200122
No ratings yet
RMB-35-ZW 2a 20200122
3 pages
An633 PDF
No ratings yet
An633 PDF
86 pages
An633 PDF
No ratings yet
An633 PDF
86 pages
Double Smart Module
No ratings yet
Double Smart Module
30 pages
Fibaro Single/Double Switch 2: Operating Manual
No ratings yet
Fibaro Single/Double Switch 2: Operating Manual
26 pages
Zwpt826X Serial Modbus Lora Io Dtu Datasheet Rev A: Xi'An Zenlytech Electronic Technology Co., LTD
No ratings yet
Zwpt826X Serial Modbus Lora Io Dtu Datasheet Rev A: Xi'An Zenlytech Electronic Technology Co., LTD
12 pages
Topcom Mira 200 Manual de Usuario
No ratings yet
Topcom Mira 200 Manual de Usuario
19 pages
Gigabeam G1.25 Installation and Operations Manual 031706
No ratings yet
Gigabeam G1.25 Installation and Operations Manual 031706
158 pages
Motherboard Manual Ga-7zx-1 (Rev1.x) e
No ratings yet
Motherboard Manual Ga-7zx-1 (Rev1.x) e
92 pages
DIA4ED2150902EN
No ratings yet
DIA4ED2150902EN
16 pages
Manual Inbouwschakelaar
No ratings yet
Manual Inbouwschakelaar
4 pages
025 9659 PDF
No ratings yet
025 9659 PDF
102 pages
Z Wave Vision Wireless Siren Battery Powered Gen5 Manual
No ratings yet
Z Wave Vision Wireless Siren Battery Powered Gen5 Manual
3 pages
RRU5909&RRU5309&RRU5309w&RRU3959a Installation Guide
100% (1)
RRU5909&RRU5309&RRU5309w&RRU3959a Installation Guide
123 pages
Tool Suite User Manual V2 8 (LUM0030AB Rev C) PDF
No ratings yet
Tool Suite User Manual V2 8 (LUM0030AB Rev C) PDF
110 pages
PC78LTW
No ratings yet
PC78LTW
16 pages
Felcom 12 Operators Manual
No ratings yet
Felcom 12 Operators Manual
182 pages
FGR2 User Manual
No ratings yet
FGR2 User Manual
136 pages
DCH-Z510 Z-Wave Siren: Product Overview
No ratings yet
DCH-Z510 Z-Wave Siren: Product Overview
5 pages
SQR62101WHZ: Installation Instructions
No ratings yet
SQR62101WHZ: Installation Instructions
2 pages
PC68XL
No ratings yet
PC68XL
15 pages
PC68LT
No ratings yet
PC68LT
16 pages
Activity No 03
No ratings yet
Activity No 03
4 pages
Kcse Analysis From 2017 To 2023 Mathematics Tr. Brian PP1 and PP2
No ratings yet
Kcse Analysis From 2017 To 2023 Mathematics Tr. Brian PP1 and PP2
4 pages
Alcatel Microwave Link Presentation
No ratings yet
Alcatel Microwave Link Presentation
72 pages
Service Manual: Uhf Transceiver
No ratings yet
Service Manual: Uhf Transceiver
40 pages
EXALT Manual
No ratings yet
EXALT Manual
148 pages
IC-M700pro Instruction Manual
No ratings yet
IC-M700pro Instruction Manual
28 pages
Sales Proposal 291KW Karachi Club Annex v1
100% (1)
Sales Proposal 291KW Karachi Club Annex v1
7 pages
The Views Tangent Pile-Method Statement
No ratings yet
The Views Tangent Pile-Method Statement
5 pages
HIPOT Testing Dielectric Strength Test
No ratings yet
HIPOT Testing Dielectric Strength Test
4 pages
Css s24 Model Answer Paper of Summer 2024 Exam Css
No ratings yet
Css s24 Model Answer Paper of Summer 2024 Exam Css
31 pages
Proposed TCDA Supplement - Draft: GEH-6195C Application Manual
100% (1)
Proposed TCDA Supplement - Draft: GEH-6195C Application Manual
1 page
Mazda Technical Service Training Air Conditioning Fundamentals
100% (60)
Mazda Technical Service Training Air Conditioning Fundamentals
9 pages
Differences Between Precision and Comfort Cooling
No ratings yet
Differences Between Precision and Comfort Cooling
5 pages
BCM84891L Broadcom
No ratings yet
BCM84891L Broadcom
181 pages
09c Alteon 500-201 Alteon Outbound SSL Detailed Configuration v1
No ratings yet
09c Alteon 500-201 Alteon Outbound SSL Detailed Configuration v1
44 pages
21ai601 LM1 23 23
No ratings yet
21ai601 LM1 23 23
13 pages
Research Paper-Business Analytics
No ratings yet
Research Paper-Business Analytics
13 pages
Upright Design
No ratings yet
Upright Design
5 pages
Dibrugarh University Certificate
No ratings yet
Dibrugarh University Certificate
2 pages
Accops Product Editions
No ratings yet
Accops Product Editions
12 pages
BERLIN VERSION Beacfbd - 2022-10-24
No ratings yet
BERLIN VERSION Beacfbd - 2022-10-24
41 pages
Project Phase II Final
No ratings yet
Project Phase II Final
22 pages
PFA - Lecture 2 Food Sampling
No ratings yet
PFA - Lecture 2 Food Sampling
26 pages
Installation Guide
No ratings yet
Installation Guide
19 pages
Rakib Talukder
No ratings yet
Rakib Talukder
5 pages
Extract Greek Text PDF
No ratings yet
Extract Greek Text PDF
2 pages
Nursing Informatics and Its Scope: April 2022
No ratings yet
Nursing Informatics and Its Scope: April 2022
4 pages
DataSMART 656
No ratings yet
DataSMART 656
2 pages
Optimization of Vane Diffuser in A Mixed-Flow Pump For High Efficiency Design
No ratings yet
Optimization of Vane Diffuser in A Mixed-Flow Pump For High Efficiency Design
7 pages
Hermetic Connector Product Guide and Cross Reference: Ampi Mil-Spec
No ratings yet
Hermetic Connector Product Guide and Cross Reference: Ampi Mil-Spec
2 pages
JITC Certification HigherGround Call Recording
No ratings yet
JITC Certification HigherGround Call Recording
20 pages
Logistic Binary Classification
No ratings yet
Logistic Binary Classification
3 pages
Precision Fluxgate Compass: Model
No ratings yet
Precision Fluxgate Compass: Model
2 pages
BGN GIO Cloud Price
No ratings yet
BGN GIO Cloud Price
3 pages
Z-Wave Essentials
From Everand
Z-Wave Essentials
Christian Paetz
5/5 (1)
CompTIA A+ Certification All-in-One Study Guide: Exams (Core 1: 220-1101 and Core 2: 220-1102)
From Everand
CompTIA A+ Certification All-in-One Study Guide: Exams (Core 1: 220-1101 and Core 2: 220-1102)
Georgio Daccache
No ratings yet
Fortinet FCP - FortiGate 7.6 Administrator Exam Preparation
From Everand
Fortinet FCP - FortiGate 7.6 Administrator Exam Preparation
Georgio Daccache
No ratings yet
Fortinet FCP - FortiGate 7.4 Administrator Exam Preparation
From Everand
Fortinet FCP - FortiGate 7.4 Administrator Exam Preparation
Georgio Daccache
No ratings yet

Note: This service is not intended for secure transactions such as banking, social media, email, or purchasing. Use at your own risk. We assume no liability whatsoever for broken pages.